Home

PARIS DESIGNER REFERENCE MANUAL

1. GRAPHIC Fah IMAGE Ful CEP scaling options not supported TEXT O Ins S JDE Parial Paristakes JDEasENVname O Z O Z O O O JDL Paris will ignore the JDL unless there is no JDE command in ea LR which case the JDL name is taken as the ENV name MARGIN Full MODIFY Pat NEXTFILE Extension Closes current file and opens next NUMBER NS OTEXT Cheked OTRAY Extension Sends output to sample tray OVERPRINT NS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PAGEDEF Extension Same as CEPFORMAT PMOE Ful J PASS Extension Turns passthrough ON OFF PRINTER Extension Specify a pre determined destination _RESET __ Extension Resets printer resources RESOURCE Extension Downloads resources to Paris RFORM_ NS Checked Ful NS Ful jFul Table 7 6 DJDE Functions Supported 276 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu How ARE EMBEDDED RUNTIME EVENTS ACTIVATED ees Events menu gt Runtime Events Runtime Events dialogue Runtime events are activated via the Runtime Events dialogue Select Runtime fro
2. Click on the All button to select all the fonts The Copy button will be activated 4 Click on the Copy button to copy the fonts Click on a font to select it individually to the Objects list Click on a selected font to de select it Click on the None button to de select ALL selected fonts Internal Clipboard Objects Arial 10 Regular 5 0 Ipi Arial 10 Bold 0 1633 in Arial 10 Bold Italic 7 0 Ipi Arial 12 Regular 57 0 dts Arial 12 Bold 59 0 dts Arial 12 Italic 5 0 Ipi Arial 12 Bold Italic 57 0 dts Arial 8 Regular 7 0 Ipi Arial 36 Bold Italic 172 0 dts a drial 19 Italie 8 N Ini 5 Click on the Exit button to qe return to the View Change All Nore jy Font List dialogue Clipboard rial 10 Re Zopy f NOTE The original fonts will remain in the Clipboard section of the dialogue You can either select the Delete button to remove them from the Clipboard or they will be automatically removed when you exit the Paris Designer The Paris Designer Reference Manual 541 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function View Change Font List x Font List Regular 0 1633 in 10 Bold Italic 7 0 Ipi 12 Regular 57 0 dts 12 Bold 59 0 dts 12 Italic 5 0 Ipi 12 Bold Italic 57 0 dts 7 0 Ipi The copied fonts will be displayed in the Font List 6 Choose OK to exit the Font List dialogue
3. The Font Reference Utility provides two important functions within the Paris system 1 It maintains the link between Xerox CEP font names and Paris internal font naming conventions Xerox CEP fonts are imported into the Paris system via the optional Paris Conversion Manager product 2 It maintains any bitmap fonts imported into the Paris system either by the conversion of Xerox CEP or HP LaserJet bitmap fonts or by the upgrade of a Lapr s system to Paris using the Paris Resource Manager utility Refer to The Resource Manager on page 290 303 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu USING THE FONT REFERENCE UTILITY Mapped Font Names When converting Xerox CEP applications into Paris a mapping or cross reference is required to match Xerox font names with Paris internal fonts The Paris Conversion Manager will automatically store this information during the conversion of the Xerox CEP fonts It is only rarely that you would need to manually maintain this mapping In the Font Reference Utility dialogue when a particular Paris font is selected from the list of font families its corresponding Xerox CEP names will be displayed in the Mapped Font Names area of the dialogue A Xerox CEP font name can be supplied for each orientation NOTE It is valid to supply ALL SOME or NO mapping names When a Xerox CEP resource such as an FRM makes reference to a Xerox CEP
4. The Paris Designer Reference Manual 119 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Do NEED TO MODIFY THE INPUT FILTER FOR MY PRINT FILES The Paris Designer is supplied with a default Input Filter DFLT FIL which should cater for the majority of printstreams If required the default Input Filter can be modified and saved as a new Input Filter which can be loaded at any time and applied to the environments you create It is important to note that the Input Filter only acts on the environment within which it is defined In most cases print data will be coming from a single host and will have the same structure from job to job Therefore the Input Filter would normally be the same within all your environments The common practice of users of the Paris Designer is to set up the default environments DFLTP ENV and DFLTL ENV to suit their print files including modifying the Input Filter The first time the Input Filter is modified it can be saved as a FIL file refer to Using the Input Filter to set the character functions on page 7 22 Once you have modified and saved the Input Filter to suit your print files you do not have to load it each time you create a new environment The Input Filter defined in the default environment or any existing environment you are using as a template will apply to the new environment Al xl Select Enter Save File name Save in To save a new Input Filter select the
5. m Page Para Events Type Options Description r Local Text Block Eve Type mme Add Select Device Features T Select Device Features m Select Device Features Event X r Description r Device Specific Features 5 M Add Remove r Tests 1st Test None 2nd Tiest cea The Paris Designer Reference Manual 599 Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris 3 Run Time Events A runtime event called FEATURE name type is available This is is a page based event and will apply at the next page boundary The parameters are the name of the feature to call 1 e Binding and optionally the type of the feature The values for type are XJT JOBCOMMENT JOBCODE and PAGE If the type parameter is missing it is assumed to be PAGE The XJT JOBCOMMENT and JOBCODE types only have effect if specified before the first page of the Job More About Features 600 If a job asks for a feature that the current XPD file does not support then nothing happens this is not considered an error and printing will continue If two printers implement the same feature ie binding but use different code to achieve this then the XPD files for each printer should have the same feature name defined but with different code If one printer requires the activation to be in the Job Ticket and another requires it in the Job Preamble then each printer XPD shou
6. Cancel 3 Select the Edit tool and click on the graphic to select the frame 4 Stretch the frame by moving the pointer outwards or compress the frame by moving the pointer inwards then click to display the re scaled graphic f NOTE Re scaling of graphics is only supported on PostScript printers The Paris Designer Reference Manual 415 Chapter 18 Editing Dynamic and Static Graphic Settings Paris Form Editor MS FRONT loj x File System View Tools Text Editing Help D uw E 5G rS gwDm S S mE ph GLOBAL AIRLINES Globe Amknss inc MilaSavar A apis ranon Suice 100 L ev dI 200 Sr Gaog gas Tce Aus Tawa 407058 1 Brian J Goodman 1345 El more Strea I Your MileSaver Mem bersh io md eor M CT m 5 B California Your Global Airline Account Re Scaling a Graphic Paris Form Editor MS FRONT Oj x File System View Tools Text Editing Help le M amp ldectimgmi amp eus GLOBAL AIRLINES Global Atrimas inc MilaSavgr A dms ranon Sna 100 Lav wi 200 St G utr gas Tea Aus raa 407056 Prie lI M we deo m 1345 Elmore Street Your MileSaver Mem bership Newhampton California Your Global Airline Account The Graphic Re Scaled 416 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 19 EDITING CHART SETTINGS The Default Chart Settings dialogue is used to edit the default attributes for a chart before it is added to a form or environment The View
7. iew Change Translation Table x r Character encodings Double click in the Dutput Char column to change a translation code Output Codes in Red have been changed from the default Input Char OutputChar_ 4 Display Hex Load Save j Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual Use the Save button to save the settings of a Translation Table Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu AT WHAT STAGE OF PROCESSING IS THE TRANSLATION TABLE APPLIED The Translation Table is applied after the Input Filter but before most other processes in the Paris Designer The section The Input Filter Function on page 109 describes the Input Filter and its use e The Translation Table is applied after the Input Filter e The Translation Table is applied before the Printer Character Control PCC interpretation Refer to The Spacing Settings function on page 147 the Run Time Event DJDE interpretation Refer to Run Time Events in Chapter 6 of this manual any Input Record Events including Record Selection Deletion and Job Separation Refer to Input Record Events in Chapter 6 of this manual allconditional output processing that is before the processing of any conditional Local Text Block events Refer to Adding Local Text Block Events in Chapter 20 of this manual and Chapter 7 Using Events in The Paris Designer User s Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual
8. Cancel 5 Choose OK to return to the Environment Editor The inserted field will be displayed in the text block 6 Click on the Right mouse button to exit Edit mode f NOTE Using Method 2 more than one field can be inserted The Paris Designer Reference Manual 485 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Deleting a field inserted into a text block gt To delete an inserted field EITHER 4 Click on the Edit tool then click on the text block that contains the inserted field 5 Move the cursor to the insert position of the field which will be displayed in the Status Bar as Field fieldname 6 Press the Del key gt NOTE You cannot delete the field if you have placed the cursor WITHIN the field OR 5 Choose the View Tool then click on the text block that contains the inserted field The View Change Text Block Settings dialogue will be displayed 6 Click on the Events button to display the View Change Event List 7 Select the Data Change event from the list that contains the inserted field 8 Press the Delete key To check the contents of the Data Change event before deletion click on the Edit button 486 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings When To Change When To Change First Line EN Number of Lines po First Char iat Number of Chars 73 1st Test JEND 4 2nd Test Enter the position of the first line
9. Select the View tool and X click on the selected text Description block to display the View Change Text Block Settings dialogue to add the Data Change event r What To Change Click on the Events Color 73 View Change button to display the View Change Font Line Printer 9 Regular Events list and choose SSS Data Change event from T Text the drop down menu Position 0 0 Click on the Add button Width 0 0 Justify fier z to display the Data Change Event dialogue FP Case To Upper Case v Click in the Fill Field Onti 5 checkbox to activate the Options Options button then click on Options to open m When To Change the Fill Field Settings Across Specified Range dialogue First Line l Number of Lines n First Char mE Number of Chars fo st Test NONE z 2nd Test Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 331 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer gt To fill the Goods field Add the Field Settings as you would normally do when filling a Fill Field Settings xj field with extracted text If ATE Description necessary refer to your Paris Goods Nett Help or Filling a field with ptions a extracted text in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Field Goods Update Fi First Char 63 Num Chars fio Choose OK to return to the Data Change Event dialogue an
10. r Local Text Block Events Edit Delete Clip Change Form Event x Choose Change Form from the drop down r Description menu then click on the hoo Add button to display the Change Form Event dialogue Form Change T o Tests 1st Test NONE z 2nd Test Cancel 502 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Select Enter File To Load Look in Frm z Choose the required form BAJAUTOSAVE MS FRONT RM sa M 3 from the list then choose AUTOSAVE MYNEW FRM 3ayfis CONT FRM Open The form name will e CHART FRM MS FORMI FRM appear in the Change Form FILECOPY FRM ai MS FORM2 FRM Event dialogue Greyscal frm fa MS FRONT FRM HIINVOICE FRM File name INVOICE FRM Files of type FRM Cancel Change Form Event x r Description invoice Form Change Select the 1 Test button to display the View Change Test Form dialogue and set the test Change To INVOICE conditions for the event Refer to Using Tests in Tests Chapter 7 of this manual 1st Test NONE 2nd Test Seed 6 Oncethe test conditions have been set return to the dialogue then choose OK Exit the remaining dialogues and return to the Environment Editor The Paris Designer Reference Manual 503 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings How ARE CHANGE BACK FORM E
11. 2 Select LPD as the input source from the Type drop down menu then choose OK The Select Enter Save File name dialogue will be displayed 43 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu gt To create a destination file name 1 Enter a name in the File text field with a DTA extension for example TEST3 DTA the path name will default to PARIS DTA Select Enter Save File name 2 xl Save in Cd Dta c E3 a Ms stat dta ja TEST DTA File name TEST3 DTA Save as type DTA Cancel 2 Choose Save The LPD Log will be displayed ioi x Time Status 13299 LPD Server started waiting for con Ell 11 32 55 Thread Listening 3 From your host computer send the LPR The LPD Log on your PC will reflect the reception of the data which will be sent to the destination file name in the PARIS DTA directory 4 Close the LPD server when finished Once a data file has been captured you can use it repeatedly within the Environment Editor Refer to Loading a Sample of the Printstream Data on page 32 and Creating Editing Model Printstream Data on page 45 44 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CREATING EDITING MODEL PRINTSTREAM DATA Yi c File menu gt Data Edit Data Edit Data File dialogue When designing an environment in the majority of cases you will need to work with an accurate sample of the actual printst
12. View Change Media Mappings Select the m Current Environment Mappings environment Select the Edit button Add Edit Delete Cancel Tray mapping can be added to the environment or the current mapping can be edited or deleted refer to the previous sections View Change Environment Mapping Settings Environment MYNE Lower White 75 Label Upper White 75 Label Any Size Add E dit DK Cancel 570 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function MATCHING THE MAPPINGS TO THE PRINTER The final step is to ensure the mappings match the printer The physical Docuprint printer must be configured to match these media using the SETTRAY console command It is not within the scope of this manual to describe the working of the SETTRAY function on the Docuprint Refer to your Docuprint documentation for this information The Paris Designer Reference Manual 571 Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function PARIS STOCKSET SUPPORT Paris has additional support for StockSets The full range of CEP CLUSTER STOCKSET functionality is still not implemented but the new additions allow greater flexibility in mapping between StockSets and Paris input trays Create a StockSet xpi file To support StockSet a file StockSet xpi should be created and placed in the ENV subdirectory of the Paris system This file allows you to map the St
13. 22 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 1 gt File FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR FILE MENU The File Menu lists the functions relevant to loading and saving environment files opening capturing and editing data files printing selecting and modifying printers and resetting resources Below the Exit option up to four of the most recently used environments will be displayed Table 1 1 shows the File menu options the dialogue displayed when the option is chosen if applicable and the function of the option Each function and the use of any associated dialogue are described in detail on the following pages The Paris Designer Reference Manual 23 Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Function amp Dialogue Used to Open Env Alt O Select Enter File To Open an existing environment Load file ENV Save Env Alt S Save environment information to an ENV file Save Env As Alt A Select Enter Save File Create an environment file name ENV Env Info File Information Record information about the ENV file Enter printing information for job ticketing Data Open Data Alt D Select Enter File to Load Open a sample data file DTA Select Input Source for Capture sample data stream to Capture Data Data Capture use for creation and testing of an environment Edit Data Edit Data File Edit the DTA file Print Alt P Send the current page to the printer for proofing Select Pri
14. Click on the Add button to display the Add Edit Field dialogue Type in the field name and choose the field type Repeat the process until you have added the Field List fields you require Current Fields Name Type Curent Value a Inv Num AlphaNumeric XD503381 InvDate AlphaNumeric 21 Sep 38 CustOrd AlphaNumeric cime SalesRef AlphaNumeric x Cust ccNo AlphaNumeric Attributes Terms AlphaNumeric 3 Name DueDate AlphaNumeric Type a haNumeric Index Ada 2 Edit m Reset fat Page Start Calculate 2 r Values Default Current Cancel 328 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer The Field List below illustrates the specific fields we have added to our environment to use in relation to currency conversion Goods VAT Gross EuroGoods EuroVAT and EuroGross Field List x Current Fields Name Type Curent Value a VATRate AlphaNumeric 17 5 Goods AlphaNumeric 2444 00 VAT AlphaNumeric 427 70 Gross AlphaNumeric 2871 70 EuroGoods Currency 0 0 Bi EuroVat Currency 0 0 EuroGross Currency 0 0 El The Paris Designer Reference Manual 329 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Filling fields using a local text block Data Change event To fill the fields Goods Alphanumeric VAT Currency and Gross Currency we are going to use a local text block Data Change Event x m At
15. m the PC s Serial port m LPD m a Novell print queue f NOTE Novell print queues will only be displayed if you have the Novell client 32 bit netware on your PC 18 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu How DO CAPTURE A DATA FILE FROM THE SERIAL PORT 1 Choose the Capture Data option from the Data sub menu The Select Input Source for Data Capture dialogue will be displayed In the Input Type section of the dialogue the Type drop down menu will display a list of available options including Serial Port and any available Novell or LPD print queue Select Input Source For Data Ca x r Input Type Type Serial Part 4 2 Select Serial Port from the drop down menu to display a list of serial ports r Input Source COM2 COM3 COM4 Settings Cancel 2 Select the Serial Port option to display a list of four serial ports COMI to COMA 35 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Select Input Source For Data Cap xjl Input Type View Change Serial Port Settings x Type Serial Port Byte Settings Data Bits s Bits Stop Bits f Bit m Y Parity Nene Y Input Source Baud Rate 93600 mae m Handshaking COM4 Hardware Handshaking DTR and RTS v Software Handshaking Start
16. 312 Select Euro Access Level x View Conversion Rates View Conversion Rates View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates Edit Any Rate Cancel al BEF Belgiu FIM Finland FRF France 6 55957 v Add Edit Delete Variable Rates The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Viewing Fixed Rates Adding or Editing Variable Rates gt To add or edit a variable rate Click on the Utilities menu in the Environment Editor and choose Euro Rates from the menu to display the Select Euro Access Level dialogue 2 Choose View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates from the drop down menu then choose OK The Password text field will become available for entry of the default password Operator View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates View Fixed Rates Edit Yarable Rates Edit Any Rate Cancel 3 Enter the password Operator then choose OK The Rates dialogue will be E Rates dialogue will be Select Euro Access Level Ea displayed The Add button beneath the View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates Variable Rates section of the dialogue will be available s Password pee Change If previous variable currency Cancel rates have already been added the Edit and Delete buttons will also be available The Paris Designer Reference Manual 313
17. 38 2E 258 35 OD 65 30 75 20 20 10 10 00 20 20 28 50 20 20 30 2E 59 05 15 10 33 38 00 38 20 20 60 2E 36 97 6 an 2n amp 22 1n nn zl Cancel Apply 51 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu LOADING A MODEL SAMPLE DATA FILE INTO THE EDIT DATA FILE DIALOGUE 52 The Load button in the Edit Data File dialogue is used to load a data file from the PARIS DTA directory For example you could use this method to load and edit a model or sample data file for which you have already created an environment You cannot view the effect of any changes you make until you save the file exit the Edit Data File dialogue then load the edited file into the Environment Editor Refer to the previous section Editing a model data file To open a data file into the Edit Data File dialogue 1 Select the Load button to display the Select Enter File To Load DTA dialogue Select the required file from the File list then choose OK The file will be loaded into the Edit Data File dialogue You can view and edit the file in Text View ASCII or Hex View Hexadecimal by selecting the appropriate tab Edit the file as required then click on the Save button to save the file Either Type a new name for the file in the File field then choose Save Or Choose the current filename from the File List then choose Save A warning will appear requesting confirmatio
18. F1 and then if necessary convert that value to a floating point number The following descriptions of each function detail the parameters if any the function requires and what it returns The functions available are NUM parameter This function converts parameter into a Numeric Floating Value If parameter is an alphanumeric value containing non numeric characters then 0 0 zero is returned Examples NUM XYZ returns 0 0 zero NUM 61 returns 61 0 NUM 1 24 returns 1 24 NUM 35 76 returns 35 76 NUM 3 45 returns 45 0 STR parameter This function converts parameter into an alphanumeric string Examples STR ABC returns ABC STR 34 67 returns 34 67 STR 83 returns 83 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 209 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu RND parameter This function converts parameter into a Numeric whole number If parameter is an alphanumeric value containing non numeric characters then 0 zero is returned Numeric Floating Values are rounded down to a whole number Examples RND ABC returns 0 zero RND 45 returns 45 RND 3 01 returns 3 RND 23 returns 23 RND 45 99 returns 45 CUR parameter This function returns the current value of the field parameter If parameter is not a valid field Name an error will be reported The calculation string for this field is NOT executed before retur
19. off and in the binary numbering system base 2 and in written text the on bit is a 1 and the off bit is a 0 According to a recognized encoding system a series of bits are combined to represent a character This combination of bits is called a byte A byte is made up of eight binary bits therefore each byte eight bits could have one of 256 2 possible configurations of on and off states For example in the ASCII encoding system the bit configurations of 01000001 and 01000010 represent the characters A and B ASCII and EBCDIC encoding systems Unfortunately there is no absolute standard of encoding systems however two general standards do exist Of these ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange has generally emerged as the standard by which PC and network systems communicate The other standard called EBCDIC Extended Binary Code Decimal Interchange Code is used primarily by mainframe computers 130 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Translating from one encoding system to the other In order for these two types of encoding systems to communicate they must employ a translation from one language to the other This translation function is normally performed by the gateway hardware and software that bridges the two systems and is therefore transparent to most computer users If there is no automatic EBCDIC ASCII translation The P
20. parameter1 to Upper case CASE_LOWER Converts parameter1 to Lower case CASE_TITLE Converts parameter1 by making the first letter of a word Upper case and all other letters Lower case STRIP parameter1 parameter2 This function removes space characters from parameter1 according to the value of parameter2 Valid values for parameter2 are STRIP START Removes spaces from the start of parameter1 STRIP_END Removes spaces from the end of parameter1 4f NOTE If you click in the Calculate text field of the Add Edit Field dialogue the Help button will be activated Click on the button to display the Field Calculations dialogue which lists all the Functions that can be used in a calculation string If you click on a function it will be inserted in the Calculate text field of the Add Edit Field dialogue 212 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Calculation String Errors Calculation strings are checked for syntax errors when the OK button of the View Change Field dialogue is selected Any errors in the calculation string are reported and the dialogue cannot be exited until the calculation string is corrected or deleted Possible errors are Invalid Position For String Cause A string delimiter single or double quote character has been found in an Invalid position This is usually caused by a missing operator
21. CUT Add Line Ctl L Add Box Ctl B Add Circle Ctl R Add Graphic Ctl I Add Chart CtltH Use these shortcut keys to display the Default Settings dialogue for the active tool ATRLINES Select this option to display the Default Settings dialogue for an active element tool Your MileSaver Membership nu Group Ctl G Tool Settings Ctl S 1 Brian J i 1345 El rr Move Ctl M Delete ctl D Copy Ctl C A Am View Change Ctl Ie Arial 10 Regular Edit Cti E AA a S SS Current Printer Document Color Pag P 380 The Paris Designer Reference Manual PARIS FORM EDITOR HELP MENU Paris Designer Help and the Help menu are identical in the Environment and the Form Editors For information on the Help menu refer to Chapter 9 Functions in the Environment Editor Help Menu of this manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 381 PART THREE EDITING THE SETTINGS FOR DYNAMIC AND STATIC FORM ELEMENTS IN THIS PART CHAPTER 14 CHAPTER 15 CHAPTER 16 CHAPTER 17 CHAPTER 18 CHAPTER 19 CHAPTER 20 CHAPTER 21 EDITING TEXT SETTINGS EDITING LINE SETTINGS EDITING CIRCLE SETTINGS EDITING Box SETTINGS EDITING GRAPHIC SETTINGS EDITING CHART SETTINGS EDITING TEXT BLOCK SETTINGS USING THE FONT LIST FUNCTION PART THREE EDITING THE SETTINGS FOR DYNAMIC AND STATIC FORM ELEMENTS The settings for a Dynamic or Static Form Element a
22. Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu How is the font index byte interpreted 166 The numeric value of the font index is determined by the number of bits from the right of the font index byte e If the right most 4 bits are examined the maximum possible number of fonts that can be indexed will be 16 if starting at 0 or 15 if starting at 1 e Using 5 bits allows for a maximum of 32 fonts 6 bits a maximum of 64 fonts 7 bits a maximum of 128 fonts and 8 bits a maximum of 256 fonts e The number of bits examined is determined by nominating the maximum number of fonts in Max option drop down menu No Bits Max Value qe i Refer to Table 5 4 Font Index Values on page 167 which illustrates possible values when 4 and 5 bits are examined Forexample Font Indexing IV Active Offset fo M Start at One Max ER If you had an application with 30 fonts and you wished to call font 28 you would first need to set the maximum value in the Font Indexing section of the dialogue to 32 Call the font with the character in the fontindex position initial 2 1 see table opposite The character has an ASCII hexadecimal value of 3C This in turn has a binary representation of 00111100 If you extract the 5 low order bits that is 11100 this is equal to 28 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu o mIRC Value of where Tab
23. Click on the Fill Field checkbox to activate the Options button then click on the Options button to display the Fill Field Settings dialogue then click on the Field button in the dialogue to display the field list Choose the required field from the list then choose OK Choose OK to return to the Environment Editor The inserted field will be displayed in the text block Click on the Right mouse button to exit Edit mode gt To insert a field s value into a text block using the Text option 1 6 Select the Edit tool then click on the required text block and place the cursor at the position for insertion of the field Press Ctl F to display the Data Change Event dialogue The selected position will be displayed At Specified Position and the First Line and First Char Select the Text checkbox then click in the adjacent box to place the cursor Enter the text string in the EXACT format fieldname This inserts the field s contents For example if you had created a field named AccntNum you would enter AccntNum Choose OK to return to the Environment Editor The inserted field will be displayed in the text block Click on the Right mouse button to exit Edit mode f NOTE The step by step process of inserting a field into a text block is described in detail in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual including an illustrated example The Paris Designer Reference Manual 197 Chapter 5
24. Event Id Event Id Test Equal to any value x Test r Condition Event Id g Test Equal to any value Present Missing Equal to any value Not equal to all values Add Cancel Test 1 Click on the arrow to the right of the Test text box to display the pop up menu that lists the Test options Present Missing Equal to any value Not equal to all values 2 Choose the required test option from the list then Either Click on OK Or If you have chosen Equal to any value or Not equal to all values the Add button will be activated Enter the value to be tested for in the text box adjacent to the Add button then click on the button The entered value will be displayed in the dialogue Choose OK 3 The added condition will be displayed in the Conditions list with the Event Test and Value of the condition 282 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu iew Change Runtime Event Modifier r Description r Condition s Atleast one condition must be true All of the conditions must be true JDE Equal to end Add Edit Delete pete Adding an Action Once the conditions are set the required actions are chosen The actions that can be applied are Add new Event s Modify Event s Value Suppress Event s Action Apply this action aad new Event s Add new E ventfs
25. File name field then choose Save The PCC table will be saved When required you can use the Load button to load the table The Paris Designer Reference Manual 161 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu ADDING A PCC CHARACTER If you wish to add a PCC character that does not occur in any of the available tables you can do so however such instances are rare Add PCC Assignments Char Before Print After To add a PCC value Either Right mouse click on a value in the PCC Assignments list to display the pop up menu and choose Add from the D elete Display Decima Click on the Add button to display the Add Value Load Save dialogue Add CT x Add PCC Val Enter the required PCC value in the Add PCC Val field then choose OK The added value will be displayed in the PCC Assigns list The action OK Cancel assigned to the added PCC value will be that currently displayed in PCC Assigns and can be edited Char Before Print After NG Def em 1 Print PCC Assignments Select the PCC value and edit the PCC Attributes and Channel Assignments as required Delete Display Literal When you have finished adding PCC values save the table as described on the previous page NOTE To delete an added PCC value select the value then either right mouse click on the value and choose Delete from the pop up menu or select the value and click on the Delete
26. Jminutes text field The default setting is 5 minutes Once Autosave is active the current form will be automatically saved at the set interval The Autosave version of any form file will remain in the Paris Env directory until it is deleted by the user If you select OK any changes you have made to the System settings will apply during the current editor session If you select OK and Save any changes you have made to the System settings will apply each time you open the editor until the OK and Save next time you change them and select OK and Save again The Paris Designer Reference Manual 375 VIEWING THE DOCUMENT VU C System menu gt Zoom Choosing the Zoom option displays the options listed below to zoom to different views of the document currently displayed on screen The amount of the page displayed on screen at any given time is a result of both the zoom level and the screen resolution of the monitor Option Shortcut Keys Action Displays the full document gt Full Page gt Alt 1 scaled to fit the screen Reduces the view of the document on screen by 50 Enlarges the view of the D gt Zoom In gt Alt 3 document on screen by 50 c Zoom Out amp C Alt 2 376 The Paris Designer Reference Manual SWITCHING EDITORS VU C System menu Switch amp CP Alt W The Switch option allows you to switch from the Form Editor to the Environment Editor This option is only avail
27. Rotation The number of degrees the eye is positioned to the right of the Y axis Enter the required value in the Rotation box Each type of Complex Bar Chart is illustrated on the following pages The Paris Designer Reference Manual 449 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Complex Bar Chart with 1 Set Population Growth of Sydney 1993 1997 Bos 4 S c N pP 1993 1994 7995 1996 1997 Complex Bar Chart with 5 Sets Population Growth of Australian State Capital Cities 10 Million 8 Million Sydney 6 Ilion Perth ll Brisbane 4 Million 2 Million Complex Bar Chart without the Auto Calculate Values checkbox selected Data Labels are rotated 90 degrees 450 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Rotated Complex Bar Chart Population Growth of Australian State Capital Cities ll Brisbane 2Milion 4iVRilion GNRIHIon 8N ilion 10 Million Complex Bar Chart rotated and Data Values rotated 90 degrees Complex Bar Charts with Width 70 Population Growth of Australian State Capital Cities Sydney Perth Brisbane 1993 1994 7995 7996 1997 Complex Bar Chart Width 70 Data Labels rotated 90 degrees The Paris Designer Reference Manual 451 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Stacked Bar Chart Population Growth of Australian State Capital Cities il AHT I Sydney Perth M Brisbane 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 Stacked Bar
28. The Paris Designer Reference Manual 581 Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris 3 Select the required user name from the list of Available Members then choose OK Select Queue Member Es Available Members EVERYONE GROUP BS TECH_SUPPORT GR SALES GROUP MARKETING GROUP MANAGEMENT GROU ACCOUNTING GROUF SUPERVISOR USER 7 The added user name will be displayed in the Current Members list in the View Change Novell Queues dialogue 582 Available Queues INVOICES Q CREDITNOTE Q REPORT_Q View Change Novell Queues Ed Current Members Users C Servers C Ops EVERYONE GROUP The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris Setting the queue Servers list when capturing data A single User must be allocated as the Server in order for Paris to input from a Novell queue The User allocated as the Server must also be the same as that logged onto the workstation during data capture For example if the User is logged on to the workstation as PARIS USER the Server must also be PARIS USER 1 Select the required queue from the Available Queues list 2 Click on the Servers radio button in the Current Members section of the dialogue then click on the Add button in the same section The Select Queue Member dialogue will be disp
29. The current contents of a field are known as the Field Value The value is set by filling the field and read whenever the field is used Fields can also contain calculation strings which are used to modify the field s current value This feature provides many powerful ways to prepare a field for use on the page FIELDS AND EVENTS In most cases fields are used as an extension of events In their simplest form fields are filled by specifying an Update Field event The contents of fields are inserted into a page via an Insert Field command Ctl I or Data Change event refer to Chapter 8 Using Fields of the Paris Designer User s Manual THE ORDER OF FIELD ACTIONS 187 An important aspect to the correct use of Fields is to understand the order in which the various field actions filling calculating and using are performed when a page is being constructed Depending upon the way in which a field is filled the way in which it is read and its calculation string a field s value can change at various stages when constructing a page The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu DEFINING FIELDS Yi gt Environment menu gt Fields gt Field List dialogue Fields are a part of an environment and are created deleted or modified from the Environment Editor Each environment has its own Field List and there can be no interaction between fields in d
30. font Hence when the Resource Manager encounters a font called Garamond Regular it will look up the true type font table to find if such a font exists Naturally it does not so the font is neither displayed nor packed f NOTE This is the only satisfactory way of handling true type fonts The other option of looking at font entries in the Windows registry is not sufficient as not all fonts in the Windows font directory have entries in the registry If the font is to appear in the registry then it should be properly installed Only by scanning all the ttf font files in the Windows font directory and reading their internals for the corresponding logical names would result in the most accurate ttf font table as this reflects all the current true type fonts in the system 300 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Q I just got an Unhandled exception contact program vendor message while using the RM and Paris crashed A The most probable reason is that the Paris fonts ini file or some other system file has been edited The fonts ini file should not be edited nor should any font references be deleted from the Utilities Font References menu in Paris Q The log window seems to display out of sync data I packed 4 files then 2 files but the window displays 2 files packed instead of 6 files packed Why A This is part of technical design Each pack operation is
31. 2 Click on the Settings button to display the View Change Next File Settings dialogue iew Change Next File Settings x Settings Output directory fe Paris OUT Dutput name PARIS X Dutput extension pur m File Numbering Maximum file Number 999999 Append number toName to Extension Cancel 64 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Settings Under the Settings section of the dialogue are the text fields Output directory Output Name Output extension Next to each text field is a drop down menu which lists the options that can be used for the Output directory file name or file extension each menu is the same for each output setting Output directory In the Output Directory text field specify the directory to which you want the files to be written or select a name from the drop down menu iew Change Next File Settings f x Settings Output directory Amea Output name Mida P LPR HOST o _ lt LPR_USER gt utput extension LPR CLASS LPR JOB r File Numbering lt LPR_INPUT gt lt LPR_INPUT_PATH gt Maximum file Number lt LPR_INPUT_NAME gt lt LPR_INPUT_EXTN gt Append number lt LPR_TITLE gt lt FieldN ame gt 65 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Output name In the Output Name text field
32. 4850 NPS 4090 NPS 4890 NPS and 4635 NPS printers For these printers Paris supports the selection of different paper stock for printing jobs through the Media Mapping function which is accessed within the View Change Printer dialogue As Paris thinks in terms of trays and Docuprint printers think in terms of media the Media Mapping function allows the user to either describe Paris s trays to the Docuprint or the Docuprint s media to Paris whichever fits the user s needs The Media Mapping function is a supplement to existing tray handling features for Xerox Docuprint printers not a replacement View Change Printer I x Printer File Name JACCTSL2 Full Name Accounts Level 2 Type Xerox Docuprint N32 PCL5 Rebuild Printer List Output To LPT1 Settings Resources Id 2 Update Reset Never Physical Page Shift Horizontal o Vertical o DK Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 562 SETTING UP MEDIA MAPPING Media Mapping is invoked whenever an XPD PPD file contains at least one XLPInputMedia statement 6 WARNING Both XPD and PPD files are text files and can be edited using a standard text editor however it is recommended that these should NOT be changed except by experienced users or under instruction by the distributor A full description of the working of XPD and PPD files can be found in How do PPD PostScript Prin
33. 7 Stop fig Settings Page Eject Bm v Enabled Seconds eo 3 Select the required serial port and click on the Settings button to display the View Change Serial Port Settings dialogue 4 Configure the serial communications parameters as required Byte Settings These must be set to match those of the host computer Ask your maintenance engineering staff what settings are required Handshaking The options available are None DTR Only RTS Only DTR and RTS Software Handshaking This option is selected by default 4f NOTE The Page Eject option is not relevant in the Capture function 5 Once the settings are configured choose OK to exit the dialogue choose OK again to exit the next dialogue to display the Select Enter Save File Name dialogue 36 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Defining the destination file name for the captured data 37 The default path displays PARIS DTA as the directory location in which to store the sample file It is recommended to always use the default destination 6 Either Select a file from the File List to overwrite an existing file a warning message will appear Or Type the new file name in the File box with a DTA extension 7 Choose OK The File Capture Transfer dialogue will be displayed and the capture process will begin immediately Select Enter Save File
34. Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu view Change Euro Conversion Rates X STG add a variable rate m Fixed Rates a NN ES ATS Austria 13 7603 With Operator access a BEF Belgium 40 3399 variable rate can be added FIM Finland 5 94573 edited or deleted FAF France 6 55957 1 Click on the Add button to display the Add Edit Delete View Change Euro Conversion Rates dialogue Variable Rates Typein the currency code required e g JPY for the Japanese Yen refer to the table at the end of this chapter Enter a Description of the currency in this case Yen Enter the current conversion Rate for the Yen to the Euro The Verify text box contains the default setting of 1 the number of days allowed to expire before you are requested to check the Conversion Hate set variable rate Currenc Id JPY PNIS NN NN ES Description Yen 13 7603 40 3399 FIM Finland 5 94573 Rate 133 6764 FRF France amp 5557 gt m qm m WS sec 4 02 2001 Add EM Veit Variable Rates o aa ese 6 Click on OK The added rate will be listed in the Add Edit Delete View Change Euro Conversion Rates dialogue u teen 314 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Editing Any Rate gt To edit any rate Click on the Utilities menu in the Environment Editor and choose Euro Rates from
35. Fixed T Vertical Property Fixed m Use Default Chart Attributes Defining the Attributes for a Complex Bar Chart Style Complex Bar Chart f NOTE The unit of measurement for the position is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu ma memes 70000 em meme 00000000 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 439 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Horizontal and Vertical Use Default Chart Attributes 440 The Horizontal and Vertical properties of dynamic chart elements can be set to Float or Resize according to data in the linked text block These options do not appear in the Default or View Change dialogues in the Form Editor Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual If you are printing to a color printer and wish to print the chart in color check the Use Default Chart Attributes checkbox When you add the chart it will be displayed in color f NOTE You cannot change the default color settings The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Data to a Complex Bar Chart Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Labets Headings Legend Axis General Data Value Field Label Field 5 Exi EROA Add Bar Set1 Light Set2 Cross hatched Remove Bar Set3 Vert stripe Add Set Remove Set The set of data for the cha
36. If a column is marked from the letter B to the lines and width shown this is the Position and Width of the column in the text block Width of Column 26 6 lines or 2 6 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 483 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Inserting a field into a text block Method 1 Fill Field The Fill Field option in the Data Change event dialogue can be used to insert a field s current value into a text block To insert a field s value 1 Select the Edit tool then click on the required text block and place the cursor at the position for insertion of the field 2 Press Ctl F to display the Data Change Event dialogue The selected position will be displayed At Specified Position and the First Line and First Char ield Options When To Change Fill Field Settings x Jat Specified Position Options First Line 1 Number of Lines Field First Char 12 Number of Chars H id pdate ri 1st fest NONE Z Zid Tit First Char 12 Num Chars fo Cancel 3 Click on the Fill Field checkbox to activate the Options button 4 Click on the Options button to display the Fill Field Settings dialogue then click on the Field button in the dialogue to display the field list 5 Choose the required field from the list then choose OK If necessary refer to The Fields function in Chapter 5 of this manu
37. Paris implements re encoding in two different ways The main support for re encoding is a new XPD entry XPDFontEncoding Standard ISOLatin1 The default is Standard This means do not re encode fonts Although this will produce incorrect output for many fonts if characters above 128 are used it is the default for backward compatibility with earlier versions of Paris Lapres If the value is ISOLatin1 then Paris will re encode Type 1 fonts into the Adobe ISOLatin1 encoding when printing 1 Re encoding downloaded Type 1 fonts Downloaded Type 1 fonts are re encoded by changing the Standard encoding vector prior to downloading any fonts The built in ISOLatin1 vector is copied into the Standard vector so that any downloaded font that calls for the Standard vector actually gets the ISOLatinl vector 2 Re encoding resident Type 1 fonts Resident Type 1 fonts are re encoded according to the Adobe recommendations The font is copied to a new name and the Encoding entry in the new font library is replaced with the required vector A resident font is re encoded only if the Font entry in the printer PPD indicates that the font uses the Standard encoding as a default 4f NOTE Support for the exact Windows encoding will be added as a new value WinStandard 79 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu How Paris handles TrueType fonts for PostScript Printers When using TrueType f
38. Rebuilding the Printer Type List Paris maintains a list of available printers It is this list that contains the PCL and Adobe printer entries that are shown in the Printer Type drop down menu The list must be kept up to date as the number of printer types supported by Paris will constantly grow as new printers are released on the market That is the purpose of the Rebuild Printer List button that is within the View Change Printer dialogue gt To support the features of a new printer 1 Place the distributor supplied XPD and or PPD files in the PARIS PRT directory 2 Once the new files have been added choose Modify Printers from the File menu to open the View Change Printers dialogue 3 Choose the Add button to open the View Change Printer dialogue and click on the Rebuild Printer List button to make the printers available to the software Selecting the button causes the software to scan the directory and update the list with any new entries If no new XPD PPD files have been added the existing list will not be changed Type EJ Generic PCL5 xl Rebuild Printer List 2 Click on the Rebuild Printer List button to make added XPD or PPD files available to the software 62 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Defining the Output destination 63 Part of the printer definition is to instruct the software where to send the output once it has been format
39. The value entered in the Text field is the identifier Runtime event marker which is to signal a runtime event command Before Paris recognizes a Runtime event the identifier Runtime event marker has to appear in the printstream The default value for the identifier is XLP In the Text field set the identifier that is to signal a runtime event command Save Text as EBCDIC This option is for Xerox centralized compatibility It is possible although rare that an ASCII datastream can contain DJDE records that are in EBCDIC This option accommodates that requirement Implied ENDJOB Implied ENDJOB means that when Paris encounters an ENDJOB command in the printstream data that is an ENV JDL or JDE command it will assume that it is immediately to end the current print job Normally this option would be selected WARNING Within a DJDE packet from the first DJDE record until END record a PRINTER command must precede a JDL or JDE command otherwise the JDE or JDL command is ignored 278 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Ignore Parser Warnings Paris does not support all possible DJDE options refer to Table 7 6 DJDE Functions Supported on page 276 Some unsupported options will cause the software to stop processing and an error message will be displayed The error is a result of the Paris software parsing or checking the syntax of the DJDE
40. This character is a Printable character IV This character is a Line End This character is a Page End r Spacing Before printing the current line Skip to channel Space 1 line IV Print the current line v After printing the current line Skip to channel 1 C Space 1 line Cancel 116 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu With a form feed character how and when do use the Skip option The Paris Designer permits you to create multiple logical pages on a single page A logical page is just another term for a text block and their use has extended beyond the original concept of simple logical pages When the form feed character is defined in the Input Filter using a Line End it can be instructed to Skip to the next logical page before or after printing the current line You can also instruct the form feed character to Skip to the next physical page and in such cases a Page End would be used The function of skipping to a new page becomes a little more confusing when you are using more than one logical page text block on a physical sheet of paper as e Selecting the Skip option will always end the current logical page only e The print position will move to the next available logical page which may be on the same physical page For example A simple example would be printing Two Up to save paper
41. When you save the environment or Form the Font List will also be saved 542 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function COPYING LOCAL TEXT BLOCK EVENTS ONTO THE CLIPBOARD Local Text Block events can be copied within a text block between text blocks between environments and between page definitions Typically you would copy a Local Text Block that is similar to one you require to avoid having to go through the entire process of creating a new event The event can be copied from the Clipboard to the required destination then if necessary the copied event can be quickly edited gt To copy a Local Text Block event to the Clipboard 1 Select the View tool and click on the required text block to display the View Change Text Block Settings dialogue 2 Click on the Events button in the dialogue to display the View Change Event List dialogue 3 Click on the Clip button to display the Internal Clipboard View Change Event List m Local Text Block Events T E 1 Fill Field Month es 2 Fill Field Month2 Miles 2 12 3 Fill Field Month3 Miles 3 12 4 Fill Field Month4 Miles 4 12 5 Fill Field Month5 Miles 5 12 B Fill Field Month6 Miles 6 12 7 Data Change Text Hide TBL Add Data Change E dit Delete Clip The Paris Designer Reference Manual 543 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard xj Obje
42. are not constants that is they are field names function calls or embedded calculations then they are both evaluated before the check of parameter1 In other words The IF function always evaluates the 3 parameters but returns either parameter or parameter3 The parameter2 or parameter3 includes the SET function In this case the SET will always be executed even if it is the parameter which is NOT returned by the IF function Examples IF LatePay 17 5 12 5 The field LatePay is evaluated If it is not zero then the numeric floating Value 17 5 is returned otherwise the Value 12 5 is returned IF TaxRate 12 5 High SET TaxDesc Standard The Field TaxRate is compared to 12 5 If it is higher then the alphanumeric Value High is returned otherwise the Value Standard is returned Note that the SET function which updates the Field TaxDesc with the Value Standard will always be executed even if the TaxRate is greater than 12 5 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 211 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu CASE parameter1 parameter2 This function performs case conversion on parameter1 according to the value of parameter2 If parameter1 is not alphanumeric then this function returns the alphanumeric representation of the numeric value this is the same as calling STR parameter1 Valid values for parameter2 are CASE_UPPER Converts
43. e A Fill Field event will replace the current contents of the field with the specified data This becomes the Current Value of the field and replaces any previous value e An Increment Field event will add the specified data to the current value of the field By specifying a line range it is possible to total a column f NOTE Increment is normally only possible on Numeric fields The Fields function is described in detail in Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu of this manual and in Chapter 8 Using Fields of the Paris Designer User s Manual where examples are also given The Paris Designer Reference Manual 495 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Adding an Update Field Event Before you add an Update Field event you need to know the position in the text block of the data to be extracted so that you can enter these details in the Update Field Event dialogue 1 Select the Edit tool and click on the text block containing the data to be extracted Position the cursor at the first character of the data The Status Bar will display the position Line and Column number of the first character Move the cursor to the end character of the data You can either count the characters as you move the cursor or subtract the column number of the end character displayed in the Status Bar from that of the first character For example To update a field with the Account Number extracted from Tex
44. labels to a Complex Bar chart 445 labels to a Complex Plot chart 430 labels to a Pie chart 459 legend to a Complex Bar chart 447 legend to a Complex Plot chart 432 legend to a Pie chart 461 Page Suppress event 272 Page Para event 247 PCC value 164 PPD files 63 printer 56 57 printer resident font to Paris 79 select device features event local text block event 511 Select Device Features event local text block 510 Select Input Tray event 266 Select Output Tray event 267 Update Field event local text block 499 variable rates in the Euro Rates utility 315 XLPInputMedia statements 566 XPD files 63 adding a graphic previewing 413 aligning text 391 393 applying Translation Table 137 arithmetic operators in field calculations 206 ASCII 132 See also encoding systems attributes adding to a Complex Bar chart 441 adding to a Complex Plot chart 426 adding to a Simple Bar chart 436 adding to a Simple Plot chart 422 Autosave Options for system settings 99 377 axis settings adding to a Complex Bar chart 448 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 605 Index adding to a Complex Plot chart 433 adding to a Simple Bar chart 439 adding to a Simple Plot chart 424 B barcodes using in Paris 83 blank lines in a text block 472 Blue Palette 526 Blueshade Palette 526 box defining a drop shadow 407 dynamic floating 410 resizing 410 editing 405 9 attributes 407 dynamic properties 410 positio
45. measurement is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu Z NOTE The Circle can also be moved by using the Move tool and its size changed by using the Edit tool Ma eenmeme 007 be eemuee 00000 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 401 Chapter 16 Editing Dynamic and Static Circle Settings SETTING THE PROPERTIES FOR A DYNAMIC CIRCLE ELEMENT rm Properties Horizontal Fixed Y Verlicat Fixed Y Horizontal and Vertical In the Horizontal and Vertical fields set the properties of a dynamic circle element to Fixed Float or Resize Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual SETTING CIRCLE LINE AND FILL COLOR ATTRIBUTES FROM THE TOOLS BAR The color of a circle s line and fill can be selected before adding the circle 1 Select the Circle tool to activate the Line Weight Line Style and Color buttons in the Tools Bar Click on the arrow select the required color O amp Mi a dm d 4 X s a 3egular 5 0 Ipi z A E D 2 Click on the arrow adjacent to the Line Color or Fill Color buttons to display the Color Palette and choose the required color Refer to Chapter 22 The Color Palette function 402 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 17 EDITING BOX SETTINGS The Default Box Settings dialogue is used to edit the default settings for a box before it is added to a form or e
46. next line starts on a new line at the left most position This carriage return and line feed function is normally conducted in one move with a mechanical lever in the vast majority of cases computer print data contains corresponding carriage return and line feed functions Each line of printable bytes will normally be terminated by a carriage return and line feed combination of bytes to emulate the simple typewriter function In most cases the print data will contain a pair of bytes representing the two actions however in some cases the carriage return function is not required because the line feed function implies the return to the left of the page In these cases each print line will be terminated by a single line feed byte 112 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu When do I need to act on the carriage return byte As we have just pointed out the carriage return byte is normally superfluous and could be ignored Although in some cases print lines will be terminated by a single line feed byte only the majority of cases will still use the carriage return line feed pair of bytes This is because most print files are still conditioned to print to a simple line printer These line printers are really just automated typewriters and produce very simple pages Formatting of the page is limited due to the mono spaced fixed pitch character set however they usually do include a bolding f
47. output stream referencing Device Specific Features 599 overflow option using in a text block 473 overlaying form 367 P packing resource files 297 packing resources See resource packing setting the packer options 295 packing the Environment Change event list 288 page attributes changing in a form 363 page definition 185 copying onto the Clipboard 556 560 copying to another environment using the Clipboard 560 copying within an environment using the Clipboard 556 editing the text blocks 187 setting the page attributes 186 Page Delete event Page Para 272 Page Preamble hook for Device Specific Features 598 Page Printing output settings 177 Page Printing in Output Settings using 177 Page Shift 89 Page Suppress event adding 272 Page Suppress event page para 271 Page Para event adding 247 Change Back Form event 251 Change Form event 249 Change Output Event List event 256 Change Page Definition event 253 editing 247 End Current Page event 258 End Text Block event 262 Page Delete event 272 Page Suppress event 271 Select Device Features 601 Select Device Features event 246 270 Select Input Tray event 266 Select Output Tray event 267 types 246 Update Field event 268 Page Para Events 245 67 page end See form feed pages repeating by changing the Input Settings 145 palette See Color Palette Parser Warnings 281 614 The Paris Designer Reference Manual password setting in the Eu
48. record The following applies only to sites with pre existing DJDE jobs If you have a file that contains unsupported DJDE s that are not relevant to Paris by turning off the warnings that is selecting the Ignore Parser Warnings checkbox Paris will continue processing without warning if a DJDE that fails to parse is encountered Valid DJDE commands will still be parsed and honored Normally you would enable warnings in the Environment Editor do NOT select the Ignore Parser Warnings checkbox so that the Designer sees possible problems and warnings You would disable warnings in production ENVs that are distributed so that the unsupported options do not stop printing Z NOTE You need to have a full understanding of DJDE s and the potential effects of not honoring some of them before disabling the parser The Paris Designer Reference Manual 279 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu USING THE RUNTIME EVENT MODIFICATIONS OPTION The Runtime Event Modification option allows you to modify certain DJDE s at individual job level Paris can be instructed to ignore these DJDE s or they can be replaced or new ones can be inserted You can set up tests to look for certain DJDE s at job level and when found either a suppress it b replace it with a different DJDE c insert a new DJDE Runtime Events d xj m Options IV Events are Active Offset fo Skip 5 Text XLP Save Text As EBCDIC I
49. test conditions 241 Text Block options 471 the page attributes in a page definition 186 the password in the Euro Rates utility 319 setting up Media Mapping 566 Type 1 fonts within Paris 80 shadow defining for a box 407 Simple Bar chart adding attributes 436 adding axis settings 439 adding data 437 adding general settings 440 Simple Plot chart adding attributes 422 adding axis settings 424 adding data 423 adding general settings 425 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Index Skip using the option in the Input Filter 128 Skip at start of Report changing the Input Settings 146 Skip option 119 21 128 spacing lines in added text 388 Spacing options in the Input Filter 127 Spacing Settings 149 64 effect of Input Filter settings 130 152 using 151 153 spacing the first line in a text block 162 statements XLPInputMedia 566 StockSet support in Paris for media mapping 575 suppressing Paris generated blank lines using the Output Settings function 182 switching to the Environment Editor 379 to the Form Editor 101 System menu functions Environment Editor 95 102 System menu functions Form Editor 373 System Settings Autosave and Save Options 99 377 Edit Options 98 376 Grid 97 375 system values inserting within the calculation string of a field 221 T tabs changing in printstream data by using a Data Change event 486 test conditions 233 options 234 39 setting the test condit
50. to Trayl e The ENV Test2 requires a custom mapping of the stocksetName STATE to Tray2 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function The following entries in the Stockset xpi file would implement these requirements XPDBaseStockSet COVERI Tray1 XPDBaseStockSet COVER2 Tray2 XPDBaseStockSet COVER3 Tray3 XPDBaseStockSet COVER4 Tray4 XPDEnvStockSet TESTI COVERI Tray2 XPDEnvStockSet TESTI MAIN Tray4 XPDEnvStockSet TESTI INVOICE Trayl XPDEnvStockSet TEST2 STATE Tray2 Refer to the previous section Setting up Media Mapping on page 563 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 575 Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function An example of setting up the Media Mapping for a Docuprint A Paris print destination called DocuPS is created that uses a Docuprint printer with 4 trays The XPD PPD file would contain 4 entries XLPInputMedia Upper XLPInputMedia Lower XLPInputMedia Middle XLPInputMedia Tray4 This XPD PPD means the Environment Editor will allow the creation of environments using any or all of these 4 trays An environment called Invoice is created Tray select events are created that at various times during a job call for all 4 trays to be used The Media Mapping option is selected in the DocuPS printer View Change Printer dialogue to create a mapping for the environment Invoice This mapping MUST contain 4 entries no
51. 0 Height 7 0 Cancel 528 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function 6 Choose the required color from the palette then choose OK The selected color will be displayed in the element s Default Settings dialogue View Change Box x Sample Attributes Bode mmy v Weight iori z mm Fil Medium Shadow None Y Corners 0 Square x Size o y Size o m Position Left 1 0 Width 11 0 Top fig Height 7 5 Cancel 7 Choose OK to return to the editor To view the document with the added color you will have to select Preview from the System menu or use the shortcut keys Alt V 4f NOTE When you next use the Color Palette to reload the Default Palette click on the Color selector choose Options then Load Palette and then default pal The Paris Designer Reference Manual 529 Chapter 22 The Color Palette function MIXING A CUSTOM COLOR Colors are mixed by selecting a color from either the Basic colors or Custom colors then varying the amount of the three primary colors red green and blue and the Hue Saturation Sat and Luminosity Lum This can be achieved by moving the pointer up or down the scale to the right of the palette and by moving the color selector within the color spectrum color r colors E NI NINE rmmm ies f ITE i AEE EE Egg ENENNENMNENMN
52. 157 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Specifying where to find the PCC byte within each print record m PEC Idenifier Offset 0 Mask 255 The PCC byte must exist in a constant position relative to each print record In the majority of cases this will be the first byte of every print line If the PCC byte is not in the first byte of each print record its position can be specified in the PCC Identifier section of the View Change PCC amp Channel Assignments dialogue The position of a PCC byte is specified as an offset The offset is the number of characters to skip in each print record to reach the PCC byte The offset for a PCC byte is entered in the Offset field in the dialogue It may be necessary to mask a PCC byte however this is extremely rare The mask function will perform a binary AND on the decimal value of the PCC byte The interpretation of the PCC byte will be performed after adding the mask The mask for a PCC byte is entered in the Mask field in the dialogue The value is 255 which is the same as adding 0 158 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Using the Print Options Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs The Print Option Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs is used as follows A If the printstream data DOES NOT u
53. 4 AlphaNumeric Month 5 AlphaNumeric Month 6 AlphaNumeric me i E dit Delete Clip OK Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 547 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function 548 gt To copy a field s to the Clipboard Select Field from the Environment menu to display the Field List dialogue Click on the Clip button to display the Internal Clipboard Field List PointsE p m haNumeric Month 1 AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric V All the fields in the Field List will be displayed in the Objects section of the Internal Clipboard dialogue Internal Clipboard Clipboard xl lt lt Eopy Hone All The Paris Designer Reference Manual None Delete Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard P x Objects r Clipboard None Delete Click on the fields to be 4 Click on the Copy gt gt button copied The selected fields will be copied to the Clipboard section of the dialogue 4f NOTE If you are copying fields between environments at this stage you would choose the Exit button and return to the Environment Editor To copy the fields from the Clipboard you would load the required environment and display the Field List then Internal Clipboard dialogues then copy the fields from the Clipboard to the Objects list See the following p
54. 423 Data Change event 476 adding 476 484 changing case in printstream data 485 columns in printstream data 486 491 font in printstream data 496 tabs in printstream data 486 491 the color in printstream data 485 the font in printstream data 485 using 476 using to fill a field in the Euro Rates utility 332 When To Change 490 When To Change options 478 83 Data Change Event dialogue 477 data change events in the Euro Rates utility 308 data overflow See overflow option Default Box Settings dialogue 405 Default Chart Settings dialogue 419 Default Circle Settings dialogue 400 Default Graphic Settings dialogue 411 Default Line Settings dialogue 395 Default Text Block Settings dialogue 464 Default Text Settings dialogue 386 defining See editing setting attributes for a variable conversion rate 312 fields 190 NEXTFILE output settings 65 System Settings in the Environment Editor 96 in the Form Editor 374 the default color for an element 530 deleting a field inserted into a text block 489 text block event 513 the tray mapping in an environment 572 Device Specific Features 595 activating 596 Environment Events option 601 Environment Output option 600 example of using in an XPD file 603 608 The Paris Designer Reference Manual hooks 598 implementing 597 inserting custom code 596 597 referencing in the output stream 599 Run Time Event Feature option 602 selecting 599 selecting the Enviro
55. Account No 5 Data Change Font Font Change B Data Change Font Font Chanae 7 Data Change Text Hide Text ERFASST m Attributes Name FirstName Add Update Field Type alphaNumeric x Index Seas Reset Jat Page Start Calculate E r Values Default Current Brian Cancel 500 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings How ARE CHANGE FORM EVENTS USED A Change Form local text block event allows you to change the form being used by the environment if certain test conditions are met e The form change occurs from within the text block in which the Change Form event is specified e A Change Form event added to a text block only searches the printstream in the text block e If there is more than one Change Form local text block event in an environment the LAST one takes priority The others are ignored 6 WARNING Be aware that a Local Text Block Change Form event added to an environment may be in conflict with any Page Para Change Form event in the printstream data Refer to The Page Para Change Form Event function in Chapter 7 of this manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 501 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Adding a Change Form event View Change Event List To add a Change Form event Select the Events button from the Text Block Settings dialogue to Type display the View Change Event List dialogue
56. Bottom Right or Bottom Left as the anchor position for the legend Align Click on the Align Vertically checkbox to align the legend Vertically vertically The Paris Designer Reference Manual 459 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the General Settings for a Pie Chart Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend General Border None Y Order Data Order E m Other Slice Method Percentile Value o 1 Labell Other 3D Effects Depth 5 Inclination aq Apply Border The border around the chart Choose Solid or None from the Border menu The value order of the slices of pie Choose Data Order Ascending or Descending The slices are presented clockwise Other Slice The Other Slice option provides Method and Value thresholds to determine which values will be displayed within their own slice and which will contribute to the other slice Method Options available are None Cut Off and Percentile If None is chosen the Other Slice Option does not apply If Cut Off is chosen all data values which have a percentage of the Cut Off total less that the set threshold Value are grouped into the other slice If Percentile is chosen as many as the smallest data values as necessary are grouped into the other slice so that it is less than or equal to the threshold Value percent of the total None Percentile 460 The Paris Designer Ref
57. C Top C Bottom Now r Side Nest C Front C Back Tests 1st Test NONE 2nd Test Cancel Description Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list The Page End options are used to control where the current page will break When selected the effect of each is as follows Top The entire text block which contains the line that satisfies the test conditions will be moved to the next page Bottom The text block after the one containing the line which satisfies the test conditions will be moved to the next page The text block which contains the line will remain on the original page Now The line which satisfies the test conditions will become the first line of the new page 258 The Paris Designer Reference Manual ff NOTE The Side buttons are only relevant if you are using a duplex printer which prints both sides of a page Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu The Side radio buttons are used to control which side of the page is to be printed Next Prints the new page on the next available side Front Feeds the paper and prints the new page on the next available front side the page normally printed when printing one side only Back Feeds the paper and prints the new page on the next available back side normally the second page printed when printing both sides of the paper e f you are on the front page the next back page is
58. Cancel The use of the CEP Options is described in this manual in Appendix C Using Xerox CEP Options 224 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE VIEW PAGE ATTRIBUTES FUNCTION The View Current Page Attributes dialogue lists some of the resources that the environment will use in printing the current page It is a convenient visual check when the environment is being edited or multiple page documents are being assembled Viewing the Current Page Attributes i gt Environment menu View Page Attributes View Curent Page Attributes dialogue gt CH K x r Page Attributes Current Page Def Pagel Source Environment Current Form MYNEW Souce Emvronmet Current Tray Defaut Print Mode Smp Current Side Front Page End Maximum Lines Read The View Current Page Attributes dialogue is View Only and cannot be edited Current Page Def The Current Page Def for the environment The Current Form for the environment Current Tray The currently selected printer input tray 225 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Print Mode Current Side Page End 226 The information that activated the pagedef or form This may be an environment a default page or form designed for the environment a run time event a para test or a page test Depending on the printer selected fo
59. Change Font List Display the Font List for the environment or form by selecting the List button in the Default or View Change Text Settings dialogues or in an environment the Default or View Change Text Block Settings dialogues x Font List Save Delete Bold Italic Regular Bold 59 0 dts ai 5 0 lpi 57 0 dts 7 0 lpi Bold Italic 172 0dts v OK Cancel Internal Clipboard E x Objects Arial 12 Regular 57 0 dts Arial 12 Bold 59 0 dts Arial 12 Italic 5 0 Ipi Arial 12 Bold Italic 57 0 dts Arial 8 Regular 7 0 Ipi Arial 36 Bold Italic 172 0 dts Arial 10 Italic 8 0 Ipi Times New Roman 12 Regular Times New Roman 12 Bold 57 rial 9 Bald Italie 8 N Ini zi All Mane Co py lt lt Copy Clipboard Arial 10 Regular 6 5 Ipi Arial 10 Italic 48 0 dts Arial 9 Bold 6 5 Ipi Courier New 10 Regular 7 0 Ipi All None Delete The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard x Objects r Clipboard Arial 10 Regular 5 0 Ipi Arial 10 Bold 0 1633 in Arial 10 Bold Italic 7 0 Ipi Arial 12 Regular 57 0 dts Arial 12 Bold 53 0 dts Arial 12 Italic 5 0 Ipi Arial 12 Bold Italic 57 0 dts Arial 8 Regular 7 0 Ipi Arial 36 Bold Italic 172 0 dts gt lt lt Copy rial 10 Italie AN Ini All None All None Delete Zopy
60. Channel Assignments table Refer to the section Defining the channel number to skip to for the PCC byte that follows Channel 1 is normally assigned to Line 1 In this case a line containing a 1 in the PCC byte will normally force that line to Skip to the next Line 1 which is normally on the next page in other words a form feed 154 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu For example If the print position is currently on the 5 line of a text block and a PCC byte with a Skip to Line 2 is encountered the current print position will Skip to Line 2 in the next text block If there are no more text blocks on the page the current position will Skip to Line 2 of the 1 text block on the next page PCC Attributes Before printing Skip to channel EHI C Space lines v Print the current line After printing C Skip to channel 0 Space lines The Space function will determine the number of lines to space down before and or after printing the line Note that the actual distance moved is determined by the Line Spacing value of the currently selected font Refer to Setting the Font for Added Text in Chapter 14 and Setting the Font for the Text Block in Chapter 20 of this manual When the Space lines action is selected the value specified to the right is the number of lines to space The value c
61. Chart with Auto Calculate Values and Percentage selected Complex Bar Chart with Cluster Overlap Population Growth of Australian State Capital Cities Sydney Perth lll Brisbane 1993 17994 1995 1996 1997 Complex Bar Chart Width 70 Cluster Overlap 50 NO 3D Effects 452 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings PIE CHART Default Chart Settings Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend General Syle PieChat Left 0 0 wiahfoo To D0 Height 0 0 Horizontal Property Fa gt Vertical Property Fined gt Defining the Attributes for a Pie Chart Style Pie Chart f NOTE The unit of measurement for the position is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu Ma wemmem 70007 e meme 0000000000 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 453 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Horizontal and Vertical Use Default Chart Attributes 454 The Horizontal and Vertical properties of dynamic chart elements can be set to Float or Resize according to data in the linked text block These options do not appear in the Default or View Change dialogues in the Form Editor Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual If you are printing to a color printer and wish to print the chart in color check the Use Default Chart Attributes checkbox When you add t
62. Custom colors mi mr m m Hue fiso Red m safo Greer 0 Define Custom Colors gt gt ColorlSolid Lum fo Blue fo Cancel Add to Custom Colors rrrmmmumm e Any color in the Color Palette can be modified e If any other elements in the environment or form use the color being modified the original color those elements will also change to the modified color When any colors are modified and applied to elements and the environment or form is saved the modified Color Palette is also saved with the environment or form If you wish to have the modified palette available for use in other environments or forms it can be saved as a PAL file The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function Example of mixing a color in the Custom Palette The following illustrates mixing a color for a selected element A color can also be mixed before adding an element by a Clicking on the element tool then clicking on the Line Color or Fill Color buttons in the Tools Bar to display the Color Palette or b By displaying the element s Default Settings dialogue and clicking on the Color selector to display the Color Palette In this case we have used an added text element as an example gt To mix a color for a selected text element 1 Click on the View tool then click on the text element to display the View Change Text Settings dialogue 2 Click on the Color selector to dis
63. Environment fathers gt Browse View Change Environment Any Color any Weight any Type Add E dit Delete Cancel Default Mapping The default mapping simply assigns the default tray to be any color any weight any type any size in other words the default mapping is to use any tray on the Docuprint For users who do not need tray selections this allows any job to print without any user intervention User defined Mapping When a job requires tray selection each tray that will be used within the job must be mapped so that the Docuprint can select that media Each tray can be mapped to a particular color weight type and size Any or all of these can be blank NOTE The Size field should not be used unless you need to mix paper sizes within a job If the job only uses a single page size the Size field should be left blank The Paris Designer Reference Manual 565 Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function Selecting the environment to be mapped The environment to be mapped is selected by clicking on the Browse button to display the Select Enter File To Load ENV dialogue The selected environment will be displayed in the Environment box Selected Settings environment 2000 FEN HA Click on the Add button to display the Default Any Color Any Weight ny Type View Change Media Mapping dialogue to map a tray Add E dit Delete OK Can
64. File menu The Select Enter File To Load dialogue will be displayed 2 Select the form to be overlaid from the File list then choose OK The form will be displayed in the Form Editor window in GREEN Use the overlaid form element s as a guide to create modify your new current form Remove the overlay when finished The Paris Designer Reference Manual 365 Chapter 10 Functions in the Form Editor File Menu REMOVING AN OVERLAID FORM 366 Once you have finished using the overlaid form you can remove it then save the form you have created 79 To remove an overlay 1 Select the Overlay option from the file menu The Select Enter File To Load dialogue will be displayed 2 Select the form file previously overlaid from the File list 3 Choose Cancel The overlaid form will be removed from the Form Editor Make any further changes you require to your new modified form then save the form The Paris Designer Reference Manual PRINTING A PROOF OF THE CURRENT FORM YQ D gt File menu gt Print gt Alt P Choosing Print from the File menu or using the shortcut keys Alt P will print the current form on the printer currently selected for your PC This option is used to print a proof of the form that is currently displayed on your screen The proof print will contain only form elements If you have switched from the Environment to the Form Editor the environment elements displayed in the Form Editor will not print
65. Font Indexes are used In cases where the printstream data is originally EBCDIC and Font Indexes are used it is recommended that the data not be translated before arriving at the Paris Designer In this way the Designer can perform the EBCDIC ASCII translation while preserving the Font Index If you are taking print files to the Paris Designer from a host computer that produces EBCDIC data you must ensure that the method used to move the files refrains from translating to ASCII in order to preserve the Font Index If the printstream data is EBCDIC and Font Indexes and PCC bytes are used If you do use Font Indexes and you also use PCC bytes and your data is originally non ASCII you will need to create special untranslated Printer Carriage Control PCC tables Refer to The Spacing Settings function on page 147 This is because the Font Index determines that you cannot translate Control Bytes and the default Spacing Settings PCC tables rely on translated data 138 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu USING THE TRANSLATION TABLE c Environment menu Translation Table Character Translation dialogue The Translation Table can display the 256 possible byte values in Decimal Literal and Hexadecimal notation The table displays the input byte value on the left with it s corresponding output translated value to the right The prompt Double click in the Out
66. JDE This option allows you to handle the differences between the way PCC characters on DJDE line are processed e For off line jobs the PCC character on a DJDE is ignored which is the normal Paris default e For on line jobs if the PCC byte is on the DJDE print line it will be respected New Sheet on Input Tray Change This option allows CEP emulation when changing trays Equal To Previous Test is True on 1 Page This option only applies to the first page of the job The Paris system default setting is true whereas the CEP default setting is false For Paris to emulate the CEP default setting you would choose this option Not Equal To Previous Test is True on 1 Page This option only applies to the first page of the job The Paris system default setting is false whereas the CEP default setting is true For Paris to emulate the CEP default setting you would choose this option The Paris Designer Reference Manual 589 Appendix C Using Xerox CEP Options 590 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix C Changing Xerox CEP Options SPACING OPTIONS CEP Spacing CEP spacing is different from normal Paris spacing in that in portrait mode on a CEP the positioning of the first line of a text block is affected by the highest baseline value of the last line of the previous text block Click on this option to activate this facility Reset Spacing on Page Boundary Selecting this option resets the al
67. Manager gt New gt Packer Options x m Pack File Name C PARIS USR PACK1 PAK m Runtime Options r Line Length Text KLP Variable Offset o Carriage Ret Line Feed Skip 5 H C Fixed 32 OK Cancel Runtime Runtime Options are Text Offset Skip and Length Options Text Every PAK file begins with a Runtime event record refer to Runtime Events on page 271 This is entered in the Text box The default identifier is 5XLP The receiving system must also have the same identifier for this to be recognised as a valid PAK file refer to DJDE Functions Supported on page 276 f NOTE The Resource Manager has a built in function to detect whether a file is a valid pack file or not In the event of the receiving System not having the same identifier you will receive an early warning message and thus be able to avoid having the file rejected by the receiving system Offset This is the Offset to the Runtime event identifier refer to Offset on page 277 and specifies the offset in bytes of the PAK file The Offset is O by default Skip This value is the skip from 0 to the starting position of the command sequence in the Runtime event refer to Skip on page 278 This must match the skip in the receiving system The Paris Designer Reference Manual 293 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Line The line length can be either fixed or variable The default record Len
68. PT Unrestricted Draw Cancel The Default Line Settings dialogue when adding a Static Line to a form no Properties option VIEW CHANGE LINE DIALOGUE Selecting the View tool then clicking on an added Line element will display the View Change Line dialogue The View Change Line dialogue displays the current Properties setting for the element when changing a Dynamic Line element in an environment 394 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 15 Editing Dynamic and Static Line Settings SETTING LINE ATTRIBUTES Unrestricted Draw r Attributes Style Scid MEM Weight Light 2 Unrestricted Draw The line style can be defined as Solid unbroken Broken a series of dashes Dotted a series of dots The weight thickness of a line can be defined as Light Medium Heavy Custom If this option is selected the adjacent field is activated for entry of the required line weight in 300 of an inch dots The color of an added line can be altered from the Color Palette Choose the adjacent Color box to open the Color Palette The function of the Color Palette is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer NOTE the color of the box reflects the current color of the line Select the Unrestricted Draw checkbox in the Default Settings dialogue to draw lines at any angle NOTE Unrestricted draw is not supported by HP PCL 4 printers A sample of the li
69. Page End Skip to New B Page Output Suppressed pa Information Current Page Def Page Def Fields 269 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING A PAGE SUPPRESS EVENT H Events menu gt Page Para gt Page Suppress gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue selecting Page Suppress from the drop down menu then the Add button will display the Page Suppress Event dialogue Page Suppress Event XI ai Event Description r Description Tests isTes NONE v 2nd Text Tst Test_ NONE v 2nd Test 3 Cancel Enter a description of the event in the event list Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue and set up the test conditions for the Page Suppress event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 None And Or Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the 2 Test button 2d Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button will display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do use two tests 270 The Paris Designer Reference Manual RUNTIME EVENTS Many features of a print job can be determined by events based on conditions within the data however there are instances where events must be performed explicitly according to a command rather than
70. Point 2 55 Private Point 3 5 Bicycles El Set2 Hobart L Point 1 60 Public Add Point Set 1 Broken Set 2 Solid Remove Point Set 3 Dotted Add Set Remove Set The set of data for the chart A complex plot chart can have more than one set Label Set The label for the set on the Legend Double click in the adjacent Label box to add the label Add Point Click on the Add Point button to add a point to the set Value The value of the point Double click in the adjacent Value box to add a point value See also Add Set on the following page regarding adding values to points in added sets Field If adding a dynamic chart the value can be filled by a field Refer to Using Fields to Create a Chart in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Label Point The label for the point on the X axis Double click in the adjacent Label box to add a point label See above Field 426 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Attributes Style f you have chosen to display the chart in color you do not need to define the style attributes The attributes for each set can be defined as the style of line required Solid Broken or Dotted Choose a different style for each set Click on the Remove Point button to remove a point from the set Add Set Click on the Add Set button to add a set to the chart Each set added will have the same number of po
71. Rate x click on OK The edited rate will 3 Conversion Rate be listed in the View Change Currency Id p Description Pound Steng Rate 0 6738 Date Set 05 01 2001 Vel Euro Conversion Rates dialogue View Change Euro Conversion Rates x Fixed Rates Code Count Rate a ATS Austria 13 7603 BEF Belgium 40 3399 FIM Finland 5 94573 FRF France 6 55957 Add Edit Delete Variable Rates Code Curencey Rate JAP Yen 133 6764 AUD Australian Dollar 1 7341 GBP Pound Sterling 0 6738 Add E dit Delete Cancel 316 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Set New Password To set a new password you must first log in as the Operator or Supervisor then change the password as follows choose the required access Open the Euro Rates utility then PECS AMERA HJ X level View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates Depending on the access level selected type in the default Password for epus password Operator or Supervisor then select the Change button to display the Cancel Set New Password dialogue Type in the new password it must be at least 6 characters upper or lower case then type the password again in the Set New Password X Confirm box Click on OK You will be 3 New Password pee mi returned to the Select Euro A L I di l XXXXXX cc
72. Refer to your Paris distributor for information Instructions on using the Indexing function are found in the Paris DI Technical Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 220 THE OPERATOR MESSAGES FUNCTION gt Environment menu gt Operator Messages View Change Print Messages dialogue x Messages MV ShowAtPC Screen ShowAtPrnter Wait Line 1 c Line 2 NENNEN Line 3 Field to store reply in NEN Select Field Clear Cancel Paris Designer allows the entry of messages about a particular print job to be displayed to an operator on the PC s screen or on the printer s screen if applicable The messages are displayed after the first page of output has been formatted and is about to be printed The page is not printed until the operator responds to the message A Reply feature allows a reply to a message to be requested This reply is then assigned as the current value of a field This Reply feature is designed to allow the operator to enter a starting sequence or a page number at runtime For example if an application is being run that has numbered stock and the count needs to start from a particular number The Paris Designer Reference Manual 221 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu USING THE REPLY FEATURE 222 The default behaviour of Operator Messaging is to display a message after the first page of output has been formatted To enable the display of
73. Resources Id 2 Update Reset Never Media Mapping The Resources section of the View Change Printers dialogue deals with printer resource management The Id number is the internal identifier used by Paris for that set of printer resources and cannot be edited How Paris manages printer resources 69 Resource management the downloading of fonts forms and graphics to the printer is automatically controlled by Paris but varies according to the capabilities of the device and Page Description Language PDL being used There are four general levels of resource management Printers with permanent storage available Paris is capable of permanently storing the font resources of some printers For these printers when a resource is first sent to the printer Paris sets a flag to indicate the resource is permanently stored and it is not sent again unless specifically instructed For full details of which printers are currently supported contact your distributor PCL printers no permanent storage When printing to PCL printers those with no permanent storage Paris uses its resource flag system to indicate that resources are stored in the printers memory Because this is memory based storage these resources are lost if the printer is turned off or overwritten if another application sends output to the printer If the printer is turned off or reset you must use the Reset at start of next job option
74. SETTINGS VU C System menu Settings amp gt AI E The Systems Setting dialogue is used to set the grid attributes date and time display and editing options System Settings xj r Grid Horizontal Per Inch 15 0 Vertical Per Inch 6 0 v Visible v Active IV Half Edit Options Movement Can move in both directions IV Auto Scroll With Cursor Show Black Numbers r Autosave v Active Save every 5 minutes OK and Save Cancel f NOTE All measurements displayed in the Paris Designer including size and position of elements will be expressed in the units you select for the grid settings Grid units are not stored as part of a form or environment and are a function of the editors only Therefore a form created in one set of units can be edited in another or units can be changed at any time during the editing process 372 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 11 Functions in the Form Editor System Menu THE GRID System Settings Display the drop down menu to choose the required Gnd z measurement Horizontal Perinch 10 0 Vertical Per Inch 6 0 IV Visible IV Active MV Half Enter the unit of measurement in the adjacent boxes Y in a checkbox indicates the f NOTE Different units of measurement may be used for Horizontal and Vertical grid spacings Preferably the Vertical grid should be se
75. Save button to display the Select Enter Save File Name FIL dialogue USER FIL will appear by default in the File name field File name E SER FIL Save as type FiL Cancel 120 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu WHEN WOULD NOT USE THE STANDARD INPUT FILTER VALUES In some cases you may need to print a database file as opposed to a print file Doing so does involve many limitations but it is possible It does require the database file to have fields which are terminated by special characters and it is quite common to find these as comma delimited database files In these cases the decimal value of a comma Decimal 44 Hex 2C would be selected from within the Input Filter It would be configured as a Line End and not printed turn Print Char off In the Spacing section it would be instructed to space after printing the line The effect is that each field delimited by a comma would be treated as a separate print line All other functions within the Paris Designer can then be applied iew Change Input Filter X m Input Characters Character Attributes This character is a Printable character v This character is a Line End This character is a Page End r Spacing Before printing the current line n Skip to channel 1 Line End E End Space line No End IV Print the current line No End x JV After printing the current
76. Settings Attributes Data Axis General _ STC Ree Left 00 wia oo Top 0 0 Height 0 0 Horizontal Property Fixed Vertical Property Fixed v Defining the Attributes for a Simple Bar Chart Simple Bar Chart f NOTE The unit of measurement for the position is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu The position of the left side of the Chart on the page grid The position of the top of the Chart on the page grid The width of the Chart The height of the Chart Horizontal The Horizontal and Vertical properties of dynamic chart elements and Vertical can be set to Float or Resize according to data in the linked text block These options do not appear in the Default or View Change dialogues in the Form Editor Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual 434 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Data to a Simple Bar Chart Default Chart Settings Fa Attributes Data Axis General imple pur a one set E Add Bar Remove Bar Add Set Remove set Set2 Heaw Set 3 Medium The set of data for the chart A simple bar chart can have one or more sets AddBar Bar Add Bar Click on the Add Bar button to add a bar to the set on the Add Bar button to a
77. Settings option displays the View Change PCC and Channel Assignments dialogue iew Change PCC amp Channel Assignments xj m PEC Assignments Char Before Print After PCC Attributes Before printing C Skip to channel 1 Space lines JV Print the current line After printing Delete Display Decimal Skip to channel o Space lines Load Save m PEC Idenifier Channel Assignments Offset O Mask 255 Channels Lines m Print Options Adiime IV Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for Delete line unassigned PCCs Apply the Before printing options of the first line v Apply the After printing options of the first line zi Cancel WHAT IS THE FUNCTION OF SPACING SETTINGS The Paris Designer Spacing Settings function is also referred to as the Vertical Formatting or Printer Carriage Control PCC function It is only applicable to printstreams that contain Printer Carriage Control PCC bytes and is necessary for Paris to interpret the PCC bytes in the correct manner In some cases during the process of moving the data from the host computer to the network it is possible for the PCC bytes contained in a printstream to have been interpreted into assorted carriage return line feed combinations and stripped on the way to Paris In these cases the Spacing Settings function becomes redundant The P
78. Spacing Before printing the current line Skip to channel 1 Space 1 line JV Print the current line JV After printing the current line C Skip to channel 1 Space 1 line Cancel WHY IS AN INPUT FILTER NEEDED The Paris Designer processes data in a purely sequential manner Bytes of data arrive one after the other until the end of the file with the stream of bytes being largely made up of printable characters that is bytes that actually represent a character to be printed on the page This continuous stream of characters needs to be divided into separate print lines otherwise the data would print in one single line off the edge of the page so within this stream of bytes there are special characters which identify the end of a print line line termination bytes In most cases there are also special characters that specify the end of a page page termination bytes The Paris Designer Reference Manual 109 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu What is the use of line and page termination bytes These special line and page termination bytes are normally not printed and are only required to signal the end of a line or page In other words a filter is applied to the bytes in this case the Input Filter What if the data file has fixed length records In some cases an input data file may contain fixed length print lines This type of file is rare and generally less effic
79. To insert a Field s Current Value into added text in a Page Definition 1 Select Edit mode and then select the required piece of text 2 Move the text cursor to the position in the text where the Field is to be inserted and press Ctrl I 3 Select the required field from the list of available fields The Current Value of the field after calculations is converted to an alphanumeric string if it is numeric and inserted f NOTE The step by step process of inserting a field into added text is described in detail in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual gt To remove an inserted field 1 Move the text cursor over the inserted text it will display in RED 2 Press the Delete key TIP Pressing the Esc key while in Edit mode will undelete a deleted field 196 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu to insert a field into a text block A field s current value can be inserted into a text block using either the Fill Field option or the Text option in the Data Change event dialogue 79 To insert a field s value into a text block using the Fill Field option 1 6 Select the Edit tool then click on the required text block and place the cursor at the position for insertion of the field Press Ctl F to display the Data Change Event dialogue The selected position will be displayed At Specified Position and the First Line and First Char
80. View Change Euro Conversion Rates dialogue then apply the same principles of adding and filling fields as described earlier in this chapter 340 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer ISO 4217 CURRENCY CODES Source SWIFT BIC Directory as per November 1996 Triacom 1997 12 28 Table 8 1 ISO Currency Codes American Samoa USD Kwanza Reajustado AOR Antigua and Barbuda XCD Armenia AMD Australia Australian Dollar AUD Azerbaijan Azerbaijanian Manat AZM Barbados BBD Bhutan Ngultrum BTN Indian Rupee INR The Paris Designer Reference Manual 341 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Bolivia Boliviano MVDol Botswana Pula Brazil Brazilian Real Brunei Darussalam Brunei Dollar Burkina Faso CFAFranc BCEAO Cambodia Riel Canada Canadian Dollar Cayman Islands Cayman Islands Dollar Chad CFA Franc BEAC China Yuan Renminbi Cocos Islands Australian Dollar Comores Comoro Franc Cook Islands New Zealand Dollar Cote d lvoire CFA Franc BCEAO Cuba Cuban Peso 342 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Djibouti Djibouti Franc DJF Ecuador Sucre ECS Unidad de Valor Constante UVC ECV El Salvador El Salvador Colon SVC French Polynesia CFP Franc XPF The Paris Designer Reference Manual 343 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer East Carribean Dollar XCD Guernsey Channel I
81. View Change Xerox CEP Options dialogue The dialogue provides a Translate Control Bytes option which is selected by default Translate Control Bytes ON When selected turned on the Translate Control Bytes option allows the control bytes to be translated before being implemented view Change Xerox CEP Options M General Options Fixed Length Input Records 128 v Translate Control Bytes Emulate Online JDE New Sheet on Input Tray Change The selected Translate Control Bytes option will translate the control Bytes before being implemented m Spacing Options CEP Spacing Reset Spacing On Page Boundary Align Overprint Line baselines r DJDE Options Emulate ITEXT OTEXT WAIT Preserve CME Events for BEGIN DJDE Channel Skips generate blank lines R T Event Offset Adjustment o Cancel Translate Control Bytes OFF If you decide to de select turn off the Translate Control Bytes option in the 9700 Options dialogue you will have to create new Spacing Settings PCC tables to react to untranslated PCC values f NOTE If you are applying a Translation Table and you do not use Font Indexes it is recommended that you do select the Translate Control Bytes option See also Appendix C Using Xerox CEP Options The Paris Designer Reference Manual 137 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu If the printstream data is EBCDIC and
82. a Complex Plot chart 430 adding to a Pie chart 459 legend adding to a Complex Bar chart 447 adding to a Complex Plot chart 432 adding to a Pie chart 461 license multiple 353 line color setting from the Tools Bar 399 drawing at an angle 397 dynamic floating 399 resizing 399 editing 395 98 attributes 397 dynamic properties 399 position 398 style setting from the Tools Bar 399 weight setting from the Tools Bar 399 line spacing in added text 388 in printstream data files 152 156 157 line terminator 114 line feed byte 113 117 lines blank handling in a text block 472 loading Color Palette 523 538 Font List 517 518 form 360 graphic 414 Input Filter 129 Index PCC table 154 printstream data 33 53 Translation Table 144 Local Text Block event See text block event LPD queue as the input source capturing printstream data 44 LPR default settings using in a print job 31 M Mask using in tests 233 Media Mapping 88 XLPInputMedia statements 566 adding the mapping for a tray in an environment 568 deleting the tray mapping 572 editing the environment mappings 573 editing the tray mapping 571 example of setting up 579 mapping the trays 570 matching mappings to the printer 574 selecting an environment 569 setting up 566 StockSet support in Paris 575 using 565 using in an environment 567 merging forms 366 mixing a color in a Color Palette 528 modify option in Run Ti
83. and Next Page buttons to move to pages in the environment USING THE MOVE FUNCTIONS Displays the first page of the current environment D First Page i e Ctl Left arrow Displays the Move to Page dialogue to allow you to Any Page select the number of the page you wish to display Ctl Up arrow The maximum number that can be entered in the Go to Page box is 32 000 Displays the next page of the current environment VD Next Page des Vg Ctl Right Arrow The Paris Designer Reference Manual 228 CHAPTER 7 gt Events FUNCTIONS IN THE EVENTS MENU The functions in the Events menu are the types of input events that are used in the Paris Designer Input events are events that affect the conditions in the environment before the printstream data is processed The table below shows the Input Events listed in the Events menu the dialogue displayed when the event is chosen and the event s function Page Para View Change Event List Add or edit a Page Para events Page Paragraph event Input Record View Change Event List Add or edit a Record Input Record events Selection Record Deletion or Job Separation event Runtime Events Runtime Events Set runtime events Environment View Change Event List Add or edit a Change Environment events Environment event Table 7 5 Input Events in the Events menu 229 The Paris Designer Reference Manual USING TESTS As tests apply to all input events apart from run
84. been added to a text block can be edited deleted or copied by displaying the View Change Text Block Settings dialogue for the text block and selecting the Events button from the dialogue The events that have been added to the text block will be listed in the View Change Event List dialogue that is displayed iew Change Event List x m Local Text Block Events E 1 Form Selection INVOICE Invoice Form Change 2 Back Form Selection MS BACK Back Form Change Add Select Device Features E dit Delete Clip Editing a local text block event gt To edit a Local text block event 1 Either Select the required event from the list then right mouse click on the event to display the Edit Delete and Clip drop down menu Select Edit from the menu to display the associated event dialogue Or Select the required event from the list and click on the Edit button The associated event dialogue will appear displaying the settings for the selected event Edit the event as required If necessary refer to the previous sections for the use of each type of local text block event dialogue The Paris Designer Reference Manual 509 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Deleting a local text block event gt To delete a Local text block event 1 Either Select the required event from the list then right mouse click on the event to display the Edit Delete and Clip drop down menu Selec
85. block can be set Choosing the Color selector opens the standard Color Palette dialogue The function of this dialogue is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer A sample of the currently selected font is displayed in the Sample box Sample 123 ABC xyz The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings SETTING THE TEXT BLOCK POSITION Position Relative Frame Left Horizontal Justify Left Y Vertical Justify Top m Placing a frame around a text block allows the text to be justified in the frame When the Frame check box is selected the Width and Height fields are activated Leftand Top The position of a text block on a page is displayed in relation to the left and top of the page The zero point for the X Y co ordinates is the top left corner of the current document The print position for the first letter or digit in the text element is the position displayed in these fields Width and The dimensions for the text block s frame are entered in the Width Height and Height fields Horizontal Horizontal Justification can be set to Left Right or Center Justify Left Aligns text to the left side of the frame Right Aligns text to right side of the frame Center Centers text on the vertical axis of the text frame 4f NOTE Horizontal and Vertical Justification do not work unless the Frame checkbox is active The Paris Designer Reference Ma
86. button 162 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE OUTPUT SETTINGS FUNCTION Output Settings are used to determine the way the printer output is managed by Paris and can be defined for Page Printing which allows you to specify Simplex or Duplex printing depending on the capabilities of your printer and the page shift for the front or back of the page Printline Size which is used to define the printable portion of a print record Font Indexing which allows you to specify the font for every line Color Indexing which is similar to font indexing but is a list of colors rather than a list of fonts Event Handling which allows you to suppress blank lines generated by the Paris software Device Specific Features which allow you to insert code to activate device specific features such as stapling binding collating folding and so on Copies which allows you to specify the number of copies and the type of collation required Two different approaches are available for Copies 1 Either the Paris Engine can handle the copy request or 2 The output device can handle the copy request Which approach is used depends upon the collation and copy sensitive options selected in the Paris environment For Collation three different types are available for selection Collate on Page Report or File Boundaries The Paris Designer Reference Manual 163 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu View Change Output Setti
87. characters delimited by quotes e g text or text Either single or double quotes can be used to delimit a string constant as long as the same character is used to start and end the string It is not possible to include both a single and double quote character in a string constant as one of them MUST be a delimiter 2 Numeric Whole A numeric whole number e g 34 3 Numeric Float A numeric floating point number e g 52 107 f NOTE Numeric values can be negative Field Names Whenever a Field name is encountered in a calculation string the current value of that field is substituted Any calculation string for the field is executed immediately before the completion of the current calculation unless the Field Name is the name of the current field For example if the Alphanumeric field F1 had a current value of xyz then the following two calculation strings F1 abe and xyz abc have the same final value xyzabc 208 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Functions A function is a predefined action that returns a value based on the parameters listed in brackets following the function name For example In the function NUM F1 the function NUM requires one parameter in this case the Field Name F1 When this calculation string is executed the function NUM F1 will fetch the current value of the field
88. dialogue Font Font style O Agency FB T Algerian Tq Amazone BT The Font list contains the fonts that are available on your PC and can be made up of e Adobe type fonts e True Type fonts e Paris bitmap fonts 4f NOTE If you are using TrueType fonts you must ensure that you have a HP LaserJet driver loaded on your PC IID or higher The HP Laserjet driver provides the 300 dpi device context required by Paris to build its internal bitmap font and was chosen because it is standard on all Windows systems 511 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CREATING A FONT LIST Clicking on the Add button in these dialogues will display the Select Font dialogue Once a Font List has been created it can be saved as a FLT file for use in other environments or forms Defa ult Text Settings dialogue WO gt Add gt Font dialogue View Change Text Settings dialogue t gt Add gt Font dialogue Default Text Bloc k Settings dialogue 4G EP Add gt Font dialogue View Change Text Block Settings dialogue MO ES Add Font dialogue CNN Ab xl Font Font style T imes New Roman Regular T Teletype O Tempus Sans ITC Ir Transistor Ir Treasure O Trebuchet MS Sample AaBbYyZz Script Westem Y This is an OpenType font This same font will be used on both your printer and your screen The Paris Designer Reference Manual 512 Chapter 21 Us
89. e Objects will stay on the Clipboard until you exit the Paris Designer or unless you delete them from the Clipboard beforehand e A Clip button within a dialogue signifies that the associated Clipboard can be displayed Internal Clipboard x Objects r Clipboard Fill Field Month1 Fill Field Month2 Fill Field Month3 Fill Field Month4 Fill Field Month5 Fill Field Month6 Data ChangeT ext Zopy Local Text Blo events in the Objects list of the Clipboard All None All Hone Delete The Paris Designer Reference Manual 536 USING THE CLIPBOARD The Internal Clipboard can be used to copy fonts onto the Clipboard for use in another environment or form Local Text Block events can also be placed on the Clipboard and copied within a text block between text blocks between environments and between page definitions Page definitions pagedefs complete with text blocks can be placed on the Clipboard renamed and copied within an environment or copied to another environment Fields can be placed on the Clipboard and copied within an environment or between environments You would normally only copy fields that have a Field Value that is filled with static text 537 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function COPYING FONTS ONTO THE CLIPBOARD The Font List for an environment or form is displayed by selecting the Edit font lis
90. example of using the Euro functions in the Euro Rates utility 326 F field calculation string syntax errors 215 deleting a field inserted into a text block 489 inserting into a text block using the Fill Field option in a Data Change event 487 value 189 field names in a calculation string 210 fields actions 189 adding 191 attributes 192 calculate 195 name 192 reset 195 at block start 195 at job start 195 at page start 195 type 192 alphanumeric 193 numeric float 193 numeric whole 193 calculating a value 195 calculation string 204 610 The Paris Designer Reference Manual constants 210 field names 210 functions 211 operands 210 operators 205 copying onto and from the Clipboard 550 63 defining 190 editing 191 filling with extracted data 107 inserting into a text block using the Fill Field option in a Data Change event 199 inserting into a text block using the Text option in a Data Change event 199 inserting into text 198 inserting system values within the calculation string 221 setting the current value 196 by specifying the default value 196 using a calculation string 197 using a runtime event 197 using an update field event 196 using as an index entry 202 to build a chart 202 to calculate a value 202 to select a graphic 201 using the value 198 value current 196 default 196 Fields 189 220 fields and calculation strings in the Euro Rates utility 308 F
91. exists in the directory the Resource Manager will ask whether the file should be overwritten The Paris Designer Reference Manual 299 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu RESOURCE MANAGER FAQS AND TROUBLESHOOTING Q I selected an environment with a ttf font in it but this font never shows up in the tree dialog neither does it get packed using the Add Selected Files and Required Resources option What s going on A The true type fonts are handled differently 1 2 As soon as the Resource Manager starts up a true type font table is built The Resource Manager scans the windows fonts directory and for each physical ttf file it picks up it figures out the corresponding logical name Thus for a file called arial ttf the generated logical name would be something like Arial Regular 10 Normally when you choose an environment with an Arial Regular 10 font the logical name to pack the Resource Manager figures out the actual file name in this case arial ttf by looking it up in the table for the corresponding logical name Assume that you select an old environment possibly brought over from another machine and further assume that this environment contains a Garamond Regular font that was present in that machine If this font is absent in your font directory when the Resource Manager starts up it will not have an entry for the logical and physical names for the Garamond Regular
92. files 300 Update Field event local text block 498 adding 499 Fill field 498 501 502 Increment field 501 using 498 using to fill a field value 502 Update Field event Page Para 268 updating printer resources 85 86 using 9700 options 591 a Paris palette other than the default palette 530 barcodes in Paris 83 Change Back Form Local Text Block event 507 Change Form Local Text Block event 504 Clipboard 539 49 Clipboard to copy a page definition to another environment 560 Clipboard to copy a page definition within an environment 556 Clipboard to copy fields within an environment 550 color indexing 170 Color Palette 522 38 copies options in output settings 171 Data Change event 476 to change tabs and columns in printstream data 486 to change the case in printstream data 485 to change the color of printstream data 485 to change the font in printstream data 485 to change the printstream data 477 Data Change event to fill a field in the Euro Rates utility 332 data change eventsto fill fields in the Euro Rates utility 309 data overflow option in a text block 473 Device Specific Features 597 Device Specific Features example 603 End Current Page event 259 Euro functions in the Euro Rates utility 327 618 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro functions to convert a national currency to the Euro 337 Euro functions to convert any national currencies 342 Euro functions to convert the Eu
93. font from the Font List If you have not already created a Font List refer to Chapter 21 Using the Font List function of this manual Click on the Hide Axis checkbox to hide the X axis X Grid Choose None Solid Dash Dotted Short Dash Mix Dash or Dash Dot from the X Grid menu Y Grid Choose None Solid Dash Dotted Short Dash Mix Dash or Dash Dot from the Y Grid menu The point value border Choose Solid or None from the menu 446 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Choose the Auto Calculate Values checkbox to automatically Calculate calculate the minimum and maximum values on the Y axis and the Values number of ticks required This is extremely useful in dynamic charts where variable data is being used and minimum and maximum values are not known or with a broad data range where the actual minimum and maximum values will be automatically calculated Z NOTE The Min Max and Ticks boxes will be unavailable if this option is selected Ro eee eR Re emere mue oa The Paris Designer Reference Manual 447 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the General Settings for a Complex Bar Chart x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Rotate Chat Stacking Bars Percentage Border Solid Width 50 Cluster Overlap LU m 3D Effects Depth E Inclination 30 Rotation 45 Rotate Chart Select the Rotate C
94. from the Clipboard then choose Exit You will be returned to the Field List The Paris Designer Reference Manual 551 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function 10 Use the scroll bar to page through Field List xj the list and display the added fields Current Fields AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric Edit Delete f 11 Select a copied field from the list then click on the Edit button to display the Add Edit Field dialogue Add Edit Field x 12 Edit the copied field s Attributes attributes and values as Name auc required Ai haNumeri Index Repeat Steps 11 and 12 for Mg AphaNumeric each copied field Reset atPageStat Calculate Values Default August Current Cancel 552 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function COPYING A PAGE DEFINITION TO AND FROM THE CLIPBOARD Internal page definitions can be copied onto the clipboard complete with text blocks and dynamic form elements then renamed and copied within the environment or copied to other environments Copying a page definition within an environment When a page definition is copied within an environment it is renamed The attributes and text blocks in the renamed page definition can then be edited gt To copy a page definition within an environment 1 Op
95. goes TRUE and the selected event action takes place For example in a Change Form event test that is set up to test an amount in a field such as a Total Amount if the field value is greater than the test value then change the form 236 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Field Not Equal To Value This comparison test is against a field value rather that a value in the list If the value found at the test position in the data does not match the field value displayed in the View Change Test dialogue the test goes TRUE and the selected event action takes place Field Greater Than Value This comparison test is against a field value rather that a value in the list If the value found at the test position in the data is greater than the field value displayed in the View Change Test dialogue the test goes TRUE and the selected event action takes place Field Less Than Value This comparison test is against a field value rather that a value in the list If the value found at the test position in the data is less than the field value displayed in the View Change Test dialogue the test goes TRUE and the selected event action takes place The Paris Designer Reference Manual 237 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu How do I use two tests 238 You can specify two different tests and combine them either by using logical AND statements where both test conditions must be met
96. have only one set of data therefore the Set buttons on the dialogue are inactive The Paris Designer Reference Manual 421 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the Axis Settings for a Simple Plot Chart Default Chart Settings Attributes Data Asis General Font m 10 Bold Y Axis Auto Calculate Values Min jo Max 50 Ticks 5 Label Milion Precio Apply Click on the Font menu arrow to choose a font from the Font List If you have not already created a Font List refer to Chapter 21 Using the Font List function of this manual Click on the Hide Axis checkbox to hide the X axis z Enter the minimum value for the Y axis in this box Max Enter the maximum value for the Y axis in this box Enter the number of ticks required on the Y axis in this box Enter a label for the ticks on the Y axis Precision Enter 0 1 or 2 decimal places for the values on the Y axis 422 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the General Settings for a Simple Plot Chart Default Chart Settings i Attributes Data Axis General Cancel Apply Rotate Chart Select the Rotate Chart Checkbox to rotate the chart 8 Million SEMEN cedes db dew ater Amel 0t e f ew 7993 7994 1995 1996 1997 A Simple Plot Chart The Paris Designer Reference Manual 423 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings COMPLEX PLOT CHART Def
97. however the Info View will display whether the page is to be printed or suppressed under the Page Output attribute Suppressed pages are still treated logically within the Paris system therefore any DJDE or event based characteristics of the page will still be honoured View Change Event List E x r Page Para Events Type Options Description Page Suppress E dit Delete Clip Exit Designer Description E Last Changed Date 21 02 2001 Page Output Time 11 40 23 i E Current Page Def Pagel Current Value is Source Environment Suppressed Current Form None Current Tray Default SEN eee EDEN Print Mode Simplex 27 White Street Current Side Front Wfhitetown 99999 Page End Skip to New B Info View El xd S ortos yir dee RAN ane ated fe Page Dutput Printed SPER Roi tie Duvprge durus uds amibue CyfentValue Information Current Page Def Fields Designer Description bie Ge Ea ed tack ocd bard ted eee E Last Changed HEATER Mx D ate 1 02 2001 1Page 2 Time 11 45 23 SSP8gS A ll elles E Curent Page Det Pagel S BIRBIACK oonan naaa Sclice Envionnert 9123456789 Current Form None 98 Black Street cc cocos Current Tray Default cr ghee ipa lth et Ee em oe ae ee s um Print Mode Simplex Blacktown 8888 Current Side Front
98. identifier in Runtime events 280 image See also graphic implementing Device Specific Features 597 Implied ENDJOB 276 280 Input Filter 111 30 carriage return byte 115 effect on PCC byte instructions Spacing Settings 130 152 fixed length input records 112 form feed 116 line terminator 114 loading 129 modifying 122 124 125 printable and non printable byte values 113 saving 129 Skip option 119 21 128 Spacing options 127 standard values 123 using 124 Input Processor Plug In function in Input Settings 147 Input Settings 145 48 Input Processor Plug In function 147 removing printer commands from the printstream 146 repeating pages 145 Skip at start of Report 146 using 148 inserting a field into a text block using the Fill Field option in a Data Change event 199 487 a field into a text block using the Text option in a Data Change event 199 custom code to activate Device Specific Features 596 597 system values within the calculation string of a field 221 Internal Clipboard See Clipboard function 521 ISO Currency Codes 343 612 The Paris Designer Reference Manual J JDE or JDL DJDE commands using with PRINTER DJDE command 2776 280 Job Level Code hook for Device Specific Features 598 Job Level Comment hook for Device Specific Features 598 job ticket modifying for an environment 31 32 justifying added text 391 L labels adding to a Complex Bar chart 445 adding to
99. immediately before the string delimiter or a mistaken keystroke Examples NUM F1 Invalid keystroke FName 5 Missing Operator between FName and 5 Correction Remove the string delimiter if it is a mistaken keystroke or add the required operator if it is a missing operator Missing Opening Bracket Cause A closing bracket was found with no matching opening bracket Usually caused by adding too many closing brackets Examples F1 NUM F3 2 Correction Check brackets to ensure there are equal numbers of opening and closing brackets The Paris Designer Reference Manual 213 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Missing Operator Cause An opening bracket was found immediately following an operand There must be an operator between any two operands Examples F1 NUM F2 F3 6 Correction Enter the appropriate operator between the two operands Too Many Nested Levels Cause Calculation strings cannot exceed 9 levels of embedded string Each opening bracket increases the level each closing bracket lowers the level Examples NUM F1 NUM F2 FLT NUM F1 NUM F2 F3 5 Correction Simplify the Calculation string or break this Field into 2 Fields and place part of the Calculations in each String Not Closed Cause The end of the Calculation string was reached but no closing delimiter for a string was found Examples STR F5 test F3 Missing closing quote for t
100. in the Paris Spooler to reset the flags to their initial state Also if the printer is being shared with other applications e g for word processing Paris must be instructed to reset the resources at the beginning of each job This naturally means the resources will be sent every time the job is printed and has the effect of increasing the transmission time to the printer Refer to the section XPD Resource Management Commands for PCL and PostScript printers on page 71 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu PCL4 printers PCL4 printers are not supported by Paris f NOTE Paris provides you with the option to control the number of characters downloaded in a character set This may be necessary if you are using a printer that requires the resources to be sent every time a job is printed Refer to Appendix A Modifying the Character Selection Table of the Paris Spooler Technical Manual Ill PostScript printers no permanent storage As part of its job end processing Postscript printers go through a clean up As a result when printing to PostScript printers those with no permanent storage Paris must send all resources required for a job at the beginning of each job Refer to the section XPD Resource Management Commands for PCL and PostScript printers on page 71 IV Windows GDI When printing using a manufacturer supplied GDI driver Paris passes total responsibility fo
101. in the Red Green and Blue text boxes and the Hue Saturation Sat and Luminosity Lum text boxes The altered color will be displayed in the Color Solid sample box 5 Once the desired color is reached click on Add to Custom Colors to add the color to the Custom colors range As there can be only 16 colors in the Custom color range the added color is inserted in the first position or if previously selected that position in the Custom colors 6 Choose OK The mixed color will be displayed in the Color selector and in the Sample box Refer to Creating a Custom Palette and Saving a Custom Palette that follow 532 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function CREATING A CUSTOM PALETTE The first time you use the Color Palette in the Designer the 16 color palette that is displayed is the default palette Default pal You can alter this palette save it and load it when required gt To create a custom palette 1 Click on an element tool in the Tools Bar to activate the Fill Color or Draw Color button M Bx I dl ren ua TAE M 2 Click on one of the buttons to display the 16 color Palette and select Options to display the Palette Options dialogue Palette Options x Save Palette Custom Palette 3 Choose Custom Palette from the dialogue to display the full Color Palette In the palette there are 16 Custom colors which unless c
102. line E D i Y Display ecima zi C Skip to channel 1 Save OE Cancel Input Character 044 decimal value of a comma selected and set to Line End Printable character off After printing the current line Space 1 line The Paris Designer Reference Manual 121 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu USING THE INPUT FILTER TO SET THE CHARACTER FUNCTIONS a Environment menu Input Filter C Input Filter dialogue The Input Filter is simple to use however it is also easy to make mistakes if its function is not fully understood It can be seen from the previous pages that the function of the Input Filter is extremely important in that it defines the basic elements of the page lines and printable characters gt To use the Input Filter Select the Input Filter option from the Environment menu to open the Input Filter dialogue View Change Input Filter x r Input Characters Character Attributes This character is a Printable character v This character is a Line End This character is a Page End Spacing Before printing the current line Skip to channel 1 Ignore Line End Space i line Ignore No End v Print the current line Ignore Line End m aes 3 JV After printing the current line H Yv Display ex zl C Skip to channel 1 Load Save Space 1 line Cancel 122 T
103. menu displays the Environment Information dialogue To enter the Design Information for the current environment proceed as follows Designer Enter the name of the designer of the environment Description Enter a description of the environment file for example monthly invoice quarterly statement monthly bonus points Up to 255 characters or 5 lines of text can be entered This field displays an automatic log of the date and time when Last Changed the environment file was last saved 29 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu MODIFYING A PARIS JOB TICKET The Printing Information section of the Environment Information dialogue allows job tickets for the current environment to be modified The Paris Job Ticketing function provides printers with the information necessary to create banner sheets for print jobs The banner sheet can contain the name of the user sending the job a description of the job and account details for allocation of costs for the job Clicking on the LPR Defaults button displays the View Change LPR Defaults dialogue The LPR default settings can be used if the control file being read by the Spooler does not have entries in some of the default settings fields Appendix C of the Spooler Technical Manual provides all the information required about modifying Paris Job Tickets however a job ticket can be modified via the Environment Editor for the curre
104. more no less Each entry maps one of the trays used Upper Lower Middle and Tray4 to a unique combination of color weight type and size For example Upper white 75 plain Lower white 75 Check Middle Blue 140 Cover Tray4 white 140 plain Size 612 792 Finally the Docuprint must be configured so that each of the four physical trays has one of the above mappings Typically the largest capacity trays would be configured to the most commonly used media in this example Upper white 75 plain The flexibility of this system is that the user can either configure the printer to match an environment s needs or create media mappings that match the printer configuration 576 The Paris Designer Reference Manual APPENDIX B CREATING AND PREPARING NOVELL PRINT QUEUES FOR INPUT INTO PARIS Appendix B CREATING AND PREPARING NOVELL PRINT QUEUES FOR INPUT INTO PARIS When you are using the Capture Data function in the Environment Editor the Select Input Source for Data Capture dialogue that is displayed contains a Settings button Clicking on the Settings button will display the View Change Novell Queues dialogue which allows you to create new Novell print queues or to modify existing ones e Novell print queues can also be created using Novell s PCONSOLE however the Server attribute can only be correctly set using the View Change Novell Queues dialogue e In order for Paris to input from a queue the User logged onto the
105. new form you would either e Choose the New Form button from the Files Bar e Select the New Form option from the File menu or e Use the shortcut keys AIt N You will be prompted to save any changes you have made to the existing form 4 NOTE The New Form option is not available if you have switched from the Environment Editor to the Form Editor The Paris Designer Reference Manual 357 LOADING A FORM Y C File menu gt Open Form amp C Alt c O C Select Enter File To Load FRM dialogue Selecting the Open Form option from the File menu or using the shortcut keys Alt O will display the Select Enter File To Load FRM dialogue for loading an existing form file into the Form Editor Look in a Frm e E e AUTOSAVE MS FRONT FRM 8 MS CONT FRM a AUTOSAVE MYNEW FRM 8 M5 FORM1 FRM CHART FRM jan MS FORM2 FRM a FILECOPY FRM MS FRONT FRM n Greyscal frm n MS BACK FRM Files of type FRM Cancel gt To load a form file 1 Open the File menu and choose Open Form from the list The Select Enter File To Load dialogue will be displayed 2 Choose the required form file from the File List and choose OK The selected form file will be loaded into the Form Editor f NOTE This option is not available if you have switched from the Environment Editor to the Form Editor 358 The Paris Designer Reference Manual SAVING A FORM Yi D gt File menu g
106. of the Day The Paris Designer Reference Manual Contents 289 290 291 292 293 295 298 300 303 304 306 306 308 318 325 326 328 341 350 351 11 Contents Multiple Licensing Paris Designer Help PART 2 USING THE FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR CHAPTER 10 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR FILE MENU CREATING A NEW BLANK FORM LOADING A FORM SAVING A FORM SAVING A FORM UNDER A NEW NAME CHANGING FORM PAGE ATTRIBUTES CREATING A SUMMARY OF THE FORM FILE Summarizing the form file MERGING FORMS TO CREATE A NEW FORM OVERLAYING A FORM TO ACT AS A TEMPLATE Removing an overlaid form 12 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 351 352 354 355 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 PRINTING A PROOF OF THE CURRENT FORM SELECTING A PRINT DESTINATION MODIFYING A PRINT DESTINATION RESETTING RESOURCES CHAPTER 11 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR SYSTEM MENU DEFINING THE SYSTEM SETTINGS The Grid Edit Options Autosave and Save VIEWING THE DOCUMENT SWITCHING EDITORS PREVIEWING A DOCUMENT BEFORE PRINTING CHAPTER 12 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR VIEW MENU The Paris Designer Reference Manual Contents 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 13 Contents CHAPTER 13 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR TOOLS MENU 380 PARIS FORM EDITOR HELP MENU 381 PART 3 EDITING THE SETTINGS FOR DYNAM
107. of the frame on the page grid Select the Alignment radio button to set the Horizontal and Vertical Alignment alignment Choosing Left Right or Center from the drop down menu aligns the Graphic accordingly within the frame on the X axis Horizontal Choosing Top Bottom or Center from the drop down menu aligns the Graphic accordingly within the frame on the Y axis Vertical Select the Scale to fit to frame radio button to be able to re scale the graphic Graphics scaling is only supported on PostScript printers Scale to fit to frame PostScript printing only Refer to the following section Re scaling a Graphic 414 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 18 Editing Dynamic and Static Graphic Settings RE SCALING A GRAPHIC When a graphic is inserted on a page it is within a frame at the size at which it was originally scanned In the Paris Environment or Form Editor an added graphic can be re scaled 79 To re scale a graphic 1 Select the View tool and click on the graphic to display the View Change Graphic dialogue 2 Select the Scale to fit to frame radio button then choose OK View Change Graphic x r Attributes Name FLANE BMP Graphic Rotation None Watermark V Active Color a Left 45 Top 1 0 r Position m Frame v Active Width 15 5 Height 8 0 C Align in frame Horizontal Centre Y Vertical c entre M
108. onto the hard disk on Xerox Docuprint NPS printers Doing so will avoid the need to constantly download these fonts within the print job By selecting the desired fonts from the font list and then clicking on the Make Disk File button Paris will create a file in the PARIS OUT directory with a PS extension NOTE The file needs to be copied to the ImageFonts xerox ps directory on the Docuprint s SUN workstation with the appropriate utility An entry then needs to be added to the CommonSetup ps file in the usr printing cedar directory as follows mark Imagefonts xerox ps xxxxxx ps run stopped cleartomark where xxxxxx ps is the file name In order to instruct Paris to use these printer resident fonts e You need to include the XPDManageFonts False statement in the appropriate PPD file In this way Paris will never download any fonts to the printer e When XPDManageFonts False is used you must ensure that all fonts have been loaded on to the printer e Because Truetype fonts cannot be stored on the printer in the same way you must ensure that no Truetype fonts are used in any application that may be printed using this PPD The Paris Designer Reference Manual 305 EURO RATES UTILITY V c Utilities menu 7 Euro Rates C Select Euro Rates Access dialogue The Euro Rates utility offers users of the Paris system the ability to convert any national currencies including conversion to the Euro and vice vers
109. operator messages prior to the formatting of the first page of a job three steps are required 1 The following must be added to the paris ini file Printing MsgsAtPageStart true This allows Paris to preserve the default operator message handling for users who do not wish to take advantage of the Reply feature 2 In the Designer at the design stage a field must be selected in the View Change Print Messages dialogue as the field that will receive the reply 3 In the Spooler at runtime the job settings dialogue must be opened for a job that is paused with the status Operator Intervention Required A reply is entered under the Output tab of the View Change Job Definition Settings dialog The Spooler will then pass this reply back to the Engine which will fill the field Refer to the Paris Spooler Technical Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu USING THE OPERATOR MESSAGES FUNCTION a gt Environment menu gt Operator Messages View Change Print Messages dialogue Selecting Operator Messages from the Environment menu will display the View Change Print Messages dialogue The fields in the View Change Print Messages dialogue allow 1 for short messages to be sent to the operator and 2 a request for a reply to a message Show at PC Screen Show at Printer Field to store reply in or Select Field button Selecting the Show at PC Sc
110. options of the first line v Apply the Before printing options of the first line Apply the After printing options of the first line Apply the Before printing options of the first line v Apply the After printing options of the first line For example You have set the spacing action for a PCC value that occurs on the first line and other lines in a text block You want the spacing action to apply to the first line as well as the others In this case you would select the appropriate checkbox to apply the Before or After printing options of the first line 160 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Saving a PCC table Once you have defined the spacing settings for your data files when you save the environment the spacing settings are also saved To have the same spacing settings available when you design new environments you can save the current settings as a PCC table You can then quickly load the table and apply it to your environments as required To save a PCC table 1 Click on the Save button The Select Enter Save File Name dialogue will be displayed Select Enter Save File name Save in 3 Env E 1401 pec E 1403 pcc Dflt pcc File name fuser pcc Save as type pec Cancel The first time you save a PCC table the default USER PCC will appear in the File name field Type the name for your file in the
111. pagel Pagedef f line printer 9 regular Font zz n R kime mm nmm bml d Ir Cancel 3 Select which sub resources to pack then choose OK 4 The selected files will be packed and displayed in the Resource Manager dialogue Resource Manager xi New Add a Done Resource Name Resource Type ipexl arial bold Activity v Packed Form IPEX1 v Packed Font ARIAL BOLD 8 Files packed 2 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 297 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu UNPACKING RESOURCES Resource Manager Open Add IE Done Activity gt To unpack resource files 1 Click on the Open button to display the Select Enter File To Open dialogue and the pak files in the system Double click on the required pak file to display all the contained resources in the Resource Manager dialogue Select Enter File To Open Look in aus mg al e Ll eL Ea EE P CK3661 28 PAK File name PACK2 PAK Files of type Pack Files pak Cancel 7 298 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Resource Manager X aform after greyscal ipex1 ipex2 ipex2a mma avo ER 3 Either Select each resource as required Or Sselect all resources and then click Extract This will extract all the resource files from the pak file and place them in their respective directories If such a resource already
112. paper trays for the printer available to your PC 1 Test Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue to set up the test conditions for the Change Tray event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 t None And Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the 2 Or Test button 2d Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do use two tests The Paris Designer Reference Manual 264 THE PAGE PARA SELECT OUTPUT TRAY EVENT FUNCTION A Select Output Tray event enables you to direct output to different output trays on your printer if available ADDING A SELECT OUTPUT TRAY EVENT VU gt Events menu gt Page Para gt Select Output Tay Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue selecting Output Tray from the drop down menu then the Add button will display the Change Tray Event dialogue Change Tray Event x Description p efault Y r Tray OK Cancel Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list Tray The required output tray can be selected from the drop down menu that displays the paper trays for the printer available to your PC 1 Test Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue and set up the
113. section we will define the color attributes for a box To define the color for a box element 1 Once the box is added to the page select the View tool then click on the box to display the View Change Box dialogue 2 Choose Solid from the Fill menu then click on the Color selector to display the default Color Palette View Change Box 1 x Sample Attributes Border seid v peu Weight uo z ae Fil Solid v mm Shadow None m m Corners BH m Square x Size o y Size BOSS ae Ss Position Left 6 5 width r2 c__OPtions Top 17 0 Height 7 0 Cancel 3 Select Options from the palette to display the Palette Options dialogue Palette Options x Save Palette Custom Palette The Paris Designer Reference Manual 527 Chapter 22 The Color Palette function 4 Choose Load Palette from the list to display the Select A File dialogue which displays the palettes in the Paris system These are stored in the ENV directory Look in d Em e E Grnshade pal File name Redshade pal Files of type Color Palettes pal Cancel 5 Choose the required palette from the list then choose OK The chosen color palette will be displayed iew Change Box x Sample Attributes Border seid v Weight uo z P Position Lett 6 5 width r2 c__ Options Top 17
114. should be changed for reasons of security and should be made known only to those users granted the right to add or edit variable rates Refer to Set New Password on page 317 view Change Euro Conversion Rate x r Fixed Rates Code County Rae a ATS Austria 13 7603 BEF Belgium 40 3399 FIM Finland 5 94573 FRF France 6 55957 DEM Germany 1 95583 IEP Ireland 0 787564 ITL Italy 1936 27 LUF Luxemboura 40 3333 NLG Netherlands 2 20371 PTE Portugal 200 482 ESP Spain 166386 x The Paris Designer Reference Manual 309 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Defining the attributes for a Variable Conversion Rate When you add or edit a Conversion Rate the following attributes are defined View Change Euro Conversion Rate r Conversion Rate Currency Id van Description ser Defined Rate 1 0 Date Set fi 4 02 2001 Verify 1 Cancel Currency Id The Currency Id is the standard currency code as set by the International Standards Organization ISO Refer to Table 8 1 at the end of this chapter for the currency code for all countries Description The Description is of the country s currency For example the Yen for Japan or the Pound Sterling for the United Kingdom A description of each country s currency is available in Table 8 1 Rate The current conversion rate for the added variable currency against the fixed Euro rate The user adding or editing the conversion rate
115. test conditions for the Change Tray event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 None And Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the 2 Or Test button 2d Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button will display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do I use two tests 265 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE PAGE PARA UPDATE FIELD EVENT FUNCTION 266 A Page Para Update Field event works in the same way as a local text block Update Field event except that it is conducted on every text block on a page whereas a local text block Update Field event is conducted on its associated text block only Update Field events can be of two types Fill or Increment and are used to fill or increment the Current Value of a field by loading data from the printstream into the specified field e A Fill Field event will replace the current contents of the field with the extracted data This becomes the Current Value of the field and replaces any previous value e An Increment Field event will add the extracted data to the Current Value of the field By specifying a line and position range it is possible to total a column An Increment Field event is normally only possible on Numeric fields If the field type is Numeric the extracted data is converted to a number
116. the DJDE FEED e trayName One of the standard Paris tray names XPDEnvStockSet environmentName stocksetName trayName e environmentName The name of a valid Paris ENV file e stocksetName The name of the StockSet to be mapped This is the name that will appear in the DJDE FEED e trayName One of the standard Paris tray names The Paris Designer Reference Manual 573 Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function St 574 Defaut Tray1 Upper Main Tray2 Lower Aux Tray3 Middle andard Paris Tray Names Paris has a series of standard names for logical input trays These values must be mapped to either an InputSlot or Media Map call for a physical tray to be selected The valid logical tray names are LargeFormat LargeCapacity Mama For example You need to create a number of mappings As a default the StockSet names COVERI COVER2 COVER3 and COVER4 are to be mapped to the Paris Trays Tray1 Tray2 Tray3 and Tray4 respectively These mappings will apply to all jobs Also two sets of environment specific mappings are required The mapping changes required are as follows e For the ENV Test1 the default mapping for COVERI needs to be changed from Tray1 to Tray2 e The mapping for the standard CEP keyword MAIN needs to be changed from its Paris internal default of Tray1 to Tray4 e The Test ENV requires a custom mapping of the stocksetName INVOICE
117. the following pages 8 Function Dialogue Used to Settings Alt E System Set the grid attributes time and date Settings display and edit options Zoom Full Page Alt 1 Display full document scaled to fit screen Zoom Out Alt 2 Reduce document on screen by 50 Zoom In Alt 3 Enlarge view of document by 50 Switch Alt amp W Switch to Form Editor Preview Alt V Ps Display the document as it will print Table 2 1 Functions in the Environment Editor System Menu The Paris Designer Reference Manual 93 D 94 EFINING THE SYSTEM SETTINGS VU C System menu Settings amp gt AI E System Settings The Systems Setting dialogue is used to set the grid attributes display and editing options System Settings i x Grid Horizontal Per Inch 1 0 Vertical Per Inch 6 0 v Visible v Active v Half m Edit Options Movement Can move in both directions J Auto Scroll with Cursor v Show Block Numbers r Autosave v Active Save every E minutes OK and Save Cancel f NOTE All measurements displayed in the Designer including size and position of elements will be expressed in the units you select for the grid settings Grid units are not stored as part of a form or environment and are a function of the editors only Therefore a form created in one set of units can be edited in another or units can be changed at any time du
118. the Enter New Name dialogue will be displayed Enter New Name x Value to Test for Statmt2 Cancel 8 Typein the new name for the page def and click on OK The renamed page def will be displayed in the Objects list The Paris Designer Reference Manual 555 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard x Objects r Clipboard Pagel Statmt2 None All None Delete 9 Exit the Internal Clipboard dialogue You will be returned to the Select Page Def dialogue with the copied page def displayed in the Internal list Select Page Def x Files You can select Pact and editihe File To Edit Create Pagel copied pagedef Internal External Statmt2 Delete Clip Edit Create Exit You can select and edit the copied pagedef or exit the dialogue to return to the View Change Print Order dialogue _Delete e The copied page def will not be displayed in the dialogue and must be added to the Page Definitions list e Creating a new pagedef will add it to the list of available pagedefs however it does not make it the current pagedef 556 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Copying a page definition to another environment A page definition can be copied to other environments gt To copy a page definition to another environment 1 Open the Environment menu and choose Print
119. the concatenation of the two operands The right operand is automatically converted to the type of the left operand Examples 5 6 returns 11 12 6 6 2 returns 18 8 55 a returns 55 a is not a valid number abc xyz returns abcxyz abc 5 returns abc5 204 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Subtraction For numeric operands this operator returns the difference between the two operands This operator has no effect for alphanumeric operands Examples 6 2 returns 4 15 4 10 2 returns 5 2 abc 5 returns abc has no effect abc a returns abc has no effect Multiplication For numeric Operands this Operator multiplies the two operands This Operator has no effect for alphanumeric operands Examples 6 2 returns 12 1 1 10 0 returns 11 0 abc 5 returns abc has no effect x abc a returns abc has no effect Division For numeric Operands this Operator divides the Left operand by the Right operand unless the Right operand is zero If the Right operand is zero then the return Value is the Left Operand unchanged This Operator has no effect for alphanumeric operands Examples 6 2 returns 3 15 6 3 0 returns 5 2 abc 5 returns abc has no effect abc a
120. the first line to the channel the Add v Apply the Af 3 Channel 4 is selected in line button is selected to the Channels list and is display the Add Line then reflected in the PCC Value dialogue Line 1 is Assigns list already displayed unassigned PCCs 156 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu The Line Value is entered in the Add alue dialogue then OK is selected The process of displaying the Add Line Val Add Value dialogue is repeated to add the Line Values 31 and 46 16 Each time a Line Value is added to the selected channel it is displayed in the Lines list OK Cancel m Channel Assignments Channels Lines 16 31 Delete line Econo gt 20 om Nn le What happens to the printing of the document Whenever a 2 is encountered in the PCC byte of the printstream the current print position will Skip to the next available line number in the Channel Assignments list e Ifthe current print position was on line 20 of the text block it will Skip to line number 31 because it is the next on the list e fit was encountered on line 50 the next line number would be line 1 of the next text block e If there were no more text blocks on the page the current page would be ejected and line 1 of the first text block on the next page would be selected The Paris Designer Reference Manual
121. the li t price of the softan Please comtuct oar dedicated Helpline on 01 M4 777773 if you experience amy difficulties Thamk you for choosigg Amber Softwaie EUR amp GBP This invoice from Amber Software Dect provides 3 62719 244400 you with totals in GEP and Goods EUR cunen des We can 634 76 427 78 244 003 2719 accept parment in either curency 4 261 95 237176 4277 00 634 76 l Sample produced by XLprint Softwar Sample document illustrating the use of the Euro Rates utility The Paris Designer Reference Manual 339 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Converting the Euro to a national currency using the Euro functions EuroGoods CUR2STR EURO STR2CUR Goods FROM NLG 2 2 FRONT Add Edit Field xj m Attributes Name EuroGoods 000000000 Type Curency S e Index Reset AtPageStat e Calculate CUR2STR EURO STR2CURIGoods FROM 2 Values Default foo Current oo Converting any national currencies Although the whole function of currency conversion is called the Euro the function can be used for the conversion of any national currencies such as from the Australian Dollars to US Dollars or Singapore Dollars to Pounds Sterling All that needs to be done is to enter the relevant rate for each of the currencies to be converted into the Variable Rates table in the
122. the line remains on the current page but the pagedef changes immediately This has two possible side effects i If the line satisfying the test is NOT in the first text block any text blocks already completed placed and formatted are NOT changed This means you are able to have the first few text blocks on a page formatted with the first pagedef Page1 and the remaining text blocks with the new pagedef 252 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu 7 Functions in the Events menu ii If the line number of the line satisfying the test e g 25 is greater than the Maximum Lines e g 20 for the current text block of the new pagedef an End Text Block will occur after this line but the text block will have 25 not 20 lines on this page In simple terms a page definition can be changed by a condition in a line other than the first line as long as e The condition occurs in the first text block only e The current line number is less than the maximum number of lines of the first text block on the new pagedef detail on page 230 None And Or Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the 2 Test dic button 2nd Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button will display the View Change Test dialogue as above 1 Test Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue and set up the test conditions for the Change Page Definition even
123. to be changed First Char Enter the position of the first character to be changed Number of Enter the number of lines in the range Lines Number of Enter the number of characters in the range Chars 1 Test If an option is chosen that includes a test the 1 Test button will be activated Select the 1 Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue to set the test options Each type of conditional test that can be applied to an event and the use of the View Change Test dialogue is described in the section Using Tests in Chapter 7 of this manual 2nd Test If AND or OR is selected the 2 Test button is activated Select the button to set a second test as above The Paris Designer Reference Manual 487 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Example 1 Using a Data Change Event to set the columns in a text block In this example we are going to set the columns in Text Block 3 Summary of our environment The font in the text block is currently Arial 9 Regular v TIP Before setting the columns in a text block unless the font in the text block is already a Fixed Pitch font it is often useful to change the font to a Fixed Pitch font such as Courier This gives you a useful guide to setting your tabs and columns The Summary text block with the font Arial 9 Regular Statement date 12Jan 98 Last statement date 12 Oct 97 Teton has been changed to Courier Next e
124. to the Font List in the Page Definition For example e If the initial font is set to 1 a 3 in the font index position will select the third font in the Font List e Ifthe initial font is set to O it will select the fourth font Refer to Table 5 4 Font Index Values on page 167 Font Indexing is ONLY applicable if your data contains font index bytes Ade Selecting the Active checkbox activates the font indexing option The Offset specifies the position of the Font Index byte in the print record Offset 0 is the first character Offset 1 is the second character Start at One Start at One determines if the first font in the pagedef Font List is referred to as Font 0 or Font 1 When this checkbox is selected it denotes that the first font in the list is Font 1 i e not 0 Max The drop down menu provides the options 16 32 64 128 256 Replace Selecting this checkbox will replace any invalid indexes with the invalid index first font in the Font List For example if a 7 is entered in the font with first font index position and there are only 4 fonts in the list the first font in the list will be used 178 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining Color Indexing Settings m Color Indexing IV Active Offset o v Start at One If your data contains color index bytes you can use
125. turn off Type42 downloading add the following line into the printer s XPD file XPDTyped42 False 6 WARNING XPD files can be edited using a standard text editor however changing XPDs without proper instruction can be detrimental It is recommended that XPD files should NOT be changed except by experienced users or under instructions from the distributor A full description of the working of XPD and PPD files can be found on page 60 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu USING BARCODES IN PARIS Paris offers as an optional extra the Barcodes Kit which can be added to any installed Paris system The kit consists of a number of TrueType fonts and supporting program code that enable Paris to prepare and format barcodes according to user requirements f NOTE The Barcodes Kit must be purchased and installed separately Contact your distributor for details Simple to Use The barcode kit is simple to use A Paris function that allows incoming data to be recognised and used anywhere in a document also allows application of the Barcodes Kit option to format data for printing as a barcode Create and Print from any Data 81 With the Barcodes Kit barcodes may be created and printed from virtually any data Formatted data can be placed on a page using any of the standard Paris methods for adding data to a document with the required TrueType barcode font sel
126. up a test on the text string Total Amount Due in the data and having the test jump to Text Block 5 rather than the next one 4f NOTE 1 You cannot jump backwards If you are in Text Block 6 an End Text Block that tries to jump to Text Block 5 becomes a NEXT 2 An attempt to jump to a non existent text block also becomes a jump to NEXT The Paris Designer Reference Manual 261 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING AN END TEXT BLOCK EVENT VO gt Events menu gt Page Para End Text Block gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue select End Text Block from the drop down menu then the Add button to display the End Text Block Event dialogue End Text Block Event x Description r Text Blocks Add NN Clear Tests 1st Test NONE Cancel Description Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list Text Blocks In an End Text Block event the next text block to go to is selected from the Text Blocks list NEXT is always displayed and is selected to jump to the next text block To jump to another text block the number of the required text block can be added to the list then selected See Add below You cannot jump backwards see NOTE on the previous page To add a text block to the list type the text block number in the text field adjacent to the Add button then click on the Add button The n
127. used in a calculation string If you click on a function it will be inserted in the Calculate text field of the Add Edit Field dialogue Function Description Syntax STR Striname of field Return the current value ofa field a string j NUM Num name of Field Return the current value of a field as a floating point number RND Hind name of field Return the current value of a field as a whole number IF If conditon resultl result2 Calculate 2 results use condition to determine which result to returr DEF Def name of field Return the default value of a field SET Set name of field value Set the current value of a field CUR Cur name of field Return the current value of a field without calculation CASE Case string CASE_UPPERICASE_LOWERICASE_TITLE Change the case of a string STRIP Strip string STRIP_STARTISTRIP_END Remove Spaces from a string Amt strina AMT FULL Rietum the current value as an amount 336 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer The same process of filling a field with a calculation string is used for EuroVat and EuroGross gt To fill the EuroVat and EuroGross fields 1 In the Field List dialogue select the EuroVat field then the Edit button to display the Add Edit Field dialogue 2 Enter the calculation string as required see below then choose OK 3 Repeat the process for the EuroGross field then choose
128. where two logical pages are printed on the one side of a piece of paper When the first logical page is terminated with a form feed character we do not want it to go to the next physical page as it would normally do but rather skip to the next logical page The Paris Designer Reference Manual 117 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Skipping to the next logical page Selecting Line End and Skip before or after printing the current line will take you to the next logical page text block If there are no more text blocks on the current page then a physical page feed will be performed and the skip will take you to the first line of the next logical page the first text block on the new page Refer to Using the Skip option on page 126 View Change Input Filter l x Input Characters Character Attributes Print la This character is a Printable character pedea i ae v This character is a Line End 2 Ignore No End This character is a Page End 3 Ignore No End 4 Ignore No End 5 Ignore No End Spacing pnis ER Before printing the current line 8 Ignore No End Skip to channel 1 3 Ignore No End Keaen 1 Ignore Line End PRESEA MAIS LT Iv Print the current line ack JV After printing the current line Skip to channel 1 C Space 1 line Cancel Using Skip with the form feed input character to skip to the next
129. you wish to expire before you are reminded to check the variable rate It is recommended that you Cancel View Change Euro Conversion Rates maintain the default Fixed Rates setting Choose OK The added EH CT P currency will be ATS Austria 13 7603 displayed in the BEF Belgium 40 3399 Variable Rates list FIM Finland 5 94573 FRF France 6 55957 v Edit Delete Variable Rates 133 6764 1 7341 0 6738 7 Choose OK to exit the Add E dit Delete Euro Rates Utility oroa The Paris Designer Reference Manual 327 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer ADDING FIELDS TO THE FIELD LIST FOR USE IN CURRENCY CONVERSION According to your data files you will be able to estimate the fields you will need to add for your currency conversions Once you have done this add the fields to the field list For illustration purposes we are going to use an environment that has been created to produce invoices in dual currency for the fictitious company Amber Software Direct Ltd So far we have set up and edited our text blocks and have added events fields elements forms and so on Now we are going to add more fields and fill their values by using a Data Change event or by using a calculation string and the EURO functions gt To add a field to the field list Open the Environment menu and choose the Fields option The Field List dialogue will be displayed
130. zero e Numeric strings or values are stored as floating point numbers e The Field Value can be negative Examples Inputsting abc CumentValue 0 0 zero Inputsting 75 45 Curent Value 75 45 Inputsting 75 CumentValue 75 0 Inputsting 75F CurentValue 0 0 zero P causes invalid number The Paris Designer Reference Manual 191 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Currency The current Field Value is stored as a numeric floating point number rounded to two decimal points e Setting an AlphaNumeric string or value into this type of field results in a current value of 0 0 zero e Numeric strings or values are stored as floating point numbers rounded to 2 decimal places e The Field Value can be negative Examples Input string abc Current Value 0 00 zero Input string 75 455 Current Value 75 46 Input string 75 454 Current Value 75 45 Input string 109 Current Value 109 00 Input string 31 1 Current Value 31 10 Input string 46 05 Current Value 46 05 Input string 75 Current Value 75 00 Input string 75F Current Value 0 0 zero F causes invalid number Index This option is only available if the Paris Document Interface function has been purchased Refer to your Paris distributor 192 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Reset Reset
131. 0 dynamic chart element Complex Bar 442 dynamic chart element Complex Plot 427 dynamic chart element Pie 456 dynamic chart element Simple Bar 436 dynamic chart element Simple Plot 422 dynamic circle 404 dynamic graphic 415 dynamic line 399 dynamic text 392 resource files unpacking 300 Resource Manager utility 292 FAQs and troubleshooting 302 how does resource packing work 293 packing resource files 297 packing resources 294 setting the packer options 295 unpacking resources 300 using 294 resource packing pak files 293 how does it work 293 packing files 294 297 unpacking resource files 300 resources printer management of 70 printer storage of 70 resetting 372 resources printer resetting 87 94 XPD graphics compression commands for PCL and PostScript printers 75 XPD resource management commands for PCL and PostScript printers 73 resources printer fonts Font Name Mapping file information 77 Substitution and Font Name Mapping files 76 Substitution file information 77 rotating a graphic 415 rotating added text 388 RPAGE the equivalent in PARIS 258 RTEXT and RFORM options in output settings 174 Run Time event modification adding 283 adding a condition 284 adding an action 285 Run Time events activating 276 279 adding a Runtime event modification 283 DJDE options 281 Feature option for Device Specific Features 602 Offset 279 Skip option 280 Text option Ru
132. 1 Using the Font List function EDITING THE FONT LIST Change Select a font in the Font List then right mouse click on the Delete Clip selected font to display the pop up menu Change Delete and pop up menu Clip Select the required option from the menu Change displays the Select Font dialogue for the selection of a replacement font Delete displays a warning dialogue before deleting the font Clip displays the Internal Clipboard Delete button Select a font in the Font List then select the Delete button to delete the font from the list Clip button Select the Clip button to open the Internal Clipboard dialogue This allows you to cut and paste font selections from one environment to another The use of the Internal Clipboard is described in Part Four of this manual Common Functions in the Paris Designer 516 The Paris Designer Reference Manual PART FOUR COMMON FUNCTIONS IN THE PARIS DESIGNER IN THIS PART CHAPTER 22 THE COLOR PALETTE FUNCTION CHAPTER 23 THE INTERNAL CLIPBOARD FUNCTION P C D 518 ART FOUR OMMON FUNCTIONS IN THE PARIS ESIGNER Many functions and dialogues are common throughout the Paris Designer and may be encountered in both the Environment Editor and the Form Editor The use of common dialogues such as the Select Enter File To Load dialogue used to open load files and the Select Enter Save File Name dialogue used to save files has been described in earli
133. 1 1999 3566 Bytes 10 11 1338 416 Bytes 02 01 2001 5754 Bytes 03 03 1338 b Add Selected Files Only C Add Selected Files and Required Resources C View and Select Resources to Pack Cancel 2 Choose OK The Resource Manager dialogue will be displayed and the selected files will be packed indicated by the busy Activity dial A log is generated simultaneously indicating the status of the pack and finally the number of files packed Resource Manager x Open Add 2d Done Resource Name Resource Type greyscal frm ink1 frm ink2 frm invdebit frm ipexl frm ipex2 frm Activity v Packed Form IPEX 1 FRM v Packed Form IPEX2 FRM v Packed Form IPEX2A FRM Files packed 3 296 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu View and Select This option also called the Advanced Resource Selection Resources Pack allows you to select a resource then select which sub resources you want to pack gt To view and select resources to pack 1 Choose a resource then the View and Select Resources Pack radio button 2 Choose OK The Advanced Resource Selection dialogue will be displayed showing the selected resource s and their associated sub resources Advanced Resource Selection x El amp IPEXT ENV Environment Form f arialbold 8 Font f arial bold 18 Font f arial bold 10 Font ipex4 Form f arialbold 12 Font f arial bold 10 Font
134. 135 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu W HAT RELEVANCE DOES THE TRANSLATION TABLE HAVE TOCONTROL BYTES Control Bytes are the bytes at the start of a print record which are not included in the printable portion Control Bytes normally contain Printer Carriage Control PCC bytes and possibly Font Indexes They are defined in the Printline Size Offset in the View Change Output Options dialogue Refer to the section Defining Printline Size on page 177 to Font Indexes Font Indexes rely on the bit pattern of a character and not its display value It is therefore very important not to translate these For more information refer to the section How does Font Indexing work on page 165 By turning the translation function off for Control Bytes the Font Index will be preserved while the printable portion of the line will be translated to Printer Carriage Control bytes 136 Unlike Font Indexes Printer Carriage Control PCC bytes usually make use of the display value of characters For this reason they are normally not affected by the Translation Table in fact the standard PCC control tables supplied with the Paris Designer rely on the display value of the PCC bytes The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu How IS THE TRANSLATE CONTROL BYTES OPTION TURNED ON AND OFF Pressing the function key F6 or choosing CEP Options from the Environment menu will display the
135. 300 of an inch or 300 dots per inch Points 1 72 of an inch per Inch per Centimeter Use the arrow adjacent to the Rotate field to display the rotate list The rotate list provides you with the option to rotate the font in 90 degree steps 90 180 270 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings The Add button allows you to add a font to the Font List Click on the Add button to display the Select Font dialogue Refer to the section Creating a Font List in Chapter 21 Using the Font List Function f NOTE The number of fonts and styles used in a job should be kept to the minimum possible It is advisable to delete any unwanted fonts from the font list See List below The Edit font list button displays the View Change Font List dialogue This dialogue allows you to view and change the font Refer to the section Editing the Font List in Chapter 21 Using the Font List Function To change the color of added text choose the Color button to display the Color Palette The function of the Color Palette is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer Choosing the Reset button resets the font line spacing to its inherent value Refer to Spacing on the previous page Word wrapping If the Word wrapping enabled option is checked and a Frame enabled Width has been specified words that would exceed the Frame Width are place
136. 410 Previewing a Graphic before adding 411 Setting Graphic Attributes 412 Setting the Properties of a Dynamic Graphic Element 413 Setting the Frame for the Graphic 414 Re Scaling a Graphic 415 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 15 Contents CHAPTER 19 EDITING CHART SETTINGS Default Chart Settings dialogue View Change Chart Settings Chart Types Simple Plot Chart Complex Plot Chart Simple Bar Chart Complex Bar Chart Pie Chart CHAPTER 20 EDITING TEXT BLOCK SETTINGS TEXT BLOCK SETTINGS Setting the Text Block Attributes Setting the Text Block Position Setting Text Block Options Adding Local Text Block events How are Data Change events used How are Update Field Events used How are Change Form events used How are Change Back Form events used How are Select Device Features events used Editing deleting and copying Local Text Block events CHAPTER 21 USING THE FONT LIST FUNCTION CREATING A FONT LIST Adding Fonts to the Font List 16 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 417 417 418 419 420 424 434 439 453 462 464 465 467 469 472 473 495 501 504 507 509 511 512 513 Contents LOADING EDITING AND SAVING THE FONT LIST 514 Loading the Font List 515 Saving the Font List 515 Editing the Font List 516 PART 4 COMMON FUNCTIONS IN THE PARIS DESIGNER 518 CHAPTER 22 THE COLOR PALETTE FUNCTION 519 Load Palette 520 Save Palette 521 Custom Palette 521 What Color Palet
137. 43 Duplex LPT1 Add Settings Remove Sales Deptl Add Either x Remove Cancel Then select the Remove button x 2 Delete this Destination Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual RESET RESOURCES FUNCTION 92 tj gt File menu gt Reset Resources S C AIt R During the setup of your printers you will have instructed Paris when to reset each printer depending on the storage capabilities of the printer being defined and whether or not the printer is being shared with other applications Refer to the sections How Paris manages printer resources on page 69 and Resetting Resources on page 85 The Reset Resources option from the File menu is used to reset the default printer before you print for the first time for the day or if the printer has been turned off This is necessary for Paris to send the special characters for drawing elements before the printer can print them correctly The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 2 gt System FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR SYSTEM MENU The System Menu lists the functions relevant to the on screen display the view of the document switching editors and print preview Table 2 1 indicates the System menu options and the dialogue displayed when the option is chosen if applicable and the function of the option Each function and the use of any associated dialogue are described in detail on
138. 6 To edit the event select the event to activate the Edit button then select the Edit button to display the event s dialogue When you return to the Environment Editor and save the environment the event you have copied to the text block will also be saved 546 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function COPYING FIELDS TO AND FROM THE CLIPBOARD Fields can be copied within an environment or between environments You would normally only copy fields that have a Field Value that is filled with static text Typically within an environment you would copy a field or fields that have that Attributes you require where you only need to edit the copied fields Values Between environments the same could apply although you would not necessarily need to edit the Values The following example illustrates copying fields within an environment In the Field List below we have the fields Month to Month6 representing the 1 to 6 months of the year We wish to add six more fields to the environment to represent the second six months of the year Rather than adding each field and setting the field s Attributes and Values we are going to copy the existing month fields We will then edit the Values of the copied fields only as the Attributes will remain the same Field List m Current Fields Name Type Curent Value 4 Month 1 AlphaNumeric Month 2 AlphaNumeric Month 3 AlphaNumeric Month
139. 87 viewing document zoom options 100 378 viewing conversion rates 314 W watermark selecting for a graphics file 415 word wrapping in added text 389 393 X Xerox 9700 options 591 Xerox Job Ticket hook for Device Specific Features 598 XLPInputMedia statements adding 566 XPD XL Print Printer Description files 59 62 XPD file example of using Device Specific Features 603 XPD graphic compression commands for PCL and PostScript printers 75 XPD Graphics Compression Commands using 75 XPD resource management commands for PCL and PostScript printers 73 Z Zoom options 100 378 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 619
140. APPENDIX D DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURES IN PARIS Appendix D DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURES IN THE PARIS SYSTEM The Device Specific feature in the Paris system is an option that opens up hooks into the output data stream generated by the Paris print engine allowing the user to insert custom code at specific points in the code The intention of this option is to allow the user to insert code to activate device specific features such as stapling binding collating folding and so on however it is a general purpose system and the possible uses are left open to the user The Paris Designer Reference Manual 594 USING DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURES INSERTING CODE It is the user s responsibility to ensure that the code to be inserted is correct both in it s immediate effects and also in any side effects the inserted code may produce The Paris system does not attempt to validate or understand the code to be inserted This feature is currently only active in the Postscript driver but will be added to the HP PCL driver if required 6 WARNING A pre requisite to using these functions is a thorough understanding of the workings of PostScript commands including the manual editing of XPD files the use of syntax and so on See also How do XPD and PPD files work in Chapter 1 of this manual IMPLEMENTATION OF THE DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURE The Device Specific feature option consists of four different hooks and thr
141. Add Frame Spacing 420 Dots Reset Edit font list Left 10 0 Rotate None Top 8 7 Color REN Width 0 0 Sample Height 0 0 123 ABC xyz Horizontal Justify et v Vertical Justify Top v Options Description Text Lines per page 66 Data Overflow Active Events View Change Overflow Page Data Clipping Active Settings Overlow Form Blank Lines Print 462 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings D gt de c Text Block View Change Text Block Settings dialogue iew Change Text Block Settings xj r Attributes r Position EONS Arial 12 Regular 57 0 dts A Relative Frame Spacing 57 0 pots Reset E dit font list Left 35 0 Rotate None d Top 10 0 width 9 1999 Color n m Sample Height 1 1200 123 ABC xyz Horizontal Justify e z Vertical Justify Top v r Options Description ee Lines per page Data Overflow j g Events View Change Overflow Page Select Data Clipping Active Settings Overlow Form Select Blank Lines Pint sts TN The Paris Designer Reference Manual 463 TEXT BLOCK SETTINGS The Text Block Settings dialogue is separated into three sections Attributes Position and Options The View Change Text Block dialogue has the additional option Relative in the Posit
142. Change Chart Settings dialogue is used to view or change the settings for a selected Chart To use the options within the Default and View Change Chart Settings dialogues the same processes are required with the addition of the Properties function for Dynamic Chart elements DEFAULT CHART SETTINGS DIALOGUE Selecting the Chart tool then clicking on the Settings button will display the Default Chart Settings dialogue The Default Chart Settings dialogue displays a Properties option for setting Fixed Float or Resize properties Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Axis General Letfoo widhf00 To oo Height 0 0 Horizontal Property Fixed Vertical Property Fixed F Use Default Chart Attributes Cancel Apply The Paris Designer Reference Manual 417 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Default Chart Settings l x Attributes Data Axis General eoo 0 Width 0 0 Top 0 0 Height 0 0 Use Default Chart Attributes Cancel Apply The Default Chart Settings dialogue when adding a Static Chart to a form no Properties option VIEW CHANGE CHART SETTINGS Selecting the View tool then clicking on an added Chart element will display the View Change Chart Settings dialogue This dialogue is used to view or change the settings for a selected Chart When changing a Dynamic Chart element in an environment
143. Channel Assignments dialogue Display mode for PCC table Display The PCC table of values can be displayed in Hex Decimal or Literal mode by selecting the appropriate option These display modes do not influence the actual actions of the PCC table ANSI tables are best viewed in Literal mode m PEC Assignments Loaded ANSI table Literal mode Space 3 Space 2 Skip 1 a fad Dent di Delete Display Literal 152 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining the action for a specific PCC value r PCC Assignments PCC byte Char Befoe Pin ate 77 4 action Def Space 1 Space 1 Selected PCC value PCC Assignments displays each PCC value and action for a loaded table Each possible PCC value is displayed in the Char column with the Spacing or Skip action displayed in the Before or After columns The Print column always shows Print by default see below Any character that occurs that is not defined in the table will act as specified in the default Def entry f NOTE You can add a PCC value if you are creating your own table however such instances are rare Refer to Adding a PCC on page 162 PCC Attributes Before printing Skip to channel EH C Space lines v Print the current line After printing Skip to channel 0 Space lines gt To define the attributes for a PCC value 1 Select
144. Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings SETTING TEXT ALIGNMENT WORD WRAPPING AND COLOR ATTRIBUTES FROM THE TOOLS BAR Horizontal Text alignment and Word Wrapping can be selected before adding text 1 Select the Text tool to activate the Text Align and Text Wrap buttons in the Tools Bar ANE O Ri e Hx ors e P arial 10 Regular 5 0 Ipi JA B Click on the arrow adjacent to the Text Align button to display the Left Center Right and Full justification icons and select as required A a Click on the arrow Click on the Text Wrap 3 a d select the required justification A Al Click on the Text Wrap button to select the attribute When you add the text to the page word wrapping will automatically take place we Click on the Line Color button to display the Color Palette and choose the required color Refer to Chapter 22 The Color Palette function The Paris Designer Reference Manual 391 Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings PASTING TEXT INTO THE ENVIRONMENT OR FORM EDITOR 392 Text that has been copied or cut from a Windows application can be copied into the Environment or Form Editor while in Text Add mode One benefit of this method is to add text that has been spell checked in another application and then add it to Paris gt To paste copied text 1 In the Environment or Form Editor select the Add Text button then click
145. Color Indexing function to specify the color of the data for a printline NOTE Color Indexing is ONLY applicable if your data contains color index bytes Active Selecting the Active checkbox activates the color indexing option The Offset specifies the position of the Color Index byte in the print record Offset 0 is the first character Offset 1 is the second character Start at One Start at One determines if the first color in the pagedef Color List is referred to as Color 0 or Color 1 When this checkbox is selected it denotes that the first color in the list is Color 1 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 179 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Choosing the Event Handling option r Event Handling Suppress Generated Blank Lines Suppress Generated Blank Lines The Event Handling option is used in direct relation to an environment with dynamic boxes that contain columns of data in which tests are specified over a range of characters and columns In such a case the Paris software will generate a series of blank lines to accommodate the data In this instance to suppress the lines the Suppress Generated Blank Lines checkbox should be selected Device Specific Features Device Specific Features are options that open up hooks in the output data stream generated by the Engine This allows the user to insert custom code at specific points in the code to activ
146. DITNOTE Q REPORT Q i i l i 5 Enter the name of the new input queue then choose OK Enter Queue Name x TEST1_Q 5 Enter the new queue name then choose OK The new queue name will appear in the Available Queues list View Change Novell Queues x Available Queues rCurrent Members C Users Servers C Ops INVOICES Q CREDITNOTE_Q SPOOLER USER REPORT_Q 580 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris How DOI PREPARE A NOVELL QUEUE FOR INPUT When you prepare a Novell queue for input you need to set the User Server and Operator attributes of the selected Novell print queue Setting the queue Users list The Users list is the list of users who are permitted to add print files to this queue It is possible to specify User Groups 1 Select the required queue from the Available Queues list 2 Click on the Users radio button in the Current Members section of the dialogue then click on the Add button in the same section The Select Queue Member dialogue will be displayed 1 Select the queue View Change Novell Queues Available Queues Current Members Users C Servers Ops INVOICES Q CREDITNOTE Q REPORT Q 2 Click on the Users radio button then click on the Add button
147. Designer Reference Manual 597 Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris 1 Environment Output The Output Settings dialogue of an environment contains a listbox of the requested features for this job Any listed feature will be passed to the PostScript driver at the start of the job Any page oriented feature listed here will be sent at the start of the first page of the job only Listbox which will display added Device Specific features requested for a job 598 m Page Printing Simplex m Page Shift Front Back Along long edge Along short edge r Color Indexing iew Change Output Settings x r Font Indexing Active Offset fi F Start at One Max i5 z Replace invalid index with first Font Offset fi Active Jv Start at One 1 Hg Add Remove r Printline Size Event Handling Offset o Length 133 Suppress Generated Blank Lines mei Specific Features r Copies Number of Copies 1 Mi Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris 2 Environment Events A new event has been added to the Page Para and Local Text Block event lists This is a normal event with the full range of test options When the test is true the current page will have the requested features added Only Page features can be called via tests iew Change Event List xj
148. E If only one set is added the Attributes will be displayed as Bar 1 Bar 2 and so on Add Set Click on the Add Set button to add a set to the chart The Bars for each set added will have the same Labels as Set 1 Only the Values for each Bar will need to be added Remove Set Click on the Remove Set button to remove a set from the chart The last added set will be removed 442 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Data Labels to a Complex Bar Chart x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Border Solid Rotate None v Apply Show Data Click on the Show Data Labels checkbox to show the data values Labels at each bar in the set Border The data label border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Rotate The rotation of the data labels in degrees Choose None Rotate 90 or Rotate 270 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 443 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Headings to a Complex Bar Chart x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Header Text Population Growth od Australian State Capital Cities Font Arial E 10 Bold Sd Border None Footer Show Tex Font Arial M 12 Regular Border None Click on the Show checkbox to show the header for the chart Enter the required header text in the Text box Choose the required Font Size and St
149. Functions in the Environment Menu gt To delete an inserted field EITHER 1 Click on the Edit tool then click on the text block that contains the inserted field 2 Move the cursor to the insert position of the field which will be displayed in the Status Bar as Field fieldname 3 Press the Del key You cannot delete the field if you have placed the cursor WITHIN the field OR 1 Choose the View Tool then click on the text block that contains the inserted field The View Change Text Block Settings dialogue will be displayed 2 Click on the Events button to display the View Change Event List 3 Select the Data Change event from the list that contains the inserted field 4 Press the Delete key e TIP To check the contents of the Data Change event before deletion click on the Edit button 198 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu to select a graphic fd When adding a graphic to a page definition the option exists to add the graphic using the Select By Name or Select By Field option in the View Change Graphic dialogue Using a Field to load a Graphic is described in detail in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Briefly if the Select By Field option is chosen and a valid Field name is entered this tells the system to read the current value of the field apply any calculation string and treat that value as an AlphaNumeric string
150. IC AND STATIC FORM ELEMENTS 383 CHAPTER 14 EDITING TEXT SETTINGS 384 Default Text Settings dialogue 384 View Change Text Settings dialogue 385 Setting Text Attributes 386 Setting the Position for Added Text 388 Setting the Properties for a Dynamic Text Element 390 Setting Text Alignment Word Wrapping and Color attributes from the Tools Bar 391 Pasting text into the Environment or Form Editor 392 CHAPTER 15 EDITING LINE SETTINGS 393 Default Line Settings dialogue 393 View Change Line dialogue 394 Setting Line Attributes 395 Setting the Line Position 396 Setting the Properties for a Dynamic Line Element 397 Setting Line weight style and color attributes from the Tools Bar 397 14 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Contents CHAPTER 16 EDITING CIRCLE SETTINGS 398 Default Circle Settings dialogue 398 View Change Circle dialogue 399 Setting Circle Attributes 400 Setting the Circle Position 401 Setting the Properties for a Dynamic Circle Element 402 Setting Circle line and fill color attributes from the Tools Bar 402 CHAPTER 17 EDITING Box SETTINGS 403 Default Box Settings dialogue 403 View Change Box dialogue 404 Setting Box Attributes 405 Setting Box Corners 406 Setting the Position for a Box 407 Setting the Properties for a Dynamic Box Element 408 Setting the Box line and fill color attributes from the Tools Bar 408 CHAPTER 18 EDITING GRAPHIC SETTINGS 409 Default Graphic Settings dialogue 409 View Change Graphic dialogue
151. ICE SPECIFIC FEATURES 595 Inserting Code 595 Implementation of the Device Specific feature 595 Example of an XPD file using Device Specific features 601 INDEX 609 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 19 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual describes the use of the PARIS Designer system and is to be used in conjunction with the Paris Designer User s Manual and the Paris Spooler Technical Manual 22 While every effort is made to keep the information in this manual up to date you may find that the PARIS Help available in your PARIS system provides the most current information PARIS Help contains all the information available in the PARIS manuals is fully indexed and is constantly updated and improved 22 SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL 20 Symbols will appear regularly in the text or in the column adjacent to the text to mark special information that supplements the textual theme or topic The symbols may flag additional information such as suggestions advice or warnings or may be an illustration of the topic of the text The symbols used in this manual are as follows 4f NOTE This symbol indicates information supplementary to the current text Y TIP This symbol indicates a practical hint 6 WARNING This symbol is to draw your attention to a significant item or topic The Paris Designer Reference Manual PART ONE USING THE FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR IN THIS PART CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2 CHAPTE
152. Jat Page Start tJob Start At Page Start At Block Start The Reset attribute determines when a field s current value will be reset to its Default Value The possible Reset values are At Job Start At Page Start and At Block Start The default for a new field is At Job Start If a Field has no Default Value specified the current value is reset to an empty string for AlphaNumeric Fields or 0 zero for Numeric Fields At Job Start The field s current value is set to its specified default value at the start of a job only Select this option to create a Field that can hold its contents from one page to the next At Page Start The field s current value is set to its specified default value at the start of each page Select this option to create a Field that can hold its contents from one text block to the next At Block Start The field s current value is set to its specified default value at the start of each text block on a page Select this option to create a field that is used with a single text block only Calculate A Calculation String can be entered in the Calculate field The Calculation String of a field is applied to the current value to produce an output value whenever the field is used Refer to Field Calculations on page 20 for full details on creating calculations The Paris Designer Reference Manual 193 Chapter 5 Functions in the Envir
153. M CHART FRM ai M FORM2 FRM a FILECOPY FRM an M5 FRONT FRM an Greyscal frm n MS BACK FRM Filename INVOICE FRM Save as type FRM Cancel 2 Choose the OK button A message dialogue will be displayed confirming that the form has been saved to disk 360 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHANGING FORM PAGE ATTRIBUTES D c File menu Form Attributes C View Change Form Attributes dialogue The View Change Form Attributes window is used to set the page orientation and page size for the form The Orientation options are Portrait or Landscape Page sizes available are according to those supported by the printer currently set as the print destination for the PC running the Designer If a Custom option is available and is chosen for the Page Size the Width and Height options are activated and can be set View Change Form Attributes r Attributes Orientation Portrait Page Size Jaa Width Height 3507 i Cancel WARNING A form s page attributes must be the same as those set for the page definition in the environment to which the form is to be attached The Paris Designer Reference Manual 361 CREATING A SUMMARY OF THE FORM FILE Yi D gt File menu gt Form Info File Information dialogue Selecting the Form Info option from the File menu displays the File Information dialogue Information on the current form file such as designer upgrade
154. M Vertical Fixed M In the Horizontal and Vertical fields set the properties of Horizontal and Vertical a dynamic line element to Fixed Float or Resize Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual SETTING LINE WEIGHT STYLE AND COLOR ATTRIBUTES FROM THE TOOLS BAR Line weight style and color attributes can be selected before adding the line 1 Select the Line tool to activate the Line Weight Line Style and Color buttons in the Tools Bar IN EI O alli 9 X els G Arial 10 Regular 5 0 Ipi Click on the arrow adjacent to the Line Weight or Line Style buttons to display the available options and select as required TE Click on the arrow select the required weight or style Click on the Line Color button to display the Color Palette and choose the required color Refer to Chapter 22 The Color Palette function The Paris Designer Reference Manual 397 CHAPTER 16 EDITING CIRCLE SETTINGS The Default Circle Settings dialogue is used to define the edit settings for a circle before it is added to a form or environment The View Change Circle dialogue is used to view and edit the current settings for the selected circle To use the options within each dialogue the same processes are required with the addition of the Properties function for Dynamic Circle elements DEFAULT CIRCLE SETTINGS DIALOGUE Selecting
155. Manual VIEWING THE DOCUMENT VU C System menu gt Zoom Choosing the Zoom option displays the options listed below to zoom to different views of the document currently displayed on screen The amount of the page displayed on screen at any given time is a result of both the zoom level and the screen resolution of the monitor Option c Full Page gt Zoom Out 8 c Zoom In 98 Shortcut Keys Action Displays the full document gt Alt 1 scaled to fit the screen Reduces the view of the gt Alt 2 document on screen by 50 Enlarges the view of the gt Alt 3 document on screen by 50 The Paris Designer Reference Manual SWITCHING EDITORS VU C System menu Switch amp gt Alt Ww The Switch option allows you to switch from the Environment Editor to the Form Editor The form that is currently active in the Environment Editor can then be edited in the Form Editor Once you have completed editing the form the Switch option is also available in the Form Editor so that you can switch back to the Environment Editor When you choose the Switch option from the System menu a dialogue box requesting confirmation will be displayed Ts x Switch To Editing Form j Cancel 4f NOTE If no form is active for the current document displayed in the Environment Editor you cannot use this function The Paris Designer Reference Manual 99 PREVIEWING A DOCUMENT BEFORE PRINTING
156. Maximum file Number 999999 Append number to Name to Extension For example as per the dialogue above the resultant files would be PRINTO001 0UT PRINT002 OUT and so on Append Number to Extension To increment the file extension select the Append Number to Extension checkbox View Change Next File Settings x Settings Output directory Jo Paris OUT Output name PRI NT Dutput extension out r File Numbering Maximum file Number 999999 Append number toName it Cancel For example as per the dialogue above the resultant files with be PRINT 001 PRINT 002 PRINT 003 and so on 67 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Retaining the input file name and number for the output file 68 To retain the input file name and number the character string lt input gt can be entered in both the Output Name and Extension text fields iew Change Next File Settings x Settings Output directory c Paris OUT Output name lt INPUT gt Output extension lt INPUT gt f NOTE input can also be entered as the Directory name however this would result in the overwriting of the input files by the output files and should only be used with caution The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu MANAGING PRINTER RESOURCES m
157. Modify Event s Value Suppress Events Choose the required action from the list and click on the Add button to display 1 the View Change Modifier Action dialogue View Change Modifier Action Action Event Id i x CurrentV alue Present New Value Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 283 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Event Id 2 Click on the arrow to the right of the Event Id text box to display the pop up menu that lists the DJDE s 3 Choose the required event from the list Current Value New Value The Current Value and New Value text boxes will be available depending on the action chosen 4 Enter the values as required then choose OK The added action will be displayed in the Actions list with the Event Current Value and New Value of the action 5 Choose OK to return to the Runtime Events dialogue The added modifications will be displayed in the dialogue Display Modification results in Designer If you select the Display Modifications in Designer checkbox any Runtime event modifications that have been added to the job will be displayed in the Designer Editing a Condition or Action gt To edit a condition or action 1 Inthe View Change Runtime Event Modifier dialogue Either Click on the condition or action to be edited then choose the Edit button Or Double click on the condition or action The relevant View Change Modifier dialog
158. N THE SELECT TEXT BLOCK FUNCTION CHAPTER 6 FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR MOVE MENU USING THE MOVE FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 7 FUNCTIONS IN THE EVENTS MENU USING TESTS About events and tests How tests work Setting the test conditions 8 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 187 188 189 201 220 221 222 223 224 225 227 228 228 229 230 230 231 239 Setting up two tests PAGE PARA EVENTS Types of Page Para events Adding and editing a Page Para event THE PAGE PARA CHANGE FORM EVENT FUNCTION When would I use a Page Para Change Form event Adding a Page Para Change Form event THE PAGE PARA CHANGE BACK FORM EVENT FUNCTION When would I use a Change Back Form event Adding a Change Back Form event THE PAGE PARA CHANGE PAGE DEFINITION EVENT FUNCTION When would use a Change Page Definition event Adding Change Page Definition event THE PAGE PARA CHANGE OUTPUT EVENT LIST EVENT FUNCTION Adding a Change Output Event List event THE PAGE PARA END CURRENT PAGE EVENT FUNCTION How would I use an End Current Page event Adding an End Current Page event THE PAGE PARA END TEXT BLOCK EVENT FUNCTION Adding an End Text Block event The Paris Designer Reference Manual Contents 242 243 244 245 247 247 248 249 249 250 251 251 252 254 255 256 257 258 260 262 Contents THE PAGE PARA SELECT INPUT TRAY EVENT FUNCTION 264 Adding a Sele
159. NGS FUNCTION i gt Environment menu gt Spacing Settings View Change PCC amp Channel Assignments dialogue View Change PCC amp Channel Assignments r PCC Assignments PCC Attributes Before printing C Skip to channel ot Space lines IV Print the current line After printing Delete Display Decimal Skip to channel oo Space lines Load Save m PCC Idenifier r Channel Assignments Offset 0 Mask 255 Channels Lines Add i m Print Options Adine v Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for Delete line line unassigned PCCs Apply the Before printing options of the first line JV Apply the After printing options of the first line Cancel To use the Spacing Settings function select the Spacing Settings option from the Environment menu to open the View Change PCC and Channel Assignments dialogue The Paris Designer Reference Manual 151 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Loading a PCC table Clicking on the Load button displays the Select Enter File To Load PCC dialogue The standard PCC tables supplied with Paris and any that you may have created and saved are listed Select Enter File To Load Look in Env El Ps 1403 pcc File name JAnsi pec Files of type pce Cancel Select a PCC table from the list and choose OK to display it in the View Change PCC amp
160. Name 2 xi Save in C3 Dta ck E3 File name T est dta Save as type DTA Cancel The destination directory and filename will be displayed in the Name box in the dialogue The Status of the capture will be displayed and the number of Blocks captured The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Status The Status is Active when receiving Waiting when inactive and Error when a problem occurs Blocks The number of Blocks indicates the data captured As a Block is 256 bytes you can estimate the amount of data captured and exit the process when required Exit At any time you can select Exit to stop the capture process This will close the file at that point Once a data file has been captured you can use it repeatedly within the Environment Editor Refer to Loading a Sample of the Printstream Data on page 32 and Creating Editing Model Printstream Data on page 45 38 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu How DO CAPTURE DATA FROM A NOVELL PRINT QUEUE The Paris Spooler can receive input directly from a Novell print queue Again in order to ensure that the environment you design is configured for live data you will need to capture a sample of the print file to disk from the appropriate input Novell queue The method is similar to capturing dat
161. OK again to exit the Field list dialogue EuroVat The EuroVat calculation string is CUR2STR EURO VAT FROM GBP 2 2 FRONT Add Edit Field x Attributes Name EuoVat Type Currency Index Reset t Page Start i ph 2FR 2 Values Default jad Current ao Cancel Calculate CUR2S TR EURO VAT FROM GBP 2 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 337 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer EuroGross The EuroGross calculation string is CUR2STR EURO Gross FROM GBP 2 2 FRONT x Attributes Name EurcGross Type Currency Index Reset Jat Page Start Calculate CUR28 TR EUR GrossFROM GBP 2 2F 7 Values Default o 0 Current a0 338 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer zd pean en Invoice at Dual currency Datti TALTE Bi dig 22 TEA Fex a 24 Pinca C cmtrolller Mr Romid Expert Tiger Electromics Limited Tiger Electronics Limited lmackure Hoese bnugexre Home Bediord Road Bedioud Road So Halll Saliba ll P rminaghum Birmingham BA G66 R21 G66 The inserted fields The text extracted to EuroGoods EuroVat and fill the fields EuroGross with values Goods VAT and resulting from the calculation Gross strings containing the Euro functions Additonal infor mation 12 mats sofiane maisema amd sappos is iechaded in
162. OLOR TO AN ELEMENT USING THE DEFAULT COLOR PALETTE An existing color in the Color Palette can be added to a selected element To add an existing color to an element 1 Select the View tool then click on the required element to display the element s View Change dialogue 2 Click on the Color selector to display the Color Palette View Change Text Settings x Attributes rm Position Font Arial 3 Bold Italic 43 0 dts Add Frame Spacing 43 0 Dots Res Ect font ist Left 41 5 Rotate None x Top 75 Color e Word wrapping enabled Width Height 12 0200 123 ABC BOSS mislia Horizontal Justify Let Vertical Justify Top M Cancel m Sample Options 3 Select the required color from the Color Palette then choose OK The selected color will be displayed in the element s View Change dialogue 4 Choose OK to return to the editor f NOTE To view the document with the added color you will need to select the Preview button from the Files Bar or press Alt V You can define a color in an element s default settings dialogue before adding the element Subsequently each time you add the element to the environment the element s color will be as defined The Paris Designer Reference Manual 526 Chapter 22 The Color Palette function ADDING THE COLOR TO AN ELEMENT USING A PARIS SYSTEM PALETTE In this
163. Offset Defaul X r Tests Huc x peres vowc seii gren Meme M Cancel Field D Page 1 Test value ji per Input Greater Than Value In this comparison test if the value found at the test position in the data is greater than the test value the test is TRUE and the selected event action takes place Change Form Event x m Description View Change Test X DEBIT FORM Test Info E First Line 1 Change To JINVDEBIT Num lines 1 p Tests Offset D 3 NONE x 2nd Test OK Cancel Mane 5 Test Input Greater Than Value x 234 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Input Less Than Value Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu In this comparison test if the value found at the test position in the data is less than the test value the test goes TRUE and the selected event action takes place For example a test set up to test an amount in an invoice If it is less than the test value then change the form Search Input For Value This is the same as an Input Equal To Value test the only difference is that the Offset value is ignored and the entire length of each line is searched for the value in the list The line range is still valid View Change Test x Test Info First Line 0 Num lines Y Offset ignored gt Offset ro ter oO Mask oS Test input Equal To Value Field T Add string Add byte Del
164. Order from the menu The View Change Print Order dialogue will be displayed 2 Select the pagedef to be copied from the Page Definitions list then click on the Files button to open the Select Page Def dialogue The selected pagedef will be highlighted in the Internal pagedef list View Change Print Order x Page Definitions Forms Back Page Forms Select Page Def x Files File To Edit Create Statmt2 Internal External Pagel Delete Clip Delete Clip eat The Paris Designer Reference Manual 557 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function 3 4 558 Click on the Clip button The Internal Clipboard dialogue will be displayed Click on the page def to be copied in the Objects list then choose the Copy gt gt button The page def will be copied onto the Clipboard and will be displayed in the Clipboard list Internal Clipboard xj Objects Clipboard Pagel milf Page Statmt2 All None All None Delete Exit Exit the Select Page Def dialogue and subsequent dialogues to return to the Environment Editor Close the current environment then open the environment to which the pagedef is to be copied Open the clipboard as described in steps 1 to 3 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard x Objects Clipboard Zapy Pagel Statmt2 lt lt Co
165. Output Codes in Red have been changed from the default InputChar_ Quputha 4 1 1 ASCII TLT displayed in Hex mode 23 23 zl Display Hex Load Save Cancel 132 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu The EBCDIC translation table The EBCDIC translation table should be used to translate an EBCDIC printstream into ASCII for the Paris Designer In some cases you may need to modify the EBCDIC translation table to satisfy any variations iew Change Translation Table xj r Character encodings Double click in the Dutput Char column to change a translation code Output Codes in Red have been changed from the default Input Char OupuCha 4 EBCDIC TLT displayed in Hex mode 1F 1F zi Display Hex X Load Save Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 133 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu WHAT IS THE SCOPE OF THE TRANSLATION TABLE Modified Translation Tables apply only to the environment in which they exist and will be saved with the environment Using the Save function within the Translation Table dialogue will allow you to save the current settings for use in other environments by way of the Load function Use the Load button to load a Translation Table either the supplied ASCII TLT or EBCDIC TLT tables or one you have previously saved after modification 134
166. PARIS DESIGNER REFERENCE MANUAL LOY XLPRINT SOFTWARE 1998 XLPrint Software Pty Limited All rights reserved This work is copyright This manual and its accompanying software may not be reproduced by any means mechanical electronic or otherwise without the prior agreement and written consent of XLPrint Software Pty Limited or an appointed representative The Paris Designer Reference Manual First Published August 1998 Second Edition May 1999 Revised August 1999 Third Edition January 2000 CD ROM Edition First Published February 2000 CD ROM Second Edition December 2000 Paris Designer is an XLPrint Software product The Paris Document System is a trademark of XLPrint Software Pty Limited Sydney Australia This document may contain or refer to information and products protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under the patent rights of XLPrint Software Pty Limited nor the rights of others All product names used in this manual are trademarks of their respective owners The information in this document is provided for reference only Names and data used in examples are fictitious and are provided for explanatory purposes only Written and produced by XLPrint Software Pty Limited Suite 401 220 Pacific Highway Crows Nest Sydney NSW 2065 Australia Printed in Australia The Paris Designer Reference Manual CONTENTS ABOUT THIS MANUAL SYMBOLS USED IN THIS MANUAL PAR
167. R 3 CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 5 CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 7 CHAPTER 8 CHAPTER 9 FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR FILE MENU FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR SYSTEM MENU FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR VIEW AND TOOLS MENUS FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR TEXT EDITING MENU FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT MENU FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR MOVE MENU FUNCTIONS IN THE EVENTS MENU FUNCTIONS IN THE UTILITIES MENU FUNCTIONS IN THE HELP MENU PART ONE USING THE FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR The Environment Editor is introduced to you in Chapter 2 of the Paris Designer User s Manual where the editor window and the Tools Bar are described Part One of this manual takes you through each of the functions in the Environment Editor s menus The use of each function is explained and illustrated as are any associated dialogues Paris Environment Editor DFLTP E ni xj File System View Tools TextEditing Environment Move Utilities Events Help 0 gkEHIGOermBIiI amp sms Info View 23 Bl xl Vo er tah ar tye A kE oris der AB TALS oe vut eR IESE Duy dae Attribute Current Value VM MEAE aei Nyse I9 ur ES Bh Sek o6 f oo Se LA EN D esigner p VES n ir S PPS PEN Description Po E DC Rar Oa A a N E S E Last Changed Date 15 11 2000 Time 14 22 51 Fields Z a Ready Current Printer Default No Input Abs 34 0 2 5 Rel 34 0 2 5 7
168. Select the Input Source required print file from the list p 3 Select the required print file from the list then choose OK The Select Enter Save File Name dialogue will be displayed 40 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Defining the destination file name for data to be captured from a Novell queue The default path displays the DTA directory as the location in which to store the sample file It is recommended to always use the default destination 4 Either Select a file from the File List to overwrite an existing file a warning message will appear Or Type the new file name in the File name box with a DTA extension Save in Dta E er EJ File name entered File name TEST2DTA Save as type all Files Cancel Capturing the data from the queue 5 Choose Save The File Capture Transfer dialogue will be displayed and the capture process will begin immediately If the current Novell username is not defined as being the server an error message Unable to Initialize Input will be displayed and the capture will abort In the File Capture Transfer dialogue the destination directory and filename will be displayed in the Name box in the dialogue The Status of the capture will be displayed and the number of Blocks captured 41 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Function
169. Solid Dash Dotted Short Dash Mix Dash or Dash Dot from the X Grid menu Y Grid Choose None Solid Dash Dotted Short Dash Mix Dash or Dash Dot from the Y Grid menu Border The border around the point value Choose Solid or None from the Border menu The Paris Designer Reference Manual 431 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Choose the Auto Calculate Values checkbox to automatically Calculate calculate the minimum and maximum values on the Y axis and the Values number of ticks required This is extremely useful in dynamic charts where variable data is being used and minimum and maximum values are not known or with a broad data range where the actual minimum and maximum values will be automatically calculated 4f NOTE The Min Max and Ticks boxes will be unavailable if this option is selected Ro eee 00 Re eee rere 0 meae eere mee 7 432 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the General Settings for a Complex Plot Chart Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Border Solid Y Rotate Chart Select the Rotate Chart Checkbox to rotate the chart Border The border around the chart Choose Solid or None from the Border menu TOUR ion 8 Mion 6 Million A Complex Plot Chart The Paris Designer Reference Manual 433 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings SIMPLE BAR CHART Default Chart
170. T 1 USING THE FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR CHAPTER 1 FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR FILE MENU OPENING AN ENVIRONMENT SAVING AN ENVIRONMENT SAVING AN ENVIRONMENT UNDER A NEW NAME RECORDING ENVIRONMENT INFORMATION Recording design information Modifying a Paris Job Ticket Modifying a job ticket for an environment LOADING A SAMPLE OF THE PRINTSTREAM DATA The Paris Designer Reference Manual 20 20 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Contents CAPTURING A SAMPLE OF THE PRINTSTREAM DATA How do I capture a data file from the Serial port How do I capture data from a Novell print queue How do I capture data from an LPD Queue CREATING EDITING MODEL PRINTSTREAM DATA Creating a model of the printstream data Editing a sample of the actual printstream File size in the Edit Data function Using the keyboard in the Edit Data File function Creating a model printstream data file Editing the currently loaded model sample data file Loading a model sample data file into the Edit Data File dialogue PRINTING A PROOF OF THE CURRENT PAGE SELECTING A PRINT DESTINATION 34 35 39 43 45 45 45 45 46 47 49 52 53 54 ADDING MODIFYING AND REMOVING A PRINT DESTINATION Adding a printer Managing Printer Resources Using Barcodes in Paris Physical Page Shift Saving the printer definition Modifying Removing a printer RESET RESOURCES FUNCTION 4 The Paris Designer Reference Manua
171. The attributes and text blocks can be changed e Double click on a text block name to display the View Change Text Block Settings dialogue for the text block e Right mouse click on the text block name to display the Add Edit Delete drop down menu Setting the page definition is described in Chapter 3 of the Paris Designer User s Manual and in Chapter 9 of the same manual the use of page definitions is described including the use of multiple page definitions in an environment View Change Page Definition x r Attributes Page Definition Id Paa Input Tray JAutomatically Select Output Tray Defaut amp Orientation Potato Page Size jae e Width Test Blocks Description Max Lines NumberofE SS i Membership 02 Summary 12 12 iud 3 Travel History 10 7 Edit NA Messane 11 1 Delete Add Delete Cancel 183 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu USING THE VIEW CHANGE PAGE DEFINITION FUNCTION Yi gt Environment menu gt Current Page Definition View Change Page Definition dialogue C ct m Attributes Page Definition Id Paa s Input Tray Defaut Output Tray Default ej Orientation Porat o Page Size a4 Width 2480 Height 3507 Setting the Page Attributes Page Definition Displays the name of the current page definition This field can not b
172. The proof will print from the current input tray Duplex functions will not be honored f NOTE Refer to the following section re selecting the print destination for the proof print gt To print a proof of the current form 1 Load the form to be printed 2 Choose Print from the File menu The form will be sent to the printer selected for your PC The Paris Designer Reference Manual 367 SELECTING A PRINT DESTINATION D c File menu Select Printer C Select Printer dialogue This option is used to select one of the defined print destinations as the current printer All proof prints will be directed to the currently selected printer It is not possible to select more than one printer Print destinations are those output devices connected to the PC running the Paris Designer that have been added to the list of print destinations Print destinations are added via the View Change Printers dialogue refer to Chapter 1 Adding Modifying and Removing a Print Destination A print destination may be a laser printer GDI disk storage archive or fax gt To print to a selected print destination 1 Choose Select Printer from the File menu The Select Printer dialogue will be displayed 2 Choose the required print destination from the list then choose OK Select Printer X Printers Name Accounts eros DocuPmnt N32 PULS EPTT eee Default Generic PCL5 Simplex LPT1 Document Color Canon B
173. The resulting string is assumed to be a valid graphic name including extension but not path If a matching graphic file can be found it is loaded and added to the current page otherwise nothing is added iew Change Graphic x Attributes Source f eda ba Name Field Watermark Active r Current Fields Color Current Value 24 PartK31 AlphaNumeric Properties 25 PartK 32 AlphaNumeric Horizontal Fixed hd 27 Pat 15 AlphaNumeric 28 PartJ16 AlphaNumeric Position 28 Partl1 AlphaNumeric Left 27 5 iew Change Graphic t x Frame Attributes Active Source Select By Field ii width M ESSE Name PartK 33 Alioninffame Hol Rotation Ne e Watermark Active Scale to fit frame pos Color n r Properties Horizontal Fixed Vertical Fixed Position Left 30 0 Top 12 0 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 199 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu To build a chart EA When adding a chart to a page definition the option exists to fill the chart points with constant information or with fields Using Fields to generate a Chart is described in detail in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual As part of a calculation A field s current default and calculated values can be used in another field s calculation string Refer to Field Calculatio
174. This function can provide advanced formatting when outputting a currency value for printing e Use the precision parameter to see the level of accuracy to be displayed e Use the decimal and thousands parameters to achieve localization of output e The negative parameter is only used when the amount to be displayed is negative e To add a currency symbol or text e g US to the result of this function use a operation in the calculation string The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer The EURO Rounding function The EURO Rounding function handles rounding at the level of precision defined by the user For example the EURO Rounding function allows up to a maximum of 6 characters of precision If the result of a EURO conversion has more than the requested number of characters then rounding occurs The EURO Rounding function is used to convert national currencies to and from the Euro The syntax of the function is EURO amount direction rate id precision amount a string containing the amount to convert direction either of the following words TO for conversion from Euros to a national currency FROM for conversion to Euros from a national currency rate id the 3 character national currency identifier e g NLG precision the numb of digits of precision The number must be between 2 and 6 inclusive This returns A string containing the n
175. To Change Color nmm Font une Printer 9 Regular z Text m Position 0 0 Width 0 0 Justify Les z Case Te Upper Case z M Fill Field Options When To Change Across SpecifiedRange First Line I 2 Number of Lines n First Char E Number of Chars Hl ist Test NONE gt 2nd Test Cancel 334 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Converting a national currency to the Euro using the Euro functions gt To fill a field using a calculation string Environment menu and choose Fields from the list to displa the Field List dialogue Open the Field List t X m Current Fields Name Type Curent Value a EuyroGoods Currency EuroVat Currency 0 0 EuroGross Currency 0 0 Linevalue AlphaNum 0 00 LineEuro Currency 0 0 Choose EuroGoods from the list and then click on Edit to display the Add Edit Field dialogue Lastchar AlphaNumeric 0 0 Add Edit Delete Clip Cancel In this example we have entered the calculation string CUR2STR EURO Goods FROM GBP 2 2 FRONT x m Attributes Name EuroGoods Type Currency Index Reset t Page Start Calculate CUR25 TR EURO Goods FR M GBP 2 2 Values l Default fo 0 3 Choose OK to close the Curent 10 0 dialogue gpg ow Cancel The Paris Designer Refe
176. V Implied ENDJOB Ignore Parser Warnings r Runtime Event Modifications Display Modification results in Designer Description Condition Acton Rest Add Edit Delete E Cancel 280 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Adding a Runtime Event Modification Click on the Add button to display the View Change Runtime Event Modifier dialogue View Change Runtime Event Modifier P xj r Description M r Condition s Atleast one condition must be true All of the conditions must be true Edit Delete r Action Apply this action Add new Event s E Add Edit Delete OK Cancel Description Enter a description of the modification to be added in the Description text box Condition s The options At least one condition must be true and All of the conditions must be true are displayed Select the required option The Paris Designer Reference Manual 281 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Adding a condition Click on the Add button to display the View Change Runtime Event Modifier Condition dialogue Event Id 1 Click on the arrow to the right of the Event Id text box to display the pop up menu that lists the DJDE s 2 Choose the required event from the list View Change Runtime Event Modifier Condition x r Condition Condition
177. VENTS USED Change Back Form events are used to change the form on the back of the current page if certain test conditions are met Change Back Form events only apply to Duplex printing jobs 4 NOTE When printing in duplex Duplex Printing must be selected in the Output Settings Refer to The Output Settings Function in Chapter 5 of this manual 504 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Adding a Change Back Form Event View Change Event List LocalTexBlockEvensa To add a Change Back Form event T 1 Select the Events button from the Text Block Settings dialogue to display the 1 Form Selection INVOICE View Change Event List dialogue Change Back Form 2 Choose Change Back Form from the drop down menu then click on the Add button to display the Change Form Event dialogue Change Back Form Event m Description a m Back Form 3 Click on the Change To Change T o button to display the Select Enter File To Load Tests FRM dialogue listing the 1st Test JNONE 2nd Test forms in your system caros The Paris Designer Reference Manual 505 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings 506 Look in Fim E3 ie AUTOSAVE MS FRONT FRM Ba AUTOSAVE MYNEW FRM a MS CMNT FRM ge CHART FRM ja MS FOR M 4 Choose the required form from the FILECOPY FRM e MS FORM2 FRM li
178. VU C System menu gt Preview m C Alt V El gt Preview The Preview option allows you to preview the currently displayed document to see how it will look when printed This preview is useful when proofing a document with color added In the Environment Editor environment elements are displayed in BLACK and form elements are displayed in BLUE Choosing the Preview option switches this off and any other of the Designer system colors The document is displayed as it will print with any colors that have been added on view While in Preview mode all edit functions are disabled however you can use the Page tools to page through the document To choose the Preview option choose the Preview button from the Files Bar OR the Preview option from the System menu OR the Alt V keys To cancel the Preview option choose the Preview button or option again or press Alt V to return to editing mode f NOTE Any colors that have been added to the environment or form can only be seen in Preview mode 100 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 3 gt View gt Tools FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR VIEW AND TOOLS MENUS VIEW MENU The options in the in the View menu are Files Bar Tools Bar Settings Bar Status Bar Info View Selecting an option will display the toolbar or Info View Deselecting the option will remove the toolbar or Info View dialogue from view The Settings Bar option is activated when an E
179. a The Paris system also allows dual currency printing on a network thus providing businesses with the opportunity to bill customers in both the contracted currency and the national currency of the customer at the current conversion rate Conversion rates for the European Monetary Union countries are fixed For the participating European Monetary Union countries the fixed conversion rates as determined by the European Central Bank ECB are supplied within the Paris Euro Rates utility For other non participating countries with variable currency rates the Euro Rates Utility offers the ability to define edit and delete their own conversion rate The Euro Rates utility is available in both the Paris Designer and the Paris Spooler where the fixed Euro rates can be viewed and variable currency rates can be added and or edited EURO RATES FIELDS AND EVENTS In the Paris Designer the Euro Rates utility is used in conjunction with the Field and Event utilities Euro Rates Fields and Calculation Strings For currency conversions to and from the Euro fields are added to an environment and their values filled using a calculation string The calculation string will contain one or more of the EURO functions specifically created for currency and Euro conversions Euro Rates Fields and local text block Data Change events For those fields related to currency conversions such as sub totals VAT and totals the values are filled with relevan
180. a condition in the printstream data In these cases the originating application must include these explicit commands or Runtime Events Runtime Events xj Options IV Events are Active Offset fo Skip 5 Text XLP Save Text As EBCDIC v Implied ENDJOB Ignore Parser Warnings Runtime Event Modifications Display Modification results in Designer Description _ Condition Action Resuit Add Delete Cancel 271 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu W 272 HAT IS A RUNTIME EVENT A Runtime event is a command sequence embedded in the printstream data and is made up of a runtime event marker the default value is XLP and runtime event command Before the system can recognize a Runtime event the runtime event marker has to appear in the printstream followed by the runtime event command This requires some re programming of the printstream data s application For example the following command sequence will change the environment XLP ENV INVOICE END ji Terminator f NOTE A runtime event called FEATURE name type is available in the Paris system This is a page based event and will apply at the next page boundary Refer to Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu CEP DJDE COMPATIBILITY The Paris Runtime eve
181. a from a serial port except that a Novell queue is selected f NOTE 1 It is recommended that you dedicate a Test queue for Design Capture purposes 2 So that Paris can input from a Novell queue the current User name must be defined as the Server In most cases the production print queue will be defined with the Spooler s user as the server Refer to Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris gt To capture data from a Novell print queue 1 Choose the Capture Data option from the Data sub menu The Select Input Source for Data Capture dialogue will be displayed Select Input Source For Data x r Input Type Type Serial Port COM4 Settings Cancel 39 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu 2 Select the required Novell print queue from the drop down menu If present a list of queued print files will be displayed If a queue is selected that does not have the current Novell username as the server an error Unable to initialize input will be encountered 4f NOTE Novell print queues will only be displayed if you have the Novell client 32 bit netware on your PC Paris will automatically detect available Novell queues If none are detected the only option available in the drop down menu will be Serial Port and LPD Select Input Source For Data Ce X Input Type 3
182. a pagedef event or DJDE to select paper from the upper tray On a Xerox Docuprint printer the user selects Upper to select paper from any tray that meets the mapping for Upper Selecting the Media Mapping button in the View Change Printer dialogue will display the View Change Media Mappings dialogue and the table of mappings for the environments in your Paris system Resources Selecting the Media Mapping button will display Id 2 Update the View Change Media eset Never Y Mappings dialogue Each user defined Docuprint printer has its own table of mappings Within this table there is a default environment mapping other which applies to any environment that does not have a specific mapping r Current Environment Mappings Click on the Add button to display the View Change Environment Mapping dialogue to add the mapping for a tray dd Edit Delete Cancel The mapping is added for a tray in an environment by selecting the Add button to display the View Change Environment Mapping dialogue 564 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function Adding the mapping for a tray in an environment The View Change Environment Mapping dialogue will display a table of the default mapping and user defined mappings for selected environments Click on the Browse button to select the environment to be Settings mapped
183. able if you have previously switched to the Form Editor from the Environment Editor It is not available if you have opened the Form Editor directly from the Paris Designer program group When you choose the Switch option from the System menu a dialogue box requesting confirmation will be displayed Pars x Switch To Editing Environment i Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 377 PREVIEWING A DOCUMENT BEFORE PRINTING VU C System menu gt Preview m C Alt V The Preview option allows you to preview the currently displayed document to see how it will look when printed This preview is useful when proofing a document with color added When in the Form Editor elements added in the Form Editor are displayed in BLACK and if you have switched from the Environment Editor elements that have been added in the Environment Editor are displayed in BLUE Choosing the Preview option switches off this and any other of the Designer system colors The document is displayed as it will print with any colors that have been added on view While in Preview mode all edit functions are disabled To cancel the Preview option choose Preview again or press Alt V to return to editing mode 378 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 12 gt View FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR VIEW MENU The functions in the View menu are used to display the toolbars The options available are Files Bar Tools Bar Settings B
184. ack of page Head to Head Duplex Invert Prints front and back when the back page is upside down Head to Tail Duplex 9700 Converts output to be compatible with Xerox CEP and allow Compatible natural duplexing which is head to head in portrait orientation and head to tail in landscape orientation The Paris Designer Reference Manual 175 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Page Shift Front Along Long Edge Along Short Edge Back Along Short Edge Along Short Edge 176 Adjusts the printer image in relation to the sides of the page for example to allow for encroachments on the page such as hole punching or when printing onto pre printed stationery Page Shift applies to front and back pages and to form and variable data and is specified in dots per inch dpi There are 300 dots per inch so a value of 1 placed in a field would move the image 1 300th of an inch A value of 300 1 inch Specify a positive value to move down the page and a negative value to move up the page f NOTE Page Shift is fully functional in PCL and PostScript and is activated in the Output Settings dialogue when a duplex printing option is chosen A value entered in either or each of the Front text fields moves the image accordingly on the front page along the long and or short edge If you are printing in Duplex on both sides of the paper a value entered in either or each of the Back text fields moves the ima
185. add a currency value Select Euro Access Level 1 X 1 Open the Utilities menu and select Euro Rates to display the Select Euro Access Level View Conversion Rates View Conversion Rates dialogue Choose View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates from the drop down menu The Password Text box will be activated View Fixed Rates Edit Varnable Rates 2 Edit Any Rate Cancel Enter the password then choose OK Select Euro Access Level x dialogue will be View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates displayed The default password is Operator PEET but this should be 5 Password Change changed to one of your own choosing Refer to the previous section Cancel The View Change Euro Conversion Rate Set New Password The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer 4 Enter the required Currency Id A Description and the r Conversion Rate current Euro exchange rate for the currency in a Currency Id GBP the appropriate text boxes For a list of Description Pound Sterling currency Id s refer to the table beginning on gms page 304 Rate 0 6738 view Change Euro Conversion Rate x The Date Set will be Date Set 05 01 2001 displayed as the current day according to the 5 Verif fi system settings of your y PC The Verify box contains the default number 1 and is the number of days
186. added it will contain the next portion of data in the printstream Adding a Text Block is described in Chapter 3 of the Paris Designer User s Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 185 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Delete Selecting a text block then the Delete button will display a message box requesting confirmation of the deletion x 1 Delete This Text Block If the deletion is confirmed the text block will be deleted and the printstream data will flow to the next text block 6 WARNING Care must be taken when deleting a text block as this will affect all subsequent text blocks Refer to Deleting a Text Block in the Paris Designer User s Manual Selecting a text block then the Edit button will display the View Change Text Block Settings dialogue for the text block Refer to Creating Text Blocks in the Paris Designer User s Manual 186 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE FIELDS FUNCTION Paris uses the concept of Fields to allow the user to achieve a wide variety of data manipulations Basically a Field is a user defined container that holds information The steps to creating a field the container are e Define the Field that is describe the container Name the field Assign the field type Add the field to the Field List e Fill the Field fill the container Set the Field Value by filling the field with static or extracted text FIELD VALUE
187. after It is also possible to space before and after but this is rare and would result in double line spacing Before printing the current line Space 1 line Select Before printing the current line checkbox and the Space 1 line radio button if you wish to space down one line before printing the current line After printing the current line Space 1 line Select After printing the current line checkbox and the Space 1 line radio button if you wish to space down one line after printing the current line The Paris Designer Reference Manual 125 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Using the Skip option Before and After Printing The Skip option can be used to skip to the next logical page or the next physical page before or after the current line is printed Refer to the section With a form feed character how and when do I use the Skip option on page 117 NOTE In most cases you will need to skip to the new page after printing the current line Before printing the current line Skip to channel 1 Select the Line End and Before printing checkboxes and the Skip radio button if you wish to skip to the next logical page before printing the current line After printing the current line Skip to channel 1 Select the Line End and After printing checkboxes and the Skip radio button if you wish to skip to the new page after printing the current line For example Selecting the spacing opti
188. age The Paris Designer Reference Manual 549 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard i X Objects Clipboard Copy gt gt Month 4 Month 5 Month 5 All None Delete 5 Click on the All button to select all the fields then click on the lt lt Copy button to copy the fields to the Objects list As we are copying fields within an environment and the fields name already exists a warning dialogue will be displayed Click on the OK button to display the Enter New Name Enter New Name x dialogue Value to Test for The name of the first field being copied will be displayed Month 1 in the dialogue Enter the new name for the field and click on OK As we are copying more than one field with an existing Enter New Name x name the warning dialogue i will again be displayed Value to Test for Month A Cancel 550 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Warning Xt fe i Name Already Exists Enter new Name Click on OK to display the Enter New Name dialogue Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for each subsequent field being copied Internal Clipboard Objects r Clipboard Zopy Month 5 AE All None All None Delete 9 Onceall the fields have been copied choose the Delete button to delete the fields
189. al Justify Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings Left Select to align text to the left side of the frame Right Select to align text to the right side of the frame Frame will be automatically activated Center Select to center text on the vertical axis of the frame Frame will be automatically activated Full Text Aligns to both margins by stretching text lines where necessary NOTE Inter word justification only Frame and Word Wrap will be automatically activated NOTE Horizontal and Vertical Justification do not work unless the Frame checkbox is active Vertical justify aligns text to the Top Bottom or Center of the text frame Top Select to align text to the top of the frame Bottom Select to align text to the bottom of the frame Frame will be automatically activated Center Select to center text on the vertical axis of the frame Frame will be automatically activated The Paris Designer Reference Manual 389 Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings SETTING THE PROPERTIES FOR A DYNAMIC TEXT ELEMENT m Properties Horizontal Fired E Vertical Fired X Horizontal and Vertical the Horizontal and Vertical fields set the properties of a dynamic text element to Fixed Float or Resize Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Graphic Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual 390 The Paris Designer Reference Manual
190. al 113 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu W hat is done about page ends form feeds Carriage return and line feed functions are important because they define the basic unit of data for the Paris Designer that is a line A collection of lines forms a page which in turn needs to be terminated To achieve this and to make print data more efficient many systems make use of a third special character to terminate pages a form feed What are form feeds 114 In simple terms form feeds are just a super line feed and are usually employed as a replacement of the line feed in a carriage return line feed pair Therefore the last line on a page is quite often terminated with a carriage return form feed pair of bytes Form feeds are not as vital as carriage return and line feed functions because most pages are terminated after a given amount of lines for example 66 lines per page However this implied page end becomes inefficient in cases where only a few lines are to be printed on a given page and to make up the 66 required lines a set of blank lines a series of carriage returns and line feeds with no characters on them will need to be sent Some print files use form feeds while others rely on a fixed number of lines to achieve page ends If your data does make use of form feeds you will need to make sure that your input filter is set correctly refer to the section The Input Filter Function on page 109 The Pa
191. al for instructions on adding and filling fields 6 Choose OK to return to the Environment Editor The inserted field will be displayed in the text block 7 Click on the Right mouse button to exit Edit mode f NOTE An alternative method of inserting a field into a text block can also be applied to a Data Change event This is described on the following page 484 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Inserting a field into a text block Method 2 gt To insert a field s value 1 Select the Edit tool then click on the required text block and place the cursor at the position for insertion of the field 2 Press Ctl F to display the Data Change Event dialogue The selected position will be displayed At Specified Position and the First Line and First Char 3 Select the Text checkbox then click in the adjacent box to place the cursor 4 Enter the text string in the EXACT format fieldname This inserts the field s contents For example if you had created a field named AccntNum you would enter AccntNum Data Change Event x What To Change Color Palette Font Line Printer 9 Regular M Text t amp ccntN um Position Width 0 0 Justify Left E Cae To Upper Case v FilField ptione When To Change First Line E Number of Lines NM First Char 12 Number of Chars 59 Tees NONE z ees
192. alogue Once a printer has been defined and saved Paris creates an XDD file in the PARIS PRT directory 88 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu MODIFYING REMOVING A PRINTER The attributes of an existing printer definition can be changed or the printer definition can be removed 4f NOTE Changes in the Designer to printer attributes take effect immediately however they will not appear in the Spooler unless it is closed and restarted In the same way changes in the Designer or Spooler do not take effect unless the Engine is closed and restarted This does not apply when adding a new printer definition gt To modify remove a printer Select Modify Printers from the File menu to display the View Change Printers dialogue View Change Printers i x Printers Name Type Output Accounts Xerox DocuPrint N32 PELS LPT1 Default Generic PCL5 Simplex LPT1 Document Color Canon BubbleJet BJC 7000 LPT1 Marketing L3 Xerox NPS4850 LPT1 Sales Dept Generic PCL5 amp 3 Duplex LPT1 Add Settings Remove 89 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Modifying a printer The settings for an existing print destination can be modified gt To modify a printer 1 Either Double click on the printer to be modified Or Right mouse click on the printer to be modified then choose Sett
193. alogue View Change Event List x m Local Text Block Events Type PL Data Change ap ay A P HE Add Data Change E dit Delete Clip From the View Change Event List dialogue Choose Data Change from the drop down menu then click on the Add button to display the Data Change Event dialogue By using the Ctl F keys Use the Edit tool to place the cursor in the text block at the position where the event is to be added this will be displayed in the Status Bar Press Ctl F The Data Change Event dialogue will be displayed The Paris Designer Reference Manual 473 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings What can be changed with a Data Change event The color font text tab and column position and case of data can be changed by the use of a Data Change event as well as the field This is achieved by choosing the required What To Change option from the Data Change Event dialogue If more than one What To Change option is to be applied to selected data the same position and range etc each option does not have to be applied as individual Data Change Events but can be applied in the one event For example if the Color Text and Case of selected data is to be changed it can be done in the one event Refer to the example on page 493 To have the required tab position or column position and width appear in the Data Change Event dialogue when it is displayed use the
194. an be 0 and if so no movement will be made The Paris Designer Reference Manual 155 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining the channel number to skip to for the PCC byte Using PCC bytes it is possible to define a particular channel or line number to which a particular PCC byte value is to Skip Any channel number can be used however Channel 1 is normally reserved as the Skip to Line 1 channel It is possible to specify more than one line number to a particular channel Assigning multiple line numbers to a channel can be useful as shown in the example below For example You want to be able to skip to 4 particular line locations within a single text block The four lines are Line 1 6 31 and 46 To skip to each line you dedicate a PCC byte value of 2 to Skip then select Channel 4 and define the four line numbers 1 16 31 and 46 as follows PCC Assignments Char Before Pi ane 4 PUL Attributes Before printing Skip to channel C Space lines v Print the current line After printing Display Literal Skip to channel Space lines 1 ANSI PCC M Channel Assignments table has been Channels Lines loaded and PCC 2 Channel 4 byte value 2 is is entered in Add line selected the Skip to channel field Delete line 4 To add the line values Apply the Before printing options of
195. and added to the Current Value If the field type is Alphanumeric the extracted data is appended to the end of the Current Value For example On your page you have a number of text blocks each containing details of funds transactions In the same line and position in each text block there is a field Amount which contains the amount of the funds A Page Para Increment Field event is used to fill the Current Value of the Amount field Each time the Amount field occurs in the same line and position in each text block the Current Value of the field will be incremented with the contents of the previous Amount field with the last Amoun field on the page containing the total amount f NOTE Page Para Update Field Events can be added to an environment once the necessary fields have been added to the Field List Refer to Creating and Filling a field in the Paris Designer User s Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING A PAGE PARA UPDATE FIELD EVENT VO gt Events menu gt Page Para gt Update Field gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue selecting Update Field from the drop down menu then the Add button will display the Update Field Event dialogue Update Field Event r Description Options Field Update Fi First Line 1 Num Lines fi First Char 1 Num Chars 255 Description Enter a
196. ange Text Settings dialogue 519 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function Palette Options X Save Palette Custom Palette LOAD PALETTE Clicking on Load Palette displays the list of color palettes available in the Env directory in the Paris system Look in d Enw e E ja Blue pal a Red pal Blushade pal Redshade pal ae Default pal Open Files of type Colo Palettes pal x Cancel 520 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function SAVE PALETTE Clicking on Save Palette displays the Save File As dialogue to save a palette Save in C3 Env e E 2 Blue pal st Red pal a Blushade pal Redshade pal a Default pal Alxl File name default pal Save as type Color Palettes pal Cancel CUSTOM PALETTE Clicking on Custom Palette displays the full Color Palette for the addition and mixing of colors Color 5 colors EII NI MES r rmmm ERE ee ie ee g BEE EEE ee EERE NM Custom colors i feo Red 0 m Frrmmmmm d mW Define Custom Colors gt gt ColorlSolid Lum o Blue o Cancel Add to Custom Colors The Paris Designer Reference Manual 521 Chapter 22 The Color Palette function WHAT COLOR PALETTES ARE AVAILABLE W 522 As well as the default color palette Default Pal Paris Designer offers Blu
197. ant 5 Operators x Constant Funenon NUM F1 F2 5 n Field names e All calculation strings are executed in strict left to right gt order e Brackets must appear around a function s parameter list e Brackets can also be used to create an embedded calculation string Any series of operands and operators surrounded by brackets is treated as a separate calculation string and will be executed to determine the value of the embedded string For example the string F1 NUM EF2 F3 is a calculation string containing the embedded string NUM F2 F3 This embedded string is executed and a value produced This value is then added to the current value of the field F1 to produce the final value f NOTE For many functions a parameter can also be an embedded string for example NUM F1 F2 202 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Operators In any calculation string each operand constants field names and functions must be separated from the next by an operator unless there is only one 1 Starting from the left side of the string the combination of a pair of operands and the separating operator is evaluated and the resulting value used as the first operand for the next operator For example F1 NUM F2 5 isa calculation string in which the first operand is a field name F1 and the second is a function call NUM EF2 The operator means
198. ar m Status Bar Selecting an option will display the toolbar Deselecting the option will remove the toolbar from view Paris Form Editor MS FRONT E ni x File System View Tools TextEditing Help C mp Ld v Files Bar amp amp m gm v Tools Bar v Settings Bar v Status Bar OBAL AIRLINES Brian J Goodman Your MileSaver Membership number 1345 Elmore Stree Newhampton Victoria Australia 90567 Your Global Airline Account number 4 ANH O aw ilr Ad cv PI XAN Arial 10 Regular 5 0 Ipi JA Al sa Current Printer Document Color Page 1n y The Paris Designer Reference Manual 379 CHAPTER 13 gt Tools FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR TOOLS MENU The options in the Tools menu produce the same editing tools as the buttons in the Tools Bar The options offer both mouse and control key activation of the tools e Selecting a tool option from the Tools menu activates the tool this will also be indicated in the Tools Bar if displayed e Selecting a tool then selecting the Settings button will display the Default Settings dialogue for selected tool Each tool s Default Settings and View Change Settings dialogue is explained in Part Three of this manual The use of the tools to add static form elements is explained in Chapter 11 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Paris Form Editor MS FRONT Oj x File System View Tools Text Editing Help m d Add text
199. aris Designer Help is based on the standard Windows Help format To display the Help Either Press F1 Or e Select the Contents tab from the Help menu to display the Contents page of Paris Designer Help e Select the Index tab to display the Index for the Help topics e Select the Find tab to use the Setup Find Wizard About the Paris Designer V c Help menu gt About To check the version of the Paris Designer that you are currently using choose About from the Help menu x Ray Designer Environment Editor Version 3 0 build 45 Copyright c 1995 2000 LPrint System Info Total Physical Memory 261424 KB Total Disk Space 2288424 KB Free on C 352 The Paris Designer Reference Manual PART TWO USING THE FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR IN THIS PART CHAPTER 10 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR FILE MENU CHAPTER 11 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR SYSTEM MENU CHAPTER 12 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR VIEW MENU CHAPTER 13 FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR TOOLS MENU PART TWO USING THE FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR The Form Editor is introduced to you in Chapter 4 of the Paris Designer User s Manual and described in detail in Chapter 11 of the same manual Part Two of this manual takes you through each of the functions in the Form Editor s menus The use of each function is explained and illustrated as are any associated dialogues Paris Form Editor New Form 15 x File System View Tools Text Edi
200. aris Designer Reference Manual 147 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu WHAT ARE PCC BYTES Printer Carriage Control PCC bytes date back to early impact printer days when to add extra control to the vertical positioning of the print head an extra byte was added to the start of every print line This was usually a function of the spooling system and was generally transparent to the user or programmer How do PCC bytes work As mentioned above they are a special byte that is placed at the start of each print line They are generally interpreted but not printed The printer or in this case Paris is programmed to react to different values in a particular way There are essentially only two general types of action that can be performed e The print position can be made to space a given number of lines down the page in reaction to a given value or e The print position could skip to a given line number in reaction to another value Spaces and skips can only act vertically and downward however it is possible to space zero lines to maintain the current print position How are the actions for a PCC byte defined The actions for a PCC byte are defined in a table of PCC values and associated actions It is possible to create your own table however certain standard PCC Tables are supplied The most common table of PCC byte values and actions is that created by the American National Standards Institute ANSI This
201. aris system residing in an ASCII environment would normally expect the data to arrive in the ASCII format However in some cases there may be no automatic translation and the Paris Designer will be required to perform the task You may also find that there are variances within the encoding system standards in which case the Paris Designer may be required to compensate the Translation Table will be required A Translation Table performs the translation of one byte value to another Two standard Translation Tables are supplied with the Paris Designer ASCILTLT and EBCDIC TLT It must be noted that translations are performed on single bytes only The Paris Designer Reference Manual 131 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu WHAT ARE THE TRANSLATION TABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE PARIS DESIGNER The standard Translation Tables supplied with the Paris Designer are ASCILTLT and EBCDIC TLT Both tables can be loaded modified and saved as new tables by using the Load and Save functions in the Translation Table dialogue Look in C3 Env et File name Ascitt Files of type rir Cancel The ASCII translation table The ASCII table is a straight through table By default each input value is equal to its output value This table should be used for any ASCII printstreams iew Change Translation Table x r Character encodings Double click in the Dutput Char column to change a translation code
202. ata Change Update Field Change Form Choose Data Change from the drop down menu then click on the Add button to display the Data Change Event dialogue Data Change Event What To Change Color Font Line Printer 8 Regular Tex Position 0 0 Width 0 0 Justify s Case ToUpperCase v Fill Field Options gt When To Change Across Specified Rane J First Line s Number of Lines n First Char ot Number of Chars 0 Tst Test moNE v 2ndTest Cancel r Description The Paris Designer Reference Manual 481 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Description r Description Enter a description of the event What To Change Color pamm Font Line Printer 3 Regular PIS d pm Position oo Width 0 0 Justify e z Case To Upper Case v What To Change FilField Option To change the color of selected data select the Color checkbox then click on the Color Selector to display the standard Color Palette The function of this dialogue is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer Select the Font checkbox to activate the drop down menu Select the required font from the menu If the required font is not in the Font List it can be added Refer to Adding Fonts to the Font List on page 573 Select the Text checkbox to activate the Text field Enter the text required to overprint th
203. ate device specific features such as stapling binding collating and so on For more information refer to Appendix D Device Specific Features in the Paris System Defining the Copies Options m Copies Number of Copies 1 Collate On Page Boundaries Copy Sensitive Processing Required The Copies options allow you to specify the number of copies and the type of collation required within the environment When selecting the number of copies to be processed either the Engine or the printer can handle the copy request depending on the collation and copy sensitive options selected Number of Copies The number of copies required is entered in the Number of Copies text box 180 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Collate on Page Boundaries Collate on Report Boundaries Collate on File Boundaries Copy Sensitive Processing Required Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu This is the same as the Xerox CEP Uncollated option Basically a copy count of 3 will cause the final output to contain 3 copies of page 1 followed by 3 copies of page 2 and so on This is the same as the Xerox CEP Collated option A copy count of 3 will cause all the pages of the first report to be printed followed by a 2 copy of all the pages followed by a 3 copy Then the second report will be printed This type of collation prints the entire input file regardless of whether it contains logical report
204. ather than the output device must handle all copy requests This applies no matter what collate option is selected Turning on Copy Sensitive Processing Required means that the collation option has no effect on where the copy request is handled it is always handled by the Engine For example if 3 copies are required the input file will be processed 3 times and 3 times as much output data will be generated Because of the potential for a huge increase in the processing time and the size of output the default setting for Copy Sensitive Processing Required is OFF It should only be turned on when necessary Any DJDE command that has a copy sensitive element will now be applied only to the copies that it relates to If this option is OFF all DJDEs are applied to all copies Selecting Copy Sensitive Processing when the Collate option is set to Collate on Page Boundaries causes the Engine to reprocess each input page x times However copy sensitive DJDE s will not be applied WARNING The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu HOW DO THE COLLATE COPY SENSITIVE OPTIONS AFFECT PROCESSING The following table details the combinations of the various collate copy sensitive options and how it affects the processing Options Copies Handled by Copy Sensitive Page Collate ngine DJDE Copy Sensitive commands are No Copy Sensitive File Collate utput Device if copy capable oth
205. ature JobCode Binding 1 binding setpagedevice 4 Page Preamble The user code will be inserted at the end of the page preamble This hook is used with events only Example XPDFeature Page Binding 1 binding setpagedevice 596 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris How the feature is referred to in the output stream It is important to note that the type of feature XJT JobComment JobCode or Page refers to the position of the feature in the output stream not the contents For example it is possible to insert any comment into the output stream using the JobCode or Page feature hooks or to add valid PostScript code to the JobTicket or Comment portions of the output stream using the XJT or JobComment hooks It is the user s responsibility to ensure the device will accept the code inserted by any hook as valid Paris does not read or validate the feature code at all Selecting a Device Specific feature The XPD supplies a pool of possible features to the Paris PostScript driver f NOTE You must have the XPD with the added entries loaded to see the Device Specific Features in the Environment Editor View Change Output Settings dialogue The Device must be using that XPD and must be added to the printers list There are 3 options available to select which features should be included in a given job 1 Environment Output 2 Environment Events 3 Runtime Events The Paris
206. ault Chart Settings x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Style fi AA T Let 0 0 Width 0 0 T op 0 0 Height 0 0 Horizontal Property Fixed b Vertical Property Fixed Use Default Chart Attributes Defining the Attributes for a Complex Plot Chart Complex Plot Chart f NOTE The unit of measurement for the position is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu 424 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Horizontal and Vertical Use Default Chart Attributes Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings The Horizontal and Vertical properties of dynamic chart elements can be set to Float or Resize according to data in the linked text block These options do not appear in the Default or View Change dialogues in the Form Editor Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual If you are printing to a color printer and wish to print the chart in color check the Use Default Chart Attributes checkbox When you add the chart it will be displayed in color f NOTE You cannot change the default color settings The Paris Designer Reference Manual 425 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Data to a Complex Plot Chart Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Labets Headings Legend Axis General Field Field E 53 Set1 Sydney Ero 40 0 Public
207. button from the dialogue In the View Change Event List dialogue that is displayed the type of event to be added is then selected from the drop down menu The types of Local Text Block events are Data Change events Update Field events Change Form events Change Back Form events Select Device Features events see NOTE below f NOTE Select Device Features events are specific events that allow the user to insert code to activate device specific features such as stapling binding collating folding and so on The use of these events requires a thorough understanding of the workings of PostScript commands including the manual editing of XPD files the use of syntax and so on Refer to Appendix D Device Specific Features in the Paris System of this manual 472 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings How ARE DATA CHANGE EVENTS USED Data Change events are extremely useful in the design of an environment and can be used to change the color font text tabs columns and letter case of selected data within a text block Where and when the selected data is to be changed can also be determined How is a Data Change Event added A Data Change event can be added 1 From the View Change Event List dialogue which is displayed by selecting the Events button from a Text Block Settings dialogue or 2 By placing the cursor in a text block and pressing Ctl F to display the Data Change Event di
208. c PCL5 Duplex Xerox 4220 LPS 2013 115 Adobe A gt FA Xerox 4900 PostScript FA Adobe Default Printer 38 Microsoft Fax 38 Rendering Subsystem HP Symbol Windows Symbol yl p gt How is the Printer Type List created 58 When you add a print destination to Paris the printer type is selected from a list of printer output device drivers in the Type drop down menu The printer drivers in the list vary according to the configuration of the PC on which Paris is running The printers displayed in the list are a result of two searches the software performs 1 The software checks the PARIS PRT directory to see what XPD XLPrint Printer Description files are present 2 The software queries Windows as to what printer or device drivers have been loaded This allows the Spooler to format for any Windows GDI supported device for example Fax drivers or PDF drivers The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu What are XPD Files 59 XPD files are the way Paris describes the features of the printer They work either as standalone files in the case of HP PCL printers or in combination with PPD Postscript Printer Description files in the case of Adobe Postscript printers In general terms XPD files are created and supplied by your distributor PPD files are those files supplied by the Printer manufacturer An XPD for a PostScript printer simply contains a re
209. cel To add the mapping for a tray click on the Add button to display the View Change Media Mapping dialogue 566 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function Mapping the tray s The Media drop down menu displays all the available tray assignments in Paris Media It is recommended to only use the Upper Lower Middle and Tray4 selections Size The Size values are entered in points NOT dots These values can be found in the page size section of the PPD for the printer to which you are printing The values are entered as they appear in the PPD that is width then height For example For letter size on a 4890NPS you would enter 612 792 no brackets with a single space between the two values gt To map a tray 1 Select the required Media and enter the Color Weight Type and Size values into the appropriate edit box 2 Choose OK The added tray mapping will be displayed in the View Change Environment Mapping dialogue View Change Media Mappi Settings Media Upper x Color White Weight 7 Settings Type Pin Environment MYNEW BIER Size View Change Environment Mapping PEETS Any E olor any Wi eiaht any Type i Upper White 75 Plain Any Size ie Add Edit Delete Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 567 Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Func
210. chart the Data column will display Slice 1 Slice 2 and so on for each added pie Remove Slice Click on the Remove Slice button to remove a slice of pie from the set The last added slice will be removed from all sets Add Set Click on the Add Set button to add a set pie Each set added will have the same number of slices and labels as the first set Only the Values for each slice will need to be added Remove Set Click on the Remove Set button to remove a set pie The last added set will be removed Attributes If you have chosen to display the chart in color you do not need to Fill define the fill attributes The attributes for each set can be defined as the style of fill required Light Horz stripe Diag hatched Horizontal Medium Vert stripe Cross hatched Vertical Heavy 45 stripe Forward diagonal Cross None 135 stripe Back diagonal Diagonal Cross Solid Choose a different fill for each set f NOTE If only one set has been added to the pie chart the attributes will be displayed as Slice 1 Slice 2 and so on 456 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Labels to a Pie Chart Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend General Border None z Rotate None M Apply Show Data Click on the Show Data Labels checkbox to show the data values Labels at each slice of pie in the set Border The data label border Choose Solid or None from
211. command will be inserted into the Calculate edit box of the Add Edit Field dialogue when OK is selected Field Calculations E X r Calculations Function Description Str name of field Return the current value of a field as a string NUM Num name of Field Return the current value of a field as a floating point number RND Rind name of field Return the current value of a field as a whole number IF If conditon result1 result2 Calculate 2 results use condition to determine which result to returr DEF Def name of field Return the default value of a field SET Set name of field value Set the current value of a field CUR Cur name of field Return the current value of a field without calculation CASE Lase sting CASE UIPPERICASE LOWERICASE TITLE Change the case of a string STRIP Strip stingSS TRIP STARTISTRIP END Remove Spaces from a string Amt strina AMT FULL Return the current value as an amount The Paris Designer Reference Manual 201 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu The Calculation String A calculation string is made up of one or more operands separated by operators Operands are made up of functions field names and constants All calculations are made up of these four basic building blocks For example the calculation string NUM F1 F2 5 consists of a function NUM the operators and the field names F1 and F2 and the const
212. ct Input Tray event 264 THE PAGE PARA SELECT OUTPUT TRAY EVENT FUNCTION 265 Adding a Select Output Tray event 265 THE PAGE PARA UPDATE FIELD EVENT FUNCTION 266 Adding a Page Para Update Field event 267 THE PAGE PARA SELECT DEVICE FEATURES EVENT FUNCTION 268 THE PAGE PARA PAGE SUPPRESS EVENT FUNCTION 269 Adding a Page Suppress event 270 RUNTIME EVENTS 271 What is a Runtime event 272 CEP DJDE compatibility 273 How do Runtime events differ from other input events 274 Why are Runtime events used 275 How are embedded Runtime events activated 277 Using the Runtime Event Modifications option 280 ENVIRONMENT CHANGE EVENTS 285 Packing the Environment Change event list 286 Adding an Environment Change Event 287 Editing an Environment Change Event 288 10 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 8 FUNCTIONS IN THE UTILITIES MENU THE RESOURCE MANAGER How does Resource Packing work Packing Resources Setting the Packer Options Packing Files Unpacking Resources Resource Manager FAQs and Troubleshooting FONT REFERENCE UTILITY Using the Font Reference Utility EURO RATES UTILITY Euro Rates Fields and Events Access levels in the Euro Rates utility EURO FUNCTIONS IN THE PARIS DESIGNER USING THE EURO RATES UTILITY AND EURO FUNCTIONS Adding a currency value to the Euro Rates table Adding fields to the field list for use in currency conversion ISO 4217 Currency Codes CHAPTER 9 FUNCTIONS IN THE HELP MENU Tip
213. ctions in the Events menu CHANGE OUTPUT EVENT LIST EVENT i c Events menu gt Page Para gt Change Output Event List gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue select Change Page Definition from the drop down menu then the Add button to display the Change Event List Event dialogue Description Change To None And Or 2 Test Change Event List Event x Description r Event List Change To r Tests 1st Test JNONE nd Test Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list Select this button to display the Select Event List dialogue Select the required event list internal or external then the Add button to display the event list file in the Change To field in the Change Event List Event dialogue Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue to set up the test conditions for the Change Output Event List event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the oM Test button A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do I use two tests The Paris Designer Reference Manual 255 THE PAGE PARA END CURRENT PAGE EVENT FUNCTION An End Current Page event is used to end the
214. cts Clipboard Zapy Fill Field Month Fill Field Month2 AJ None Delete Fill Field Month3 Fill Field Month4 Fill Field Month5 Fill Field Month6 Data ChangeT ext Zep Hone All the events in the text block s Event List will be displayed in the Objects section of the Internal Clipboard dialogue Internal Clipboard Objects Clipboard Fill Field Month Copy Data ChangeT ext Fill Field Month2 Fill Field Month3 Fill Field Month4 Fill Field Month5 Fill Field Month6 All None Delete Click on the event 5 Click on the Copy gt gt button The event will be copied to the Clipboard section of the dialogue 6 Click on the Exit button to return to the View Change Event List dialogue then return to the Environment Editor 544 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function COPYING LOCAL TEXT BLOCK EVENTS FROM THE CLIPBOARD An event can be copied from the Clipboard to the required destination then if necessary the copied event can be quickly edited gt To copy a Local Text Block event from the Clipboard 1 Display the View Change Event List dialogue for the text block to which the event is to be copied View Change Event List x r Local Text Block Events Type Options Description 1 Data Change Position Column 1 2 Data Change Position Column 2 3 Data Chang
215. current page under certain test conditions When the test conditions are met the current page will end and subsequent printstream data will continue on the next page The End Current Page event is a useful Paris feature that provides additional control over the final output It is equivalent to the RPAGE command for Xerox centralized printers This event provides two levels of control 1 It adds an extra level of control over pagination page starting at line 1 over and above PCC bytes and page eject characters in the data 2 It provides a method for duplex applications where on encountering a certain condition you can control on which side of the page you print If the incoming data file does not contain PCC or page eject HEX OC characters and is not a fixed number of lines per page it would normally be almost impossible to achieve sensible pagination Using an End Current Page event providing there is a constant field to test on you can achieve the desired pagination f NOTE A Page Para End Current Page Event is equivalent to an RPAGE in Xerox CEP JSL The Paris Designer Reference Manual 256 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu How WOULD l USE AN END CURRENT PAGE EVENT When End Current Page is selected from the drop down menu in the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue the Page End Event dialogue is displayed The following examples illustrate how you would use an End Current Page event to 1
216. d enter the When To Change options Choose OK to return to the View Change Event List Repeat the process to add the Data Change Event for the VAT and Gross fields Data Change Event i x Description Fi GOODS Field What To Change Color umm Font Line Printer 9 Regular Y E Text ae Position o0 Width 0 0 Justify s z Case ToUpperCase gt v FillField Options When To Change Across SpecifiedRange x First Line 3 Number of Lines no First Char EI Number of Chars Bs a 1st Test NONE z 2nd Test Cancel 332 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer VAT Fill Field Settings x Options Field vaT Update Fill First Char 53 Num Chars 1o Data Change Event x Description ri VAT Field What To Change coo MEN Font Line Printer 9 Regular 7 Text Position 0 0 Width 0 0 Justify Les z Case To Upper Case z v FillField Options When To Change Across SpecifiedRange First Line Hl Number of Lines noc First Char or Number of Chars Hl Tst Test NONE gt 2nd Test i Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 333 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Gross Fill Field Settings x Options Field Gross Update Fill First Char 53 Num Chars fio Data Change Event x Description ri GROSS Field What
217. d an XPDFontSubstitution entry to the UserSub xfs file that maps the Windows family name and style values from Step 2 to an existing Windows family and style This step is only required if a ATM is not loaded or b ATM is loaded but does not supply a Windows family name and style to match the values from Step 2 6 WARNING XPD files can be edited using a standard text editor however changing XPDs without proper instruction can be detrimental It is recommended that XPD files should NOT be changed except by experienced users or under instructions from the distributor A full description of the working of XPD and PPD files can be found on page 60 Printing with resident fonts If a font has been made available using the above steps then the Spooler Engine will recognise it as a resident font during printing and will not attempt to download the file 77 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Suggested setup for using Type 1 fonts within Paris 78 The best set up for using Type 1 fonts within Paris is 1 Install Adobe Type Manager ATM 2 Examine the XPD PPD of the printer to be used for printing and check the Font entries For each Font entry check or add an entry to the FontName xfs or UserName xfs files to establish a connection between the printer name and the windows name and style 3 Ensure that ATM has a font with the same windows name and
218. d choose OK The field will now be filled with the extracted text Update Field Event r Description x Address Area Code r Options Update Fill First Line 5 First Char fi 7 Num C Num 106 Add Edit Delete Clip Current Fields X AreaCode AlphaNumeric Name Type Current Value 4 91567 100332 102323 30238 82303 30567 b a Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 5 gt Environment FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT MENU The options listed in the Environment menu are the functions used to control an environment s processing of incoming printstream data and incorporation of the form design to produce the desired output Table 5 3 shows the Environment menu options the dialogue displayed when the option is chosen and the function of the option Each function its purpose and use is described on the following pages The Paris Designer Reference Manual 107 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Input Filter View Change Input Filter Set the input filter for an environment Translation Table View Change Set the translation of individual Translation Table characters in the printstream e g EBCDIC to ASCII Input Settings View Change Input Change input settings which are Settings to be repeated for each report within a print job Spacing Settings View Change PCC and Specify how the environment is Channel Assi
219. d on the next line If the Word wrapping enabled option is not checked when adding text the Enter key must be used to set the end of a line of text f NOTE If Full justification is selected Word Wrap is automatically activated A sample of the currently selected font is displayed in the Sample field The Paris Designer Reference Manual 387 Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings SETTING THE POSITION Poston FOR ADDED TEXT Frame Left Width To 09 09 Height Horizontal Justify et x Vertical Justify Top X Select the Frame checkbox to activate the Width and Height fields to place a frame around the text This allows added text to be justified in a frame Refer to the previous section Setting Text Attributes Leftand Top The position of the first character of a text element on a page that is left top justified can be defined in relation to the Left and from the Top of the page The zero point for the Absolute coordinates is the top left corner of the current document Enter the print position for the first character in the text element in the Left and Top fields NOTE For text that is not left top justified the Left and Top positions are the position of the Frame Width and Enter the dimensions for the frame in the Width and Height fields Height 388 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Horizontal Justify Vertic
220. dd a bar to the set The value of the bar Double click in the E MM Value box to add a Value bar value If adding a dynamic chart the value can be filled by a field The exact Field field name must be entered Refer to Using Fields to Create a Chart in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Label The label for the bar on the X axis Double click in the adjacent Label box to add a bar label If adding a dynamic chart the label can be filled by a field See above Field The Paris Designer Reference Manual 435 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Remove Bar Click on the Remove Bar button to remove a bar from the set The bar added last will be removed Add Set Click on the Add Set button to add a set to the chart The Bars for each set added will have the same Labels as Set 1 Only the Values for each Bar will need to be added Remove Set Click on the Remove Set button to remove a set The last set added and all the bars within the set will be removed Attributes The fill attributes for each bar if the chart has only one set or set Fill if the chart has multiple sets can be defined as Light Medium Heavy or Solid 436 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the Axis Settings for a Simple Bar Chart Attributes Data Axis General Arial 3 Bold Hide Axis Y Axis 7 Auto Calculate Values Min 0 Max 50 Ticks 5 Label M
221. decimal input character 38 which represents the character in the ASCII table and modified the output value to 36 which represents the character Therefore any time Paris Designer encounters a in the input stream it will translate the output to a To modify any entry Double click in the Output Char column on Double click in the Output Char column to the character to be change a translation code Output Codes in changed Enter the required output X value in the Output Char __ then press Enter Double click War M m wapu wW VVN ww change a translation code Output Codes in Red have been changed from the default r Character encodings m Character en Display Decimal Load Save The modified value will be displayed in RED The Paris Designer Reference Manual 141 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Saving and Loading a Translation Table The Save button is provided so you only have to define a set of character translations once Choose this button to open the Select Enter Save File Name TLT dialogue so that the translation table can be named and saved as a TLT character translation file Save in a Env z E an Ascii tlt Save as type TLT Cancel The Character Translation process may involve converting EBCDIC data to ASCII or vice versa Select the Load button to display the Select Enter File To Load TLT dialogue where translat
222. description of the event for easier identification in the event list Select the Field button to display the Field List and choose the required field from the list then choose OK The field name will appear in the dialogue Update Select Fill or Increment from the drop down menu as required Num Chars Enter the number of characters after and including the first character The Paris Designer Reference Manual 267 THE PAGE PARA SELECT DEVICE FEATURES EVENT FUNCTION Select Device Features Event x Description r Device Specific Features m Add Remove Tests 1st Test NONE 2nd Test Cancel Select Device Features Events are specific events that allow the user to insert code to activate device specific features such as stapling binding collating folding and so on The use of these events requires a thorough understanding of the workings of Post Script commands including the manual editing of XPD files the use of syntax etc Because of their specific application these events and their use are described in Appendix D Device Specific Features in the Paris System in this manual 268 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE PAGE PARA PAGE SUPPRESS EVENT FUNCTION A Page Suppress event enables you to test for a certain condition on a page and when the test is satisfied the page is suppressed at print time The suppressed page will still be shown in the Designer
223. dia Mapping Function of this manual 86 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu PHYSICAL PAGE SHIFT The final section of the View Change Printers dialogue is Physical Page Shift which allows the print image to be shifted either or both horizontally and vertically on the page This allows the image position of different printers to be adjusted to match or pre printed material can be aligned exactly r Physical Page Shift Horizontal fo Vertical fo The specified unit of measure is 300 dots per inch dpi so a measure of 1 equals 1 300th inch or 300 equals 1 inch Movement is controlled using positive and negative measure around the X Horizontal and Y Vertical axis Up and left directions are plus and down and right directions are minus X Up Left 7 Y Down gt Right Y For example if H 75 14 and Y 150 2 the print image will be shifted to the right and 1 2 down 4 Shift the page to the right for a quarter nch For example X Horizontal 75 Y Vertical 150 To shift the image enter the required number of units dots in the Horizontal and or Vertical boxes as required 87 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu SAVING THE PRINTER DEFINITION To save the printer definition choose the OK button in the View Change Printer di
224. dialogue Update Field Event xj r Description Options 3 Click on the Field Field I button to display the fr sj Field List 1 1 First Line 1 Num Lines fi First Char I Num Chars 255 m Current Fields Name al FirstName AlphaNumeric MemberNo AlphaNumeric AUS 198 1045 AccniNo AlphaNumeric 001 410198 1 Totmiles AlphaNumeric 82 303 Prevtotal AlphaNumeric 100 332 NewMiles AlphaNumeric 13 447 MileUsed AlphaNumeric 31 476 zi Del Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 497 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Field List m Current Fields FirstName MemberNo AccntNo Totmiles Prevtotal NewMiles MileUsed Name Type Curent Value 4 nt Valus AlphaNumeric 4U5 198 1045 AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric AlphaNumeric Choose the required field from the list then choose OK The Field name will appear in the Update Field Event dialogue Update Field Event r Description pe Options First Line 1 First Char 1 First ame Update Fill X Num Lines E Num Chars 255 The position and length of Sas Cancel the data to be extracted from First Line Num Lines First Char Num Chars 498 the printstream is specified in the Line and Char boxes Select Fill or Increment from the drop down menu e Fill replaces the current value of th
225. diting Text Block Settings Adding a Select Device Features event m Local Text Block Events To add a Select Device Features 1 Form Selection INVOICE 2 Back Form Selection MS BACK Select the Events button from the Text Block Settings dialogue to display the View Change Event List dialogue Select Device Features 2 Choose Select Device Features from the drop down menu then click on Select Device Features Event the Add button to display the Select Device Features Event dialogue r Description m Device Specific Features Choose the required feature from the drop down menu then click on the Add button Binding amp holding Page M Add Remove Select the 1 Test button to display the View Change Test Select Device Features Event xj dialogue and set the eari test conditions for the event Bina amp Hold Refer to Using Tests r Device Specific Features in Chapter 7 of this manual Once you have set the test conditions return to the Select Device Features Event dialogue and choose B nding amp Holding Page Add Remove the OK button The added event will be displayed in the fattest NONE x 2nd Test View Change Event List dialogue TEE a 508 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings EDITING DELETING AND COPYING LOCAL TEXT BLOCK EVENTS Events that have
226. e Green and Red palettes and Blueshade Greenshade Redshade and Greyscale palettes Any of these palettes can be loaded into the Environment or Form Editors 4f NOTE These palettes will only work on PostScript printers hat is the purpose of these palettes Apart from the Default color palette which can be used to mix your own colors the purpose of the remaining palettes is to provide an alternative to the three density system or fill attributes of light medium and dark currently available in Paris which although they can have color added to them they do not provide a solid color Using these palettes combined with the Solid fill attribute for an element a solid consistent color of any shade or density can be achieved For example a box with a Light fill to which a color has been added will not print as a solid shade but will print with a grainy texture However if a Solid fill is chosen for the box then a color from one of the palettes the color will print with a solid texture The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function The Blue Green and Red Palettes The Blue Red and Green palettes provide a Black and White tile then a further 14 tiles where the content of the primary color varies from a value of 255 to a value of 21 default settings In the Blue Palette the tiles have no red or green value In the case of the Green palette the tiles have no red or blue values and in the Red
227. e Euro Rates utility The first allows any user to view the fixed Euro rates for the participating countries in the European Monetary Union The remaining two levels are password protected and allow authorized users the ability to add delete and edit fixed and variable rates as required Password Change The country code country and fixed conversion rate for the participating countries are as follows Conversion Rate EEC NEM 308 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu View Conversion Rates This view is available to any user and displays the View Change Conversion Rates dialogue The fixed exchange rates for the currency of each of the 11 countries participating in the European Monetary Union are listed At this access level the rates can be viewed only View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates To add or edit a variable rate a password is required to gain access to the dialogue The default password is Operator and should be changed as soon as possible Once access is gained only variable rates can be added or edited fixed rates are view only Edit Any Rate With Supervisor access a fixed rate can be added edited or deleted should this become necessary To do this a password is required to gain access to the dialogue The default password is Supervisor the highest access level and may be changed when required CAUTION Passwords can and
228. e Manual 318 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Data Change Event x EU 73 What To Change T coo MENU Font une Printer 3 Regular z Text E Position 0 0 Width 0 0 Justify Left z Case a a z Options Fill Field option in the Data Change Event dialogue specifically for the use of Euro functions When To Change Fill Field Settings x Specifie Description First Line NEM First Char 1 st Tiest ll Options Field I E Update Fin First Char I Num Chars E The Paris Designer Reference Manual 319 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Important points about using the functions There are three functions available in Paris to handle international formats for currency and to provide conversions between the Euro currency and national currencies It is important to note the following about currency implementation and how it should be used The STR2CUR and CUR2STR Translating functions 320 Paris internally requires all strings that represent numbers and therefore currencies to be a standard 999 99 format The is always treated as the decimal separator and commas and other formatting such as currency symbols must not be part of the string To deal with the translation between this internal view of numeric strings and external views the STR2CUR and CUR2STR Translating functions have been created and added to the Paris sys
229. e Position Column 3 4 Data Change Position Column 4 5 Data Change Position Column 5 2 Click on the Clip button to display the Internal Clipboard The event to be copied to the text block is displayed in the Clipboard section of the Internal Clipboard r Objects r Clipboard Zapy Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangeT ext All None All None Delete The Paris Designer Reference Manual 545 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard Ei Objects Clipboard Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangePosition Data ChangeT ext Copy gt gt All None Exit 3 Click on the Event to be copied to the text block None Delete 4 Click on the lt lt Copy button to copy the event to the Objects list 5 Click on the Exit button to return to the View Change Event List dialogue The event will be displayed in the Local Text Block Events List View Change Event List r Local Text Block Events TREE CERTE Type Options Description 1 Data Change Position Column 1 2 Data Change Position Column 2 3 Data Change Position Column 3 4 Data Change Position Column 4 5 Data Change Position Column 5 Add String Add Data Change Exit
230. e edited Id Input Tray The current printer input tray The drop down menu provides options according to the printer connected to the PC running the Paris Designer Output Tray The current printer output tray The drop down menu provides options according to the printer connected to the PC running the Paris Designer Orientation The current page orientation for the page definition The options are Landscape or Portrait Page Size The current page size for the page definition The drop down menu provides a list of page size options If Custom is selected the Width and Height fields are activated for entry of the required sizes 184 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Editing the Text Blocks The text blocks in the current page definition are listed in this section of the dialogue Selecting a Text Block from the list will activate the Add and Edit buttons m Text Blocks Description MaxLines Num 4 02 Summary 12 1 3 Travel Histor 4 Message fh Fliaht Netaile 71 Add Delete Selecting Add will display the Add Text Block dialogue The New Text Block Num field will display the next number in sequence to the current number of text blocks in the page definition Add Text Block x Id New Text Block Num 3 Cancel Selecting the OK button will display the View Change Text Block Settings for the addition of a new text block Once the text block is
231. e footer Text Font and Border as above The Paris Designer Reference Manual 429 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the Legend for a Complex Plot Chart x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Asis General Display V Show Legend Font Arial to Bold Border None Position Anchor TESI v Align Vertically Show Legend Click on the Show Legend checkbox to show the legend Choose the required Font Size and Style for the legend from each drop down menu Border The Legend border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Choose Top Bottom Right Left Top Right Top Left Bottom Right or Bottom Left as the anchor position for the legend Align Click on the Align Vertically checkbox to align the legend Vertically vertically 430 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the Axis Settings for a Complex Plot Chart Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Font Arial 10 Bold Italic Hide Axis Birid None Border None af Grid None Y Axis Label Million Pun 0 Click on the Font menu arrow to choose a font from the Font List If you have not already created a Font List refer to Chapter 21 Using the Font List function of this manual Click on the Hide Axis checkbox to hide the X axis X Grid Choose None
232. e selected field with the new value Increment attaches the new value to the end of the current value if the field is AlbhaNumeric OR adds the new value to the current value if the field is numeric The position of the first line of the data to be extracted The number of lines of data after and including the first line The column position of the first character to be extracted The number of characters after and including the first character The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Example Using an Update Field Event to FILL the current value of a field Text Block 1 Membership Details of our environment contains the member s contact name We are going to create a field and extract the name data from the printstream to fill the current value of the field In the text block the edit tool has been used to establish the first line and character position of the name and the number of characters To use an Update Field event to fill a field x m Attributes C wiie FirstName 1 Add the alphanumeric Aiphanes aNumeric X Index field FirstName to the cA Field List J nrII Calculate Oo El m Values Default Current Cancel Use the View tool to select the Membership Details text block and display the View Change Text Block Settings dialogue Click on the Events button to display the View Change Event Lis
233. e specified data f NOTE The Text field can also be used to insert a field s value Refer to Select the Case checkbox to activate the Case list of options To Upper Case UPPER CASE To Lower Case lower case To Title Case Title Case Toggle case tOGGLE cASE To Sentence Case This is sentence case Select the required case from the list f NOTE A Data Change Event to make any CASE changes to text can only be used for text in the English language 482 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Position Select the Position checkbox to activate the Position Width and Justify options Position The tab or column position within the text block from the left edge of the text block The unit of measure is the same as that set for the horizontal grid and is measured from zero 0 Width The column width to justify within shown in the measurement set for the horizontal grid Justify The justification of a column which can be set to Left Right Center or Full justification The Position shown when the cursor is first placed in a text block X Position 3 3333 The horizontal grid setting X Position 3 3333 is 10 lines per inch therefore the position of Width 26 666 the tab or column WITHIN THE TEXT BLOCK is 3 3 lines 33 from the left If a tab is placed at the letter B of Balance this is the Position of the tab in the text block
234. eam can be tested for a particular character string such as a word or phrase for example Credit Note Total or for particular byte values Once a test is set the system scans the incoming printstream data for the test conditions If the conditions are met the event takes place m The View Change Test dialogue is used to set test parameters for events m The same View Change Test dialogue will be displayed whenever a test condition of any kind is to be added m The View Change Test dialogue is displayed by selecting the 1st Test button from any Event dialogue and 2nd Test button if using two tests m Tests can be used for input and output events What is the Mask and how is it used The mask can be applied to the data to convert its value The returned value is the bitwise logical and of the data and the mask For example setting the mask to a value of 127 strips the high bit from the data f NOTE Normally you would not use any value other than 255 in this field What do I need to know before setting the test conditions Before an event is added the line number and position in the line of the character string or byte to be tested should be determined If relevant the number of lines and the length of characters to be tested must also be determined The Paris Designer Reference Manual 231 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu What are the Test options and how are they used The test options allow you
235. ected as the current font Current users of the Paris system will be able to use the Barcodes Kit without additional training The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Supported Barcodes Barcodes supported by the Barcodes Kit are For barcode types that support variable numbers of check digits a user parameter Code 3 of 9 Code 93 Code 128 Codabar EAN JAN 8 EAN JAN 13 UPC A UPC E PostNet Interleaved 2 of 5 MSI Plessey is available Fonts Since the Barcodes Kit support is based upon a set of TrueType fonts these fonts must be available to the PC that runs the Paris Designer or Paris Spooler For example if the Paris Designer is installed on a server in a network then the TrueType fonts must be installed on every network workstation that runs the Designer 82 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Updating Resources The Update function in the Resources section of the dialogue only applies to those printers with permanent storage facilities see item 1 in the earlier section How Paris manages printer resources In rare circumstances such as the hard disk failing on the printer or a resource e g font being accidentally deleted it may be necessary to instruct Paris to download these resources again Resources Id 2 Update Reset Never Media Mappi
236. ection How are embedded Runtime events activated on page 277 6 WARNING Within a DJDE packet from the first DJDE record until END record a PRINTER command must precede a JDL or JDE command otherwise the JDE or JDL command is ignored 274 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu WHY ARE RUNTIME EVENTS USED Runtime events give you a large amount of flexibility by allowing you to make changes at any point in the printstream whereas other input events only apply to the page on which they are found In this way Runtime events can be applied at any point in the printstream to e Change the page definition form or environment e Select the font list output event list input and output trays e Load and position graphics dynamically The Paris Designer Reference Manual 275 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Options Support Comment BOF DATA Full X DEPT NS DUPLEX Full PEND NS ENDJOB Extension ___ End Current Job gt ENV Extnson SameasCEPJDLJDE O EVENTS Extension Same as CEP MODIFY O FEED Full Supported values TRAY1 TRAY2 TRAY3 TRAY4 MAIN AUX ERILE c 0 TUNSD 0 9 002 5 0960 rac neveu nos iy FONTNDEX Ful FONTS Ful J m FORMAT Ph FORM P
237. ee different methods for specifying features To activate a device specific feature the following steps must be followed e Add the feature code to an XPD file e Addacall to a feature to the Job via ENV or Run time event The four hooks differ only in where in the output data stream the user code is inserted The code to be inserted follows normal PPD XPD syntax rules Following the character the actual code must be enclosed in characters It can span multiple lines An XPD file can contain any number of user defined features 595 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris Currently defined hooks The currently defined hooks are 1 Xerox Job Ticket The user code will be inserted as part of the Xerox Job Ticket This hook is only available if Job Ticket processing has been activated the printer XPD file contains an XPD_XJT Version option If Job tickets are not active calls to these features are ignored Refer to Appendix C Modifying Paris Job Tickets of the Paris Spooler Technical Manual Example XPDFeature XJT Binding XRXbinding binding via job ticket 2 Job Level Comment The user code will be inserted in the Comments section of the PostScript Job preamble Example XPDFeature JobComment Binding Requirements binding 3 Job Level Code The user code will be inserted in the Code portion of the Postscript Job Preamble Example XPDFe
238. either type in the name of the file required or choose a name from the menu e The entries lt INPUT gt or lt INPUT gt are equally valid Either passes the name of the input file through to output and applies to disk based input only e lt fieldname gt where a field name is entered in the angled brackets uses the contents of the nominated field for the output file name e The LPR control file can be scanned and any of the following entries can be extracted and used for the output filename QGLPR HOST QGLPR USER QGLPR CLASS QGLPR JOB lt LPR_INPUT gt QGLPR INPUT PATH QGLPR INPUT NAME QGLPR INPUT EXTN QGLPR TITLE Output extension In the Output extension text field either type in the name of the file required or choose a name from the menu as above Once the filename and extension are specified you can choose to increment either of them Maximum File Number In the Maximum File Number text field enter the maximum file number required 66 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Appending the Number to the file name or extension Append the Number to Name To increment the file name select the Append Number to Name checkbox View Change Next File Settings x Settings Output directory fe Paris OUT Y Dutput name PARIS Output extension o UT X r File Numbering
239. elected event action takes place For example if a test is set up to change the form when the string COPY is found in the data when the test goes TRUE the new form is called For example Change Form Event x In a Change Form Event the form to Change To is selected r Description Fiecopd Form Change To FILECOPY Tests 1st Test NONE 2nd Test Add byte Delete ez TED Add string Display Decima 7 The 1 Test button is selected to display the View Change Test dialogue and the type of test is chosen The Add string Button is selected and the value COPY is entered in the Enter Test String dialogue that is displayed Enter Test String iz to Test for Lh aes cae The test value is displayed in the dialogue Add string Add byte Delete Display Decimal Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 233 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Input Not Equal To Value In this comparison test if the value found at the test position in the data does not match the test value entered the test goes TRUE and the selected event action takes place For example anything that does not match Page 1 switch to a different paper tray x x r Description m Test Info atra FirstLine oT Num lines v Biss
240. en the Environment menu and choose Print Order from the menu The View Change Print Order dialogue will be displayed View Change Print Order k x r Page Definitions Forms Back Page Forms Add Edit Cea Add Clear Add Clear Files 2 Click on the Files button to open the Select Page Def dialogue The Paris Designer Reference Manual 553 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Select Page Def xj Files File To Edit Create Paget Internal External 3 Select the Clip button corresponding to the list that contains the source pagedef internal or external The Clipboard dialogue will be displayed Internal Clipboard x Objects Clipboard lt lt Eopy All None Delete 4 Click on the page def to be copied in the Objects list then choose the Copy gt gt button The page def will be copied onto the Clipboard and will be displayed in the Clipboard list 554 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function 5 Select the copied pagedef in the Clipboard list the lt lt Copy button will be highlighted Internal Clipboard i X Objects Clipboard Copy gt gt lt lt Copy Ail None Delete 6 Select the Copy button you will be warned that the page def name already exists and prompted to enter a new name i 0 e Name Already Exists Enter new Name 7 Select OK
241. end a page when the test string Page No is true and 2 when duplex printing to ensure Page 1 is always on the front of a duplex page x r Description ptions C Top C Bottom Now r Side Nest C Front C Back m Tests 1st Test NONE 1 Cancel For example 1 A test can be set up to look for the string Page No and whenever the test is true a page break is actioned If the test is always true in Line 1 the option would be to break Now that is an immediate break If the test condition is in Line 3 the option would be to break at Top that is to move the whole text block to the new page A file contains multiple reports each starting on Page 1 When printing this type of report in duplex it is normally preferable to have a Page 1 always on the front of a duplex page this way it can be separated easily By setting up a test on the string Page 1 with a Side Front option Paris will always ensure Page 1 is on the front of a duplex page The Paris Designer Reference Manual 257 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING AN END CURRENT PAGE EVENT Bl Events menu gt Page Para gt End Current Page gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue select End Current Page from the drop down menu then the Add button to display the Page End Event dialogue Page End Event x Description Options
242. ents text boxes lines etc that are sent will overprint the graphic according to the way they have been placed in the environment Rotation None Color The color of a black and white graphic can be changed Click on the Color selector to display the Color Palette Refer to Chapter 22 The Color Palette function SETTING THE PROPERTIES OF A DYNAMIC GRAPHIC ELEMENT m Properties Horizontal Fixed Vertical Fixed Y f In the Horizontal and Vertical fields set the properties of Horizontal and Vertical a dynamic Graphic element to Fixed Float or Resize Refer to Adding and floating a dynamic graphic in Chapter 10 of the Paris Designer User s Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 413 Chapter 18 Editing Dynamic and Static Graphic Settings SETTING THE FRAME FOR THE GRAPHIC Frame Width 0 0 Height 0 0 Alignment Horizontal Lett Y Vertical Top Y C Scale to fit frame postscript printing only If the Active checkbox is selected in the Default Graphic Settings dialogue frame attributes for the Graphic can be defined In the View Change Graphic dialogue the current position of the Graphic on the X and Y co ordinates will be displayed in the Left and Top fields and the current Width and Height of the frame will be displayed Width The width of the frame Height The Height of the frame Left The left position of the frame on the page grid Top The top position
243. er sections of this manual and in the Paris Designer User s Manual The Color Palette and the Internal Clipboard functions are common to many other functions in the Paris Designer and may be accessed wherever the Color or Clip buttons appear As the use of these dialogues is complex and requires lengthy explanation and to avoid repetition their use is explained here The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 22 THE COLOR PALETTE FUNCTION The Color Palette is available in the Paris Designer wherever the Color selector appears in a dialogue The Color selector displays the currently selected color for the element Color can be applied to text line box circle and black and white graphic elements Clicking on the Color selector displays the default color palette and the Options selector Choosing Options displays the Palette Options dialogue and the Load Palette Save Palette and Custom Palette buttons View Change Text Settings B x r Attributes Position Font Arial 10 Bold Italic 5 0 Ipi x Add Frame Spacing so Per Inch Reset Edit font list Left 8 0 Rotate None Top 17 1000 Color O Iv Word wrapping enabled Width 30 0 m Sample Height 20 0 123 AB Wt Horizontal Justify Let X Vertical Justify Top R4 Properties Horizontal Fixed E Vertical Fixed E Figure 22 1 The default color palette in the View Ch
244. erence Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings The Value entered is the threshold value which determines the creation of the other slice and which pie values will be included in the slice If the Value is set to 0 0 the creation of the other slice will be disabled By default the other slice is labeled Other A more appropriate label can be applied if required The apparent depth as a percentage of the chart s width Enter the required value in the Depth box The eye s position above the X axis measured in degrees Enter the required value in the Inclination box The example below shows a Pie Chart with one point in each set For further examples refer to Using the Chart Tool in Chapter 11 of the Paris Designer Manual Population of Australian State Capital Cities Sydney Perth Brisbane The Paris Designer Reference Manual 461 CHAPTER 20 EDITING TEXT BLOCK SETTINGS 45 gt gt gt Default Text Block Settings dialogue Text Blocks can only be added in the Environment Editor To use the options within the Default Text Block Settings and View Change Text Block Settings dialogues the same processes are required The use of each Text Block Settings dialogue to create text blocks in an environment is described in detail in Creating Text Blocks in Chapter 3 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Default Text Block Settings x r Attributes Position Font Line Printer 8 Regular 42 0 dts
245. erwise Engine DJDE Handling If a COPIES DJDE is encountered the copies value may be used e Ifthe Engine is handling copy requests then DJDE COPIES will be honored no matter where they occur in the data stream This allows a single input file containing multiple reports to print each report with it s own copy count e If the output device is handling copy requests then DJDE COPIES will be honored only if the DJDE occurs before the first print line of the job e Ifa single input job contains multiple reports and each report uses a different ENV the collation and copy sensitive options that will be applied to all reports are taken from the start up ENV In other words it is not possible to change copy sensitive or collation options on a report boundary within a single input file The Paris Designer Reference Manual 171 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu DJDE FORM and BFORM commands The DJDE FORM and BFORM commands are fully supported the first and count options will be read and stored and will be actioned if Copy Sensitive Processing is active in the startup environment RTEXT and RFORM DJDE RTEXT and RFORM options are fully supported including copy sensitive RTEXT commands The full CEP syntax is supported The fonts and positioning are taken from the first text block of the first page definition used in the environment 172 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions i
246. es The event takes place from the specified line and column position and will remain in effect until the end of the text block or until the next event For example it could be the character in the 5 column in the 3 line in the text block First Line 3 First Char 5 No tests are used with this option This option requires e First Line and First Char to be specified and can be used to e Insert text at a known position line number and column number e Make a permanent change from this point on such as a font or color The Paris Designer Reference Manual 475 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings At Test Position 476 When To Change First Line 3 Number of Lines o First Char zo Number of Chars IstTest_ NONE v zares This option is similar to the At Specified Position option however the First Char is determined by a test If the test conditions are met the event will take place from this position and will remain in effect to the end of the text block or another event The search is only conducted over the specified line range however the result will continue to the end of the text block This option requires e First Line and Number of Lines to be specified and can be used to e Search for and replace one word with another Search and Replace e Search and Change font color and so on when the change location is not know
247. esource management commands forPCL and PostScript printers 73 printer commands in the printstream removing 146 printer definition saving 90 printer resident font adding to Paris 79 printing 79 PRINTER DJDE command using with JDE or JDL 276 280 printing printer resident font 79 proof page in the Environment Editor 54 proof page in the Form Editor 369 Printline Size output settings 179 Printline Size in Output Settings using 179 printstream data file size when loading 46 printstream data capturing 35 from a Novell print queue 40 42 from a Serial port 36 from LPD queue 44 changing the case using a Data Change event 485 changing the color using a Data Change event 485 changing the font using a Data Change event 485 changing the tabs and columns using a Data Change event 486 editing 46 47 50 loading 33 53 model creating 46 48 proof page printing in the Environment Editor 54 printing in the Form Editor 369 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 615 Index R rebuilding printer type list 63 recording environment design information 30 Red Palette 526 Redshade Palette 526 re encoding Type 1 font 81 Relative option using in a text block 470 removing printer 56 93 printer commands from the printstream 146 re scaling a graphic 417 resetting printer resources 94 resetting printer resources 87 372 resident printer font adding to Paris 79 printing 79 resizing dynamic box 41
248. ess Level dialogue 5 Confirm pe i g e 4f NOTE Remember to make a note of your new password as once you exit the next time you use the Euro Rates function you will need it to gain access to the required level The Paris Designer Reference Manual 317 EURO FUNCTIONS IN THE PARIS DESIGNER Within the Paris system special EURO functions are available for the handling of international formats for currencies and for their conversion to the Euro rate and vice versa These are the STR2CUR and CUR2STR Translating functions and the EURO Rounding function Using the Field function available in the Paris Designer a field is added to an environment and the value of the field filled using a calculation string containing one or more of the EURO functions specifically created for currency conversions to and from the Euro Add Edit Field x r Attributes Name EuoVat Type Currency Index Reset Jat Page Start Calculate CUR25TR EURO VAT FROM GBP 2 2 RP The calculation string entered to calculate the Euro VAT using the EURO functions Values Default Current In addition and in contrast to the method used for an Update Field event the value of fields relating to the Euro conversion process such as currency sub totals VAT and totals are filled differently This is via the Fill Field option within a local text block Data Change event The Paris Designer Referenc
249. est F5 NUM F4 Invalid quote Correction Add a closing string delimiter or remove the initial string delimiter 214 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Missing Closing Bracket Cause An opening bracket was found with no matching closing bracket Examples NUM F1 NUM F2 Missing for function F1 F2 4 Missing for embedded string F1 F2 F3 4 Extra Correction Add the missing closing bracket or remove the extra opening bracket Unrecognized Function Cause An opening bracket was found preceded by text The text was not a valid function name This indicates either a misspelled function name or a missing operator between a field name and a bracket Examples NUN F1 Misspelled function NUM F1 F2 4 Missing operator between F1 and Correction Correct the spelling of the function or add the missing operator The Paris Designer Reference Manual 215 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Unrecognized Value Cause A word was found that is not a valid Field name and not a numeric constant This indicates either a misspelled Field name an extraneous keystroke in a numeric constant or missing string delimiters for an alphanumeric constant Examples F9 G10 F9 and G10 must be field names F9 55 6d d is extraneous keystroke F9 text Missing delimiters for text Correction Check t
250. ete Display Decimal Cancel Line range is specified in the First Line and Num Lines boxes The Paris Designer Reference Manual 235 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Input Equal Prev Input input equal to previous input This test compares the input at the data test position with the input found in the previous occurrence at the test position in the data For example the test could be to look in the first 10 characters in Line 1 It reads and stores the contents then when the next Line 1 is reached it compares the first 10 characters with the stored value from the previous Line 1 4 NOTE It is important to remember that if you have multiple text blocks there are multiples of Line 1 As a result if using a page para event it would normally make sense to use this test only if there is one text block and therefore one Line 1 on the page Input Not Equal Prev Input input not equal to previous input This test compares the input at the data test position with the input found in the previous occurrence at the test position in the data If no match is found the test goes TRUE The same limitations apply as those to the Input Equal Prev Input test Field Equal To Value This comparison test is against a field value rather that a value in the list If the value found at the test position in the data matches the field value displayed in the View Change Test dialogue the test
251. etimes a function of the application program For full details of the values and resultant actions you may need to contact the application programmer How DO AVOID PRINTING THE PCC BYTE If your data stream contains PCC bytes you will obviously wish to interpret them usually however you will not wish to actually print them It is possible to remove them from the output by defining the printable portion of each print record In the majority of cases the PCC byte is the first byte of each print record in these cases the printable portion of the print record should be offset by one byte This is specified in the Printline Size settings in the View Change Output Options dialogue and is described in the section Defining Printline Size Settings on page 177 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 149 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu WHICH SPACING METHOD TAKES PRIORITY There are two distinct methods of controlling vertical line spacing by the use of the Input Filter or by the use of PCC characters The Input Filter is essentially used to define a print record however it also contains spacing details which may contradict the PCC byte definition e If any PCC characters are assigned in the PCC table in the View Change PCC amp Channel Assignments dialogue they will always override spacial information defined in the Input Filter settings for its line This applies no matter what state the setting is for Print Options see bel
252. ew amount Sample EURO 1 23 TO BEF 6 f NOTE With all the functions no approximation or rounding errors occur However when using any other math operation or function the currency is first converted to a standard floating point number then the math operation is applied and in this instance errors can occur The only rounding safe functions that can be done on a currency value in Paris are the new functions EURO STR2CUR and CUR2STR The Paris Designer Reference Manual 323 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer An example of using all three of the functions 324 This is an example of using all three of the special functions that have been specifically created in Paris to handle international formats for currencies and to provide conversions between the Euro and Euro Monetary Union currencies Example This example takes the value of the field F1 and passes that to the STR2CUR function to remove any external formatting The result of this function call is passed to the EURO function for conversion into Belgian currency The result of this function call is passed to the CUR2STR function to be formatted for display to the end user CUR2STR EURO STR2CUR F1 TO BEF 6 2 FRONT The Paris Designer Reference Manual USING THE EURO RATES UTILITY AND EURO FUNCTIONS Once you have designed your environment you will be using all the tools available to you in the Designer to ma
253. ference to include a corresponding PPD file in the XPD f NOTE XPD files contain command options to manage printer resources These options enable you to tailor Paris resource management for the particular requirements of your printer Refer to the section XPD Resource Management Commands for PCL and PostScript printers on page 71 6 WARNING Both XPD and PPD files are text files and can be edited using a standard text editor however it is recommended that these should NOT be changed except by experienced users or under instructions from the distributor The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Windows GDI supported devices When using GDI to print there are important points to be considered Firstly GDI was not really designed as a production printing method As a result it is not optimized for speed and can struggle to keep up with high speed printers Secondly when using GDI Paris is passing responsibility for the final output over to Windows and in turn the manufacturer supplied GDI driver As a result the outcome cannot be guaranteed to print exactly as intended There could be font substitutions or incomplete support for some of the Paris features because the printer is incapable of imaging the page as originally designed How do XPD and PPD files work XPD XLPrint Printer Description files are the way Paris describes output destinations XPD files are a superset
254. font during conversion into Paris the Conversion Manager will search the Font Reference for a font with that name mapped to it The converted form now a Paris resource will no longer refer to the Xerox CEP name making it truly printer independent Delete Reference As we have mentioned the Font Reference is automatically updated during conversion However in some cases you may wish to clean up your system and remove references to fonts that are no longer used 6 WARNING Extreme caution should be taken when deleting font references as any forms or environments using them will no longer be valid When a font reference is deleted its reference will be removed from the list of available fonts and its logical LPF and screeen FON files will be deleted The fonts can only be restored by re converting into Paris in the case of Xerox CEP fonts or by the use of the Resource Manager in the case of Lapr s or other Paris fonts 304 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Add Reference This can only be used if the associated LPF and FON files exist on your Paris system In practice this situation should not exist If it does it would be more appropriate to re convert or unpack the font again Make Disk File This option relates only to the creation of printer based fonts for the Xerox Docuprint NPS range of printers It is possible to manually download postscript type 3 bitmap fonts
255. for the model data This also applies to your sample data file of the printstream Once you have created the environment you may find that you wish to edit the model sample printstream This is done via the Edit Data File dialogue You can edit the data file in the Edit Data File dialogue while it is loaded in the Environment Editor return to the editor and immediately view the effect of the changes you have made Edit Data To edit the sample data file currently loaded in the Environment Editor 1 Open the File menu and select Edit Data from the Data sub menu The Edit Data dialogue will appear displaying the data file currently loaded in the Environment Editor Edit View Data File Text View Hex View CAPARISNDTANINVSAMPLE DTA Save Mr Murray Dell a 33 Pleasant Place Picton N QUEENSTOWN 865 LZw 02 10 00 04 10 00 05 10 00 10 10 00 15 10 00 22 10 00 30 10 00 Edit the file as required refer to the section Using the keyboard in the Edit Data File function on page 46 for a list of the available edit keys 49 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu 3 When finished select the Save button The Select Enter Save File Name DTA dialogue will be displayed Either Choose the current filename from the File List then choose OK A message dialogue will appear requesting confirmation or cancellation of the overwrite Save File As X C Pa
256. g legend 447 dynamic floating 442 resizing 442 Complex Plot adding attributes 426 adding axis settings 433 adding data 428 adding general settings 435 adding headings 431 adding labels 430 adding legend 432 dynamic floating 427 resizing 427 Pie adding data 457 adding general settings 462 adding headings 460 606 The Paris Designer Reference Manual adding labels 459 adding legend 461 dynamic floating 456 resizing 456 Simple Bar adding attributes 436 adding axis settings 439 adding data 437 adding general settings 440 dynamic floating 436 resizing 436 Simple Plot adding attributes 422 adding axis settings 424 adding data 423 adding general settings 425 dynamic floating 422 resizing 422 Chart element editing 419 63 chart types Complex Bar chart 421 Complex Plot chart 421 Pie chart 421 Simple Bar chart 421 Simple Plot chart 421 circle dynamic floating 404 resizing 404 editing 400 404 attributes 402 dynamic properties 404 position 403 setting the line and fill color from the Tools Bar 404 Clipboard copying fields to and from the Clipboard 550 63 fonts from the Clipboard 543 fonts onto the Clipboard 541 page definition to and from the Clipboard 556 page definition to another environment 560 page definition within an environment 556 text block events from the Clipboard 548 text block events onto the Clipboard 546 Index using 539 49 using to copy f
257. gdom Pound Sterling GBP United States Minor Outlying US Dollar USD Islands Uzbekistan Uzbekistan Sum UZS Virgin Islands Brit US Dollar USD 348 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Wallis and Futuna Islands The Paris Designer Reference Manual 349 CHAPTER 9 gt Help FUNCTIONS IN THE HELP MENU Help Tip Of The Day Contents Fi License gt About The options displayed in the Help menu are Tip of the Day the Paris Help Contents Paris Designer Licensing information and details about the version of Paris Designer that you are using Euro Functions in the Paris Designer TIP OF THE DAY o HELP MENU TIP OF THE DAY Select Tip of the Day to display the dialogue and the day s tip Tip of the Day E3 p Did you know wv Use shortcut lt Alt N gt to open a new form or Alt 0 to open an existing form Show Tess Stand _ NeT MULTIPLE LICENSING D c Help menu License Authorize Extension Users The License function allows users running the Paris system on a network to authorize and nominate multiple users This function is only available in the menu if a multiple license has been issued Multiple Licensing is available from your Paris distributor upon application The Paris Designer Reference Manual 351 Using the Functions in the Form Editor PARIS DESIGNER HELP D c Help menu Contents or F1 P
258. ge 230 Test button 2d Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do I use two tests 248 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE PAGE PARA CHANGE BACK FORM EVENT FUNCTION Change Back Form events are added to an environment before any text block editing or text block events are applied to the data WHEN WOULD I USE A CHANGE BACK FORM EVENT 249 As described in the previous section any type of Page Para event is conducted on every text block on a page whereas a local text block event is conducted on its associated text block only However a back form does not contain variable data and is a way of putting a static form on the back of a page such as a payment method or terms and conditions The job will effectively be Simplex from a pagedef point of view The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING A CHANGE BACK FORM EVENT B gt Events menu gt Page Para gt Change Back Form gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue select Change Back Form from the drop down menu then the Add button to display the Change Back Form Event dialogue Change Back Form Event Description Back Form Change T o Tests 2nd Test Cancel event list Change To Select this but
259. ge accordingly on the back page along the long and or short edge The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining Printline Size Settings m Printline Size Offset fo Length fi 33 Printline Size settings are used to define the printable portion of a print record All output events local text block events are based on this portion and not the portion offset That is all offsets are in relation to the printable portion and not the print record The Offset in Printline Size settings is the number of characters to disregard at the beginning of the line This avoids the printing of control characters the bytes at the start of a print record such as PCC bytes or Font Index bytes The number of characters to be ignored is entered in the Offset field The Length is used to limit the length of printstream data lines The number of characters for the maximum line length is set in the Length field The Paris Designer Reference Manual 177 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining Font Indexing Settings r Font Indexing v Active Offset fo Start at One Max 16 II Replace invalid index with first font If your data contains font index bytes you can use the Font Indexing function to specify the font for a printline You can modify your mainframe programs to send a number in each line that is then indexed to a font The font index number directly relates
260. gner User s Manual SETTING THE BOX LINE AND FILL COLOR ATTRIBUTES FROM THE TOOLS BAR The color of the line and fill for a box can be selected before adding the box 1 Select the Box tool to activate the Line Weight Line Style and Color buttons in the Tools Bar Click on the arrow select the required color OO wilh 9 4 X s s CC FIT 10 Regular 5 0 Ipi 2 Click on the arrow adjacent to the Line Color or Fill Color buttons to display the Color Palette and choose the required color Refer to Chapter 22 The Color Palette function 408 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 18 EDITING GRAPHIC SETTINGS The Default Graphic Settings dialogue is used to edit the default settings for a graphic before it is added to a form or environment The View Change Graphic dialogue is used to view or change the settings for a selected Graphic To use the options within each dialogue the same processes are required with the addition of the Properties function for Dynamic Graphic elements DEFAULT GRAPHIC SETTINGS DIALOGUE Selecting the Graphic tool then clicking on the Settings button will display the Default Graphic Settings dialogue If you are adding a Dynamic Graphic to an environment the Attributes section contains a drop down menu to select a graphic file by field or name There is also a Properties option for setting Fixed Float or Resize properties Default Graphic Sett
261. gnments to deal with vertical spacing controls Printer Carriage Controls Output Settings View Change Output Determine basic output Options processing options Print Order View Change Print Define default page definitions Order and forms Current Page View Change Page Edit the page definition currently Definition Ctl J Definition on the screen Fields View Change Field List Add and edit fields Operator Messages View Change Print Insert operator messages to Messages appear on screen prior to the commencement of the print job CEP Options View Change Xerox Set the CEP options CEP Options View Page Attributes View Current Page Display the properties of the Ctl K Attributes current page Select Text Block Select Text Block Link a text block to a dynamic Ctl N form element Table 5 3 Functions in the Environment Menu 108 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE INPUT FILTER FUNCTION The Paris Designer Input Filter is used to nominate which bytes in the incoming printstream are to be printed and which will act as line or page terminators View Change Input Filter x m Input Characters Char P mt LineEnd 4 oo Ignore NoEnd 01 Ignore No End I Line End OB lanore No End oc Ignore Line End Display Hex Y Load Save Ignore Character Attributes This character is a Printable character v This character is a Line End This character is a Page End
262. gth length for PAK files is variable Variable The user can select the way each line is terminated by selecting from the options in the drop down menu Carriage Return Line Feed or Carriage Ret Line Feed m Runtime Options Line Length Test sxLP Variable Offset 0 Carriage Ret Line Feed Skip J5 Line Feed d The fixed line length option is very rarely used however in some host transfer situations variable length records cause difficulties To overcome this the option is available to set the line length at a fixed number of characters Offset O Carriage Ret Line Feed 7 Skip E Cancel Selecting the OK button will display the Add Resource dialogue Z NOTE The Packer Options dialogue settings are sticky meaning that they save their values each time you exit the Resource Manager 294 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu PACKING FILES Add Pack Files Select File Type Environment Y d ltp env 3339 Bytes 15 11 2000 involce env 3957 Bytes 08 10 1999 ipex3 env 11287 Bytes 02 10 1998 ipex env 11747 Bytes E 07 12 1998 ipex a eny 11959 Bytes x 02 12 1933 msa env 18231 Bytes 10 11 1333 msnew env 05 1 ai inf b Add Selected Files Only C Add Selected Files and Required Resources C View and Select Resources to Pack Cancel Select File Type The Select File Type drop d
263. h a form feed character how and when do use the Skip option on page 117 and Using the Skip option on page 126 124 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining the Spacing options The line spacing action for a character is set in the Spacing section of the dialogue m Character Attributes Character Attributes R F This character is a Printable character This character is a Printable character v lilac ies tne End v This character is a Line End This character is a Page End m Spacing Spacin aseo v Before printing the current line Skip to channel 1 C Space 1 line JV Print the current line After printing the current line C Skip to channel 1 Space 1 line Skip to channel 1 Space line V Print the current line JV After printing the current line Skip to channel 1 C Space 1 line Print the current line Print the current line specifies that the line which the selected character terminates is to be printed By not selecting this option the line will not be printed which is a very rare requirement Spacing Before or After Printing When a line is terminated the print position will need to be vertically spaced down one line unless you wish to over print the current line You have the choice to space down one line before you print the line or
264. hart checkbox to rotate the chart Stacking Bars Select the Stacking Bars checkbox to stack the bars in the sets Percentage The percentage option can only be used with Stacked Bar Charts Select the Percentage checkbox to display the values on the Y axis from 0 to 100 Border The border around the chart Choose Solid or None from the Border menu In Complex and Stacked Bar Charts the Width option controls exactly how bars are spaced Each set in a bar chart is called a cluster The number of clusters determines the available cluster space on the X axis In a Stacked Bar chart there is only one bar per cluster All Y values less than zero are stacked below the X axis The Width value entered is how much of the available cluster space should be occupied by all the sets By default the Width is 50 i e 50 of the available space on the X axis 448 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Cluster Overlap Complex Bar charts the Cluster Overlap option controls the spacing between the bars in the same cluster and is specified as a percentage of the bar s width Z NOTE This option has no effect on Stacked Bar charts or Complex Bar charts with 3D effects 3D Effects See NOTE above The apparent depth as a percentage of the chart s width Enter the required value in the Depth box The eye s position above the X axis measured in degrees Enter the required value in the Inclination box
265. he Euro Rates utility 310 activating Device Specific Features 596 Run Time events 279 adding See also creating a color shade to an element 530 action to Run Time event modification 285 attributes to a Complex Bar chart 441 attributes to a Complex Plot chart 426 attributes to a Simple Bar chart 436 attributes to a Simple Plot chart 422 axis settings to a Complex Bar chart 448 axis settings to a Complex Plot chart 433 axis settings to a Simple Bar chart 439 axis settings to a Simple Plot chart 424 Change Back Form Local Text Block event 508 Change Back Form Page Para event 252 Change Form Local Text Block event 505 Change Form Page Para event 250 Change Output Event List event 257 Change Page Definition event 254 color to an element 528 529 condition to Run Time event modification 284 Data Change event 476 484 data to a Complex Bar chart 443 data to a Complex Plot chart 428 data to a Pie chart 457 data to a Simple Bar chart 437 data to a Simple Plot chart 423 End Current Page event 260 End Text Block event 264 Environment Change event 289 fields 191 fonts to the Font List 516 general settings to a Complex Bar chart 450 general settings to a Complex Plot chart 435 general settings to a Pie chart 462 general settings to a Simple Bar chart 440 general settings to a Simple Plot chart 425 headings to a Complex Bar chart 446 headings to a Complex Plot chart 431 headings to a Pie chart 460
266. he Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Modifying an Input Character Current settings for the selected character iew Change Input Filter ye i Input Characters Character Attributes Char Print LineEnd 4 This character is a Printable character D 01 v This character is a Line End T This character is a Page End 04 05 Spacing Before printing the current line a8 C Sh ip ta ct I1 03 Space 1 ine Line End Ignore No End v Print the current line lgnore Line End m Display C Skip to channel 1 Lo A Vim Space 1 line Selected JV After printing the current line Display Can character options Input Characters The Input Filter lists all possible byte values Input Characters on the left hand side of the dialogue On the right hand side the settings for the currently selected Input Character will be displayed Display options Input Characters can be displayed in Hex Decimal or Literal notation Any given Input Character is modified by selecting the character from the list on the left The character s current settings will be displayed on the right and are available for modification Defining the Character Attributes Under the Character Attributes setting the basic function of the selected character can be defined In the majority of cases a character will be only one of the following bypassed printed o
267. he Test drop down menu lists the test available for selection Selecting a test from the list will display it in the Test field Each type of test is described on pages 232 to 237 The number of bytes or characters in the line to be tested after the start position Offset is entered in this field This field is activated only if test value Input Equal Prev Input or Input Not Equal Prev Input are selected If a test related to a field is selected the Field button will be activated Test Field Greater Than Value Selecting the Field button will display the Field List dialogue for selection of a field for the test The selected field will be displayed in the View Change Test dialogue Test Field Greater Than Value Field AccntNum 240 The Paris Designer Reference Manual ptr 7 Functions in the Events menu 7 Functions in the Events menu r Value to Test for Selecting the Add String button will display the Enter Test String dialogue The character string to be searched for and tested is entered in the Value to Test for text field Once entered the OK button is selected and the entered string is displayed in the View Change Test dialogue Display isplay MEE Decimal Literal The display mode is selected from the drop down menu before a test byte is added Test values can be entered and or viewed either in Decimal Hex Hexadecimal or Literal alphanumeric units directly representing a value Add By
268. he chart it will be displayed in color f NOTE You cannot change the default color settings The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Data to a Pie Chart Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend General Data Value Field Label Field amp Deis Slice 33 0 Add Slice Slice 1 Cross hatched p Slice2 Heavy Remove Slice Slice 3 135 stripe Add Set Remove get The set of data for the slices of pie in the chart A pie chart can have one or more sets If there is more than one set in a Pie chart a pie chart will be drawn comparing the value of each slice across all sets i e multiple pie charts Label Set The label for the set Double click in the adjacent Label box to add the label Value Slice The value of the slice Double click in the adjacent Value box to add a slice value Field If adding a dynamic chart the value can be filled by a field the exact name of the field must be entered Refer to Using Fields to Create a Chart in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Label Slice The label for the slice of pie Field If adding a dynamic chart the label can be filled by a field See above The Paris Designer Reference Manual 455 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Add Slice Click on the Add Slice button to add a slice of pie to the set f NOTE If only one set is added to the pie
269. he mouse and click and place the text cursor when entering or editing text The default setting is for the option to be selected Select the Show Block Numbers checkbox to display the environment s text block numbers These numbers don t print but are useful as a reference The default setting is for the option to be selected The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 2 Functions in the Environment Editor System Menu AUTOSAVE AND SAVE OPTIONS Autosave IV Active Save every 5 minutes OK and Save Cancel Active Selecting the Active checkbox activates autosave for the environment The default setting is autosave Active Enter the required interval number of minutes for Autosave in this text field The default setting is 5 minutes Save every milnuites Look in a Env E iae AUTOSAVE MYNEW ENV Files of type ENv Cancel Once Autosave is active the current environment will be automatically saved at the set interval The Autosave version of any environment file will remain in the Paris Env directory until it is deleted by the user If you select OK any changes you have made to the System settings will apply during the current editor session If you select OK and Save any changes you have made to the System settings will apply each time you open the editor until the OK and Save next time you change them and select OK and Save again 97 The Paris Designer Reference
270. he required environment The selected environment filename will be displayed in the Change To field in the Change Environment Event dialogue 1 Test Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue and set up the test conditions for the Environment Change event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 None And Or Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the 2M Test button 2d Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do I use two tests The Paris Designer Reference Manual 287 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu EDITING AN ENVIRONMENT CHANGE EVENT gt Events menu gt Environment gt View Change Event List Environment Change Events View Change Event List gt Environment Change E vents Add Change Environment x Edit Delete lir The order of the events in the list can be changed by using the Mouse and the Drag and Drop method WARNING Care must be taken with the order of the list of events as each event is applied in sequence according to the list order Either double click on the event or select an event from the list then click on the Edit button to display the selected event s dialogue Select an event from the list to activate the Edit button and c
271. he spelling of Field names check numeric constants for invalid characters and ensure string constants have delimiters Illegal Comma Cause A comma can only occur within the parameter list of a function t separate individual parameters or within a string constant Examples IF F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 comma not in parameter list Correction Remove the comma Unexpected Operator Cause An operator must occur between two operands Examples NUM F1 No operand before F1 F2 F3 No operand between and Correction Remove the extra operator or add a missing operand 216 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Missing Parameter For Function Cause A closing bracket for a function was encountered before the correct number of parameters was found or a comma was found with no preceding parameter Examples SET F1 missing second parameter IF F1 23 missing second parameter IF F1 F2 F3 invalid y after F2 Correction Check the number of parameters required for the function and check the position of closing brackets Too Many Parameters For Function Cause Too many parameters have been specified for a function Examples NUM F1 45 NUM takes only 1 parameter SET F1 23 45 SET takes 2 parameters Correction Check the number of parameters in the function parameter list Invalid Function Call Cause A function name was found b
272. he user to insert code to activate device specific features such as stapling binding collating folding and so on The use of these events requires a thorough understanding of the workings of Post Script commands including the manual editing of XPD files the use of syntax etc Because of their specific application these events and their use are described in Appendix D Device Specific Features in the Paris System in this manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING AND EDITING A PAGE PARA EVENT D gt Events menu gt Page Para c View Change Event List Page Para Events Select Page Para from the Events menu to display the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue Added events are displayed in the Event List dialogue The order of the events in the list can be changed by using the Mouse and the Drag and Drop method WARNING Care must be taken with the order of the list of events as each event is applied in sequence according to the list order View Change Event List r Page Para Events Type i Description FE 1 Form Selection COPY Filecopy Add Change Form E dit Delete Clip Select the event type to be added from the drop down menu and click on the Add button to display the event dialogue An added event is displayed in the list in the View Change Event List dialogue Either Double click on the event Or Se
273. hput Flate Flate uses Zlib flate deflate compression and can be used with PostScript Level 3 printers only It is effective with all types of graphics with compression typically around 65 on color images and 85 on simpler images such as black and white Flate has significant effect on increasing Paris Engine throughput NOTE It is recommended that XPDManageGrafs Download is used with Flate so that graphics are compressed at the beginning of the job thus avoiding the need for graphics to be compressed every time they are used For example to enable zlib deflate flate compression the following line would be added to the XPD XPDGrafCompression Flate If the XPDGrafCompression keyword is not present within the file then the default is None 73 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Support for Printer resident fonts PostScript in Paris Paris supports calling resident fonts from a printer There are two main activities when working with resident Type 1 fonts e Selecting the font in the Designer and e Printing with the font Using Type 1 PostScript fonts under Windows also involves encoding changes to resolve problems caused by international characters and differences between the Windows default character map and the font s internal mapping Refer to the previous section XPD Resource Management Commands for PCL and PostScript printers on page 71 Substitu
274. ibute for the square on the left is Light and light grey has been chosen from the default color palette The square on the right has the fill attribute Solid and the color chosen for the fill is the light grey tone the 4 tablet on the Greyscale Palette Whereas the left square will print with a grainy texture the right will print with a solid texture as can be seen on this page 524 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function HOW IS A COLOR APPLIED TO AN ELEMENT A color is applied to an element by selecting an existing color from a color palette or by mixing a new color in the Custom Palette How iS A COLOR MIXED A color is mixed by in the Custom Palette and added to the values However if any other elements in the environment or form are already using the selected color box they too will change to the mixed color How iS THE CoLoR PALETTE SAVED When you modify a Color Palette then save the environment or form the modified palette is also saved and you do not have to save it as a separate file However if you wish to have the modified palette available for use in any environment or form the palette can be saved as a PAL file When you design a new environment or form the Default palette is loaded by the Paris Designer however you can load and use any palette or PAL file you have previously saved The Paris Designer Reference Manual 525 USING THE COLOR PALETTES ADDING A C
275. ic Graphic Settings PREVIEWING A GRAPHIC BEFORE ADDING A graphic file must be stored in the PARIS GRF directory to be accessible for loading In the Graphic Settings or View Change Graphic dialogue clicking on the Graphic button will display the Select Enter File to Load dialogue The contents of the Grf directory are displayed The dialogue contains a Preview button selecting a graphic and clicking on the Preview button will allow you to see the graphic before adding it to the environment or form Look in a Gif E3 38 MS LOGO LPG an Legh Parr RainDay pcx an Siar an Mall Ea petesigl pcx RainyDayLIMBR pcx SIG mercury pex fa PHONEP LGO FARainyDayUMBR psd gf sir mercury1 pcx fplane bmp Robsig pcx jam a Monk EF plane jpg Robsig1 pcx an TUT Im n File name plane bmp Files of type all Files Cancel Preview lt lt Cond The Paris Designer Reference Manual 411 Chapter 18 Editing Dynamic and Static Graphic Settings SETTING GRAPHIC ATTRIBUTES Loading a Dynamic Graphic Select By If the Select By Name option is chosen the label on the adjacent Name button will be Graphic Attributes Graphic Source Select By Name ect NE Graphic Clicking on the Graphic button will display the Select Enter File to Load dialogue A graphic file must be stored in the PARIS GRF directory to be accessible for loading Loading a dynamic g
276. ields within an environment 550 collate on file boundaries option in output settings 171 183 collate on page boundaries option in output settings 171 183 collate on report boundaries option in output settings 171 183 collate copy sensitive options in output settings their effect on processing 173 color adding a color shade to an element 530 adding to an element 528 529 changing in added text 389 changing in printstream data using a Data Change event 485 mixing a color in a Color Palette 528 mixing in the Custom Palette 533 Color Indexing output settings 181 using 170 Color Palette 522 38 adding color to an element 528 529 Blue Palette 526 Blueshade Palette 526 Custom Palette 524 function 521 Green Palette 526 Greenshade Palette 526 GreyScale Palette 527 loading 523 538 mixing a color 528 533 Red Palette 526 Redshade Palette 526 saving 524 528 537 types available in the Paris Designer 525 using a Paris palette other than the default palette 530 columns changing in printstream data by using a Data Change event 486 comparison operators in field calculations 208 Complex Bar chart adding attributes 441 adding axis settings 448 adding data 443 adding general settings 450 adding headings 446 adding labels 445 adding legend 447 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 607 Index Complex Plot chart adding attributes 426 adding axis settings 433 adding data 428 adding general se
277. ient than other data files as each line must be padded to the fixed length Fixed Length Input Record types of files normally do not contain carriage return line feed and form feed bytes as they are not required Therefore you will usually not have to modify the Input Filter in any way How do I notify Paris of fixed length records If it applies to your data files you will need to notify the Paris Designer that you are using fixed length records with no terminators This is done by selecting CEP Options from the Environment menu to display the View Change Xerox CEP Options dialogue View Change Xerox CEP Options xj r General Options Fixed Length Input Records 128 v Translate Control Bytes Emulate Online JDE New Sheet on Input Tray Change 2 Select the Fixed r Spacing ptions Length CEP Spacing Records Reset Spacing On Page Boundary option Align Overprint Line baselines r DJDE Options Emulate ITEXT OTEXT WAIT Preserve CME Events for BEGIN DJDE Channel Skips generate blank lines R T Event Offset Adjustment o 3 Cancel 2 Select the Fixed Length Input Records option and specify the record length in bytes f NOTE See Appendix C Using Xerox CEP Options 110 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu What are the printable and non printable byte values The printable range of bytes is
278. ifferent environments nor can the fields in one environment refer to fields in another environment in a calculation string To create modify or delete a field the Fields option is selected from the Environment menu This opens the Field List dialogue Selecting the Add button in the Field List dialogue displays the Add Edit Field dialogue Field List xj r Current Fields Name Type Current Value Add Edit Field x Attributes Name FO Type AlphaNumeic Index Reset atPageStat Calculate O O E Values Default Current Cancel 188 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu ADDING AND EDITING A FIELD Yi gt Environmentmenu gt Fields Field List dialogue T Current Fields Name Type Current Value MembName AlphaNumeric Brian MembNum AlphaNumeric AUS 198 1045 AccntNum phaNumeric 001 410 198 1 Avail Currency 89453 Avail8 AlphaNumeric 91 567 Avail3 AlphaNumeric 100 332 Availl0 AlphaNumeric 102 329 zi Add Edit Delete cip Cancel Click on the Add button to display the Add Edit Field dialogue Once a field is added it is displayed in the list in the Current Fields list The order of the Fields in the Field List can be changed by using the Drag and Drop method 1 Using the mouse move the pointer over the required field then click and hold the left mouse button Drag the selec
279. ignment spacing code at the start of every physical page Align Overprint Line Baselines When selected this option causes the text code to attempt to align overprinting text by their baselines The Paris Designer Reference Manual 591 Appendix C Using Xerox CEP Options DJDE OPTIONS Emulate ITEXT OTEXT WAIT OTEXT and ITEXT DJDE can be set with a WAIT parameter e If they have WAIT the printer stops and waits for an operator response e If the OTEXT DJDE does not have a WAIT parameter the message is displayed but the printer does not stop and wait for a response Previously whenever an OTEXT DJDE was encountered the Paris Spooler would stop waiting for a reply even if the OTEXT DJDE did not have a WAIT parameter This change will make the Spooler perform the same way as the printer i e only wait for a response if the WAIT parameter exists in the DJDE Preserve CME Events for BEGIN Selecting this option allows Paris to carry over the CME events from the previous BEGIN when a new DJDE BEGIN is encountered DJDE Channel Skips generate blank lines If Paris encounters a DJDE line with channel skip it is ignored by default If the option is selected on Paris will generate a blank line R T Event Offset Adjustment When a data length statement is extracted from a DJDE record it is adjusted by the value entered here Refer also to Runtime Events in Chapter 7 of this manual 592 The Paris Designer Reference Manual
280. ile field and choose Save If the environment name already exists you will be prompted with an Overwrite Yes No message otherwise the environment will be saved under the new filename Select Enter Save File name 2 xj Save in 3 Env z E a AUTOSAVE DFLTP ENV a AUTOSAVE MYNEW ENV a Dfltl env Dfltp env an MYNEW ENV 2 Type the new filename then MYNEW2 ENV Save as type ENv Cancel File name The Paris Designer Reference Manual 27 RECORDING ENVIRONMENT INFORMATION D c File menu Env Info gt Environment Information 28 dialogue Selecting the Env Info option from the File menu displays the Environment Information dialogue Design and printing information on the current environment file can be recorded in the dialogue Whenever the environment is opened the dialogue can be displayed to confirm and update the information The date and time are automatically updated by the system to reflect the last save Environment Information xj m Design Information Designer Description m Last Changed Date pt 712 2000 Time 4 28 33 m Printing Information User Name PO Title Accounting ee ee O LPR Defaults Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu RECORDING DESIGN INFORMATION DESIGN INFORMATION Selecting the Env Info option from the File
281. ile Information dialogue summarizing the form file 364 File menu functions Environment Editor 24 94 File menu functions Form Editor 357 file size when loading printstream data 46 file Substitution and Font Name Mapping 76 fixed length input records 112 floating dynamic box 410 dynamic chart element Complex Bar 442 dynamic chart element Complex Plot 427 dynamic chart element Pie 456 dynamic chart element Simple Bar 436 dynamic chart element Simple Plot 422 dynamic circle 404 dynamic graphic 415 dynamic line 399 Index dynamic text 392 font changing in printstream data using a Data Change event 485 Font Name Mapping file information 77 re encoding Type 1 font 81 Substitution and Font Name Mapping files 76 Substitution file information 77 support for printer resident PostScript fonts 76 Type 1 making available to Paris 78 Type 1 suggested setup within Paris 80 font index byte 168 font indexes 138 140 Font indexing interpreting the font index byte 168 Font Indexing 138 font index values 169 in print files for 9700 printers 167 output settings 180 using 167 Font List adding fonts 516 creating 514 515 dialogue 517 editing 517 519 loading 517 518 saving 517 518 Font Reference utility using 306 Font Reference Utility 305 font printer resident adding to Paris 79 printing 79 font TrueType how Paris handles TrueType fonts for PostScript printers 82 fonts c
282. illion Praca 0 Click on the Font menu arrow to choose a font from the Font List If you have not already created a Font List refer to Chapter 21 Using the Font List function of this manual Click on the Hide Axis checkbox to hide the X axis E Enter the minimum value for the Y axis in this box Max Enter the maximum value for the Y axis in this box Enter the number of ticks required on the Y axis in this box Enter a label for the ticks on the Y axis Precision Enter 0 1 or 2 decimal places for the values on the Y axis The Paris Designer Reference Manual 437 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the General Settings for a Simple Bar Chart Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Axis General Rotate Chart ivi Rotate Chart Select the Rotate Chart Checkbox to rotate the chart Insert Space Between Select this checkbox to insert a space between the bars ttt 1393 7 1994 1995 1996 14997 cocco o 999 194 c 701995 c c 70996 77 019907 707 7 Simple Bar Chart One Set Simple Bar Chat Five Sets 2 Minen 3 Mion Gon 8 Miliin TOM Mon Simple Bar Chart Rotated 438 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings COMPLEX BAR CHART Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Asis General Style i erm SET gr Left 0 0 Width 0 0 Top 0 0 Height 0 0 Horizontal Property
283. imum lines per text block to move from Text Block 1 to Text Block 2 The solution is to use an End Text Block event Set up two text blocks on the page make the first text block 10 lines and the second text block 1 line This means you will have more than you want in the first text block that is the first name and address the salutation and the second name and address Therefore your next step is to add the End Text Block event For the event set up a test to search for the string Dear in Text Block 1 When the test is true the line containing Dear will be moved to Text Block 2 and your formatting has been achieved The Paris Designer Reference Manual 260 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu End Text Block Event xj r Description Jump to TBA m Test Blocks NEXT Add 5 Clear Tests 1st Test NONE 2nd Test Cancel You can also have an application that has many text blocks defined on the page and you wish certain data to always appear in a specific text block Our second example illustrates such a situation Example 2 Your application has many text blocks defined on the page Normally on full pages the Total Amount Due is in a specific text block let s call it Text Block 5 On some pages there may not be enough data to fill all the text blocks but you still require the Total Amount Due to be in Text Block 5 This can be done by setting
284. ine 2 Number of Lines n Specified Range and the line and characters First Char 49 Number of Chars 11 to be overwritten are already displayed 1st Hest NONE 7nd Test Cancel Total Miles Available 52303 Previoustotal Ls 100332 Newmiles sees 13447 Click on OK to toe return to the 31 476 Environment Editor The text block is displayed with Statementdate the font and text changed Last statement date 12 Oct 97 according to 12 Anr 98 the added Data p 36 Change Event 494 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings How ARE UPDATE FIELD EVENTS USED Update Field events are used to fill or increment the current value of a field by loading data from the printstream into the specified field An Update Field event is added to the text block from which the data is to be extracted WARNING In the design of an environment Update field events must be added to a text block before Data Change events are added Update Field Event xj r Description r Options Field I Update Fi First Line 1 Num Lines fi First Char 1 Num Chars 255 The printstream data to be used to fill or increment a field is specified in the Update Field Event dialogue When extracting the data from the printstream the options to Update a field are Fill and Increment
285. ing the Font List function ADDING FONTS TO THE FONT LIST Font Font style Times New Roman Regular T Teletype O Tempus Sans ITC FH Transistor Treasure O Trebuchet MS Sample AaBbYyZz Script Westem M This is an OpenType font This same font will be used on both your printer and your screen To add a font to the Font List choose a Font Style and Size then choose OK Z NOTE The Designer s font handling capacities allow TrueType PostScript and Bitmap fonts to be used in an environment Depending on the configuration of your PC you may not be able to see all the fonts available in the Font dialogue If a GDI printer driver is selected for the PC bitmap fonts will not appear in the Font List Refer to ic aa i Re Duce tape ca Printer Resources in Chapter 1 of this manual Font The Font list contains the fonts available on your PC Font style The Font styles listed are those available for the selected font The size required for the font can be selected from the size list or entered in the Size field The Paris Designer Reference Manual 513 LOADING EDITING AND SAVING THE FONT LIST A font list that has been created can be edited saved and loaded into other environments or forms via the View Change Font List dialogue The View Change Font List dialogue can be displayed as follows Default Text Settings dialogue gt Edit Font list button gt View Change Font L
286. ings from the pop up menu Or Select the printer then the Settings button The View Change Printer dialogue will be displayed Modify the existing settings as required 2 Choose OK when finished View Change Printer x Printer File Name SALES Full Name s ales Dept Type Generic PCL5 43 Duplex Rebuild Printer List Dutput To LPT1 Settings Resources Id ja Update Reset Never Media Mapping m Physical Page Shift Horizontal o Vertical o OU Cancel 90 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Removing a printer 91 A print destination can be removed from the list in the View Change Printers dialogue To remove a printer 1 Either Click on the print destination to be removed then click on the Remove button Or Right mouse click on the print destination to be removed then choose Remove from the pop up menu A message dialogue will appear requesting confirmation of the removal 2 Choose OK to remove the destination from the list in the View Change Printers dialogue Or Right mouse click on the print destination to be removed then choose Remove from Printers the pop up menu iew Change Printers Xerox DocuPrint N32PCL5 LPT1 Generic PCL5 Simplex LPT1 E Document volor Canon BubbleJet BJC 7000 LPT 1 Xerox NPS4850 LPT1 Generic PCL5
287. ings x r Attributes Source ERRA Name Field Rotation None Watermark Active Color al m Properties Horizontal Fixed Vertical Fixed r Frame Active Width 0 0 Height 0 0 Alignment Horizontal Left z Vertical l Top he Vertical Fixed z Height 0 0 Scale to fit frame postscript printing only ent Horizontal Let M Ges F3 Vertical Top Y Scale ta fit frame postscript printing only Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 409 Chapter 18 Editing Dynamic and Static Graphic Settings Default Graphic Settings xj Attributes Name Graphic Rotation oe sr Watermark Active c MEN Frame Active Width 0 0 Height 0 0 Align in frame Horizontal Les z Vertical Top 7 Scale to fit frame postscript printing only The Default Graphic Settings dialogue when adding a Static Graphic to a form no Field or Properties options VIEW CHANGE GRAPHIC DIALOGUE Selecting the View tool then clicking on an added Graphic element will display the View Change Graphic dialogue When changing a Dynamic Graphic element in an environment the View Change Graphic dialogue displays the current Properties setting for the element 410 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 18 Editing Dynamic and Stat
288. ints as the first set with the same labels for each point Enter the required value for each point in the added set Click on the Remove Set button to remove a set from the chart The Paris Designer Reference Manual 427 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Labels to a Complex Plot Chart x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General MV Show Data Labels ode Rotate None Cancel Apply Show Data Click on the Show Data Labels checkbox to show the data values Labels at each point in the set Border The data label border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Rotate The rotation of the data labels in degrees Choose None Rotate 90 or Rotate 270 428 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Headings to a Complex Plot Chart x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Header v Show red Percentage of transport type used in each city Font Arial m 12 Regular Border None Footer Show Tex Fontj Arial Y 12 Regular Border None Click on the Show checkbox to show the header for the chart Enter the required header text in the Text box Choose the required Font Size and Style for the header from each drop down menu The Header border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Click on the Show checkbox to show the footer for the chart Enter th
289. ion files for EBCDIC and ASCII are available for loading Character Translation tables created and saved in other environments will also be displayed and can be loaded if required Select Enter File To Load Look in 3 Env z E3 an Ascii tlt Files of type mtr Cancel 142 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE INPUT SETTINGS FUNCTION Input settings determine how many characters bytes or lines are to be ignored at the start of each report in a print job In this context a report is a logical split in the job You can also set up the number of times a page is to be repeated for example where you are using multi part stationery in a line printer The environment processes each physical page the set number of times Each copy of the page will be treated as a separate output page allowing the use of cycle forms and cycle page definitions iew Change Input Settings I x Skip at start of Report Bytes 0 Lines 0 Input Processor Plug In No Input Processing m Settings No Special Input Processing has been selected Cancel WHAT IS THE FUNCTION OF INPUT SETTINGS The View Change Input Settings dialogue provides the following functions e Skip at start of Report used to skip or remove a number of bytes or print lines at the start of each job e Input Processor Plug In The Paris Designer Reference Manual 143 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Men
290. ion onto the printed page or for testing These values are the same as the original text insertion values that can be added to a Data Change event and inserted into a page and are in addition to the Data Change options They have been added to the Field system to allow them to be used in static text blocks and to allow more control over the actual formatting of the values Current Date To insert the date that the current print run was started add the following to the calculation string RunDate option where option is a numeric value controlling the formatting of the date 0 ddmmyy 1 ddmmyyyy 2 mmddyy 3 mmddyyyy 4 ddmmmyyyy 5 mmmddyyyy 6 ddmtextyyyy 7 mtextddyyyy Current Time To insert the time that the current print run was started add the following to the calculation string RunTime option where option is a numeric value controlling the formatting of the time 0 24 hour clock 1 12 clock no am pm indicator 2 12 clock am pm indicator Current Page Number To insert the current Page Number add the following to the calculation string RunPage Current Report Number To insert the current report number add the following to the calculation string RunReport The Paris Designer Reference Manual 219 THE INDEXING FUNCTION The Indexing option in the Environment menu is ghosted not available unless you have purchased the optional Paris DI Document Interface System
291. ion section of the dialogue POSITION r Attributes r Position Font Arial 12 Reaular 57 0 dts Add Relative Frame Spacing 570 Dots Reset Edit font ist Left 35 0 Rotate None x Top 10 0 Color pe Width 9 1999 Sample Height 1 1200 123 ABC xyz Horizontal Justify e z Vertical Justify Top X r Options Description Text ines per page 66 Data Overflow A Events View Change Overflow Page Data Clipping Active Settings Overlow Form Blank Lines Print w T n o w m D C d OPTIONS Editing the settings for each is described on the following pages 464 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings SETTING THE TEXT BLOCK ATTRIBUTES m Attributes Font Line Printer 3 Regular 0 1399 in Add Spacing 0 1399 JInch Reset E dit font list Rotate None coo a Setting the Font Attributes Font The font displayed in the font field is the current font for the text block To change the font use the arrow adjacent to the Font field to display the font list and select a font f NOTE Editing the font in a text block is explained in Changing the Font in Chapter 5 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Spacing The Spacing fields show the font s vertical line spacing and the unit of measurement for the line spacing Use the arrow ad
292. ions 241 43 using 232 using the Mask 233 using two 240 244 text alignment 391 alignment using the Tools Bar 393 changing the color of added text 389 dynamic floating 392 resizing 392 617 Index editing 386 94 attributes 388 dynamic properties 392 position 390 justifying 391 justifying in a frame 390 pasting copied text into Paris 394 rotating 388 word wrapping 389 word wrapping using the Tools Bar 393 Text Block blank lines handling 472 editing options 471 editing the position 469 Relative option using 470 setting the font attributes 467 settings 466 using the overflow option 473 Text Block element editing 464 513 text block event 475 Change Back Form 507 Change Form 504 copying 513 copying from the Clipboard 548 copying onto the Clipboard 546 Data Change 476 deleting 513 editing 512 513 Select Device Features 510 601 Update Field 498 text editing menu 105 Tools menu functions Form Editor 382 Translate Control Bytes option 139 Translation Table 131 44 application 137 control bytes 138 encoding systems 132 133 in an environment 136 loading 144 modifying 134 modifying a character 143 saving 144 using 141 TrueType fonts how Paris handles them for PostScript printers 82 Type 1 font re encoding 81 Type 1 font making available to Paris 78 Type 1 font suggested setup within Paris 80 type list for printers about 59 U unpacking resource
293. ironment Events option to select a device specific feature 1 Open the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue and choose Select Device Features from the drop down menu 2 Click on the Add button to display the Select Device Features Event dialogue and click on the arrow to the left of the Add button to display the list of added Device Specific features The Testonly xpd file would produce the list illustrated in the dialogue below Select Device Features Event x r Description E IND m Device Specific Features Entry selected from the drop down list Binding amp holding insert in Page Header Binding amp holding Page Add Remove 3 Select the required entry from the list then choose the Add button The selected entry will be displayed in the dialogue 4 Choose OK to return to the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue where the selected feature will be displayed View Change Event List P x m Page Para Events Type Options Description 1 Select Device Features BIND i Select Device Features Edit Delete Clip Exit The Paris Designer Reference Manual 603 INDEX INDEX 9700 option translate control bytes 139 using 591 9700 printers font indexing in print files 167 A about printer type list 59 using the Euro functions in the Euro Rates utility 322 about the Paris Designer 354 access levels in t
294. is assumed to be negative For example Input String Negative Char Result String 1 234 56 P or 9 1234 56 1 234 56 DB D or B 1234 56 4f NOTE STR2CUR is not a validating function It is assumed that the input data is valid and has already been processed by the report generator that created the input file The Paris Designer Reference Manual 321 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer The CUR2STR function The CUR2STR function is used to convert a plain currency into a formatted string The syntax of the function is CUR2STR string decimal character thousands character precision negative option string a string containing an unformatted currency e g 1234 56 decimal char X the character to use as the decimal separator e g thousands char the character to use as the thousands separator e g precision the number of digits that must appear to the right of the decimal point The number must be between 2 and 6 inclusive negative option can be one of the following options FRONT negative values print with a leading char BACK negative values print with a trailing char BRACKETS negative values are enclosed in and Y This returns A string containing the original value with formatting added e g 1 234 56 Sample CUR2STR 1234 56 2 FRONT would return 1 234 56 Uses 322
295. is responsible for establishing its current value Date Set The Date Set is automatically generated by the system clock on your PC indicating the day the conversion rate was added This attribute cannot be edited 310 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Verify The number of days from the Date Set that you wish to be notified of the need to check the set conversion rate This is done by the Spooler before a job is printed The default setting for the Verify field is 1 You are strongly advised not to change the setting e If you do wish to change the setting to more than one day you may do so by entering the required number of days in the Verify field e If you do not wish to be notified you can set the Verify field to 0 zero The Paris Designer Reference Manual 311 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Viewing Conversion Rates gt To view Euro Conversion Rates Click on the Utilities menu in the Environment Editor and choose Euro Rates from the menu to display the Select Euro Access Level dialogue Choose View Conversion Rates from the drop down menu then choose OK The View Change Euro Conversion Rates dialogue will be displayed 3 Use the scroll bar to scroll through the list and view each of the fixed Euro rates and the ISO currency code e g IEP Ireland Make a note of the required currency code and rate then choose OK to close the utility
296. ist dialogue View Change Text Settings dialogue YO gt Edit Font list button gt View Change Font List dialogue Default Text Block Settings dialogue gt Edit Font list button gt View Change Font List dialogue View Change Text Block Settings dialogue VD gt edit Font list button gt View Change Font List dialogue View Change Font List x m Font List Line Printer 3 0 1399 Arial 10 Regular 47 0 dts Arial 10 Bold D 2 in Arial 10 Italic 48 0 dts Arial 10 Bold Italic 5 0 Ipi Arial 9 Regular 42 0 dts Arial 3 Bold 42 0 dts Arial 8 Regular 38 0 ds Load Save Delete Clip 514 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 21 Using the Font List function LOADING THE FONT LIST Select the Load button to open a standard Select Enter File to Load dialogue FLT to load a pre defined set of fonts for the environment Look in a Fnt z E3 Select the required font file from the list then choose OK File name M SAVE FLT Files of type FLT Cancel SAVING THE FONT LIST Select the Save button to open a standard Select Enter save File Name dialogue to save the font list to a file The saved font file can be loaded for use in other environments Select Enter Save File name Save in C Fnt z EJ 38 MSAVE FLT Save the font list as an FLT file File name INVOICE FLT Save as type FLT Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 515 Chapter 2
297. jacent to the Spacing field to display the units of measurement list The options are Inches Centimeters Dots 1 300 of an inch or 300 dots per inch Points 1 72 of an inch a standard unit of measure for typeface sizes per Inch per Centimeter 4f NOTE The measurement selected should conform to the grid settings selected for the environment refer to Setting the Grid Line Spacing in Chapter 3 of the Paris Designer User s Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 465 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Edit Font List ud mi 466 The Add button allows you to add a font to the font list Click on the Add button to display the Select Font dialogue Refer to Creating a Font List in Chapter 21 f NOTE The number of fonts and styles used in a job should be kept to the minimum possible It is advisable to delete any unwanted fonts from the font list See Edit Font List below The Edit Font List button displays the View Change Font List dialogue This dialogue allows you to view and change the font list Refer to Editing the Font List on page 516 Choosing the Reset button will restore the unit of measurement not the size for the currently displayed font to the default measurement setting Use the arrow adjacent to the Rotate field to display the rotate list The rotate list provides you with the option to rotate the font in 90 degree steps 90 180 270 The color of the text in a text
298. k It is also important to note that unlike local text block events page para events will be applied to ALL text blocks on the page All line references in a page para event are relative to each text block that is Line 6 refers to Line 6 in each text block on the page Similarly if the test conducted is for a line range the line range is text block related For example if the first line in the range is Line 6 and the number of lines to be tested is 3 then the test would apply to Lines 6 7 and 8 in each text block on the page A Page Para event will make the changes indicated by testing the printstream data for a particular condition specified by one or two tests e The test is applied to the whole printstream and causes the appropriate change to be applied to the current page only e Page Para events are applied to the input printstream data before any text block editing or local text block events are added e The given condition is applied to all text blocks on the page The Paris Designer Reference Manual 243 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu TYPES OF PAGE PARA EVENTS 244 Each Page Para Event type is as follows Change Form Change Back Form Change Page Definition Change Output Event List End Current Page End Text Block Select Input Paper Tray Select Output Paper Tray Update Field Select Device Features See NOTE Page Delete f NOTE Select Device Features Events are specific events that allow t
299. l 56 69 81 87 88 89 92 CHAPTER 2 FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR SYSTEM MENU DEFINING THE SYSTEM SETTINGS The Grid Edit Options Autosave and Save Options VIEWING THE DOCUMENT SWITCHING EDITORS PREVIEWING A DOCUMENT BEFORE PRINTING CHAPTER 3 FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR VIEW AND TOOLS MENUS ViEW MENU TooLs MENU CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS IN THE TEXT EDITING MENU TEXT EDITING OPTIONS The Paris Designer Reference Manual Contents 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 101 102 103 104 Contents CHAPTER 5 FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT MENU 107 THE INPUT FILTER FUNCTION 109 Why is an Input Filter needed 109 Do need to modify the Input Filter for my print files 120 When would not use the standard Input Filter values 121 Using the Input Filter to set the character functions 122 How do Input Character settings interact with PCC byte instructions Spacing Settings 128 THE TRANSLATION TABLE FUNCTION 129 What is the purpose of a Translation Table and why is it needed 130 What are the translation tables supplied with the Paris Designer 132 What is the scope of the Translation Table 134 At what stage of processing is the Translation Table applied 135 What relevance does the Translation Table have to Control Bytes 136 How is the Translate Control Bytes option turned on and off 137 Using the Translation Table 139 THE INPUT SETTINGS FUNCTION 143 What is
300. layed 1 Select the queue View Change Novell Queues Current Members C Users Servers Ops Available Queues INVOICES Q CREDITNOTE_Q REPORT_Q 2 Click on the Ops radio button then click on the Add button The Paris Designer Reference Manual 585 Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris 3 Select the required user name from the list of Available Members then choose OK Select Queue Member Es Available Members EVERYONE GROUP 3 Select the required i GRE user name then choose OK MANAGEMENT GROU ACCOUNTING GROUF SUPERVISOR USER 7 The added user name will be displayed in the Current Members list in the View Change Novell Queues dialogue View Change Novell Queues Ed Current Members C Users Servers Ops TECH SUPPORT GROUP Available Queues INVOICES Q CREDITNOTE Q REPORT Q 586 The Paris Designer Reference Manual APPENDIX C USING XEROX CEP OPTIONS Appendix C USING XEROX CEP OPTIONS The CEP Options menu is opened by selecting CEP Options from the Environment menu or by pressing the F6 function key x M General Options c c n Fixed Length Input Records 128 Environment v Translate Control Bytes Input Filter Emulate Online JDE Translation Table New Sheet on Input Tray Change Inpu
301. layed 1 Select the queue View Change Novell Queues rCurrent Members C Users Servers C Ops Available Queues INVOICES Q CREDITNOTE_Q REPORT Q 2 Click on the Servers radio button then click on the Add button The Paris Designer Reference Manual 583 Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris 3 Select the required user name from the list of Available Members then choose OK Select Queue Member x Available Members TECH SUPPORT GR 3 Select the required user name then choose OK The added user name will be displayed in the Current Members list in the View Change Novell Queues dialogue View Change Novell Queues Ed Available Queues Curent Members l C Users Servers C Ops INVOICES Q CREDITNOTE_Q REE REPORT_Q iae e 584 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris Setting the queue Operators list The Operators list is the list of users who will have Operator access to the queue It is possible to specify user groups 1 Select the required queue from the Available Queues list 2 Click on the Ops radio button in the Current Members section of the dialogue then click on the Add button in the same section The Select Queue Member dialogue will be disp
302. ld be given two features one of which is a null code The Job is then created calling for both features For example Printer 1 XPDFeature JobComment Binding1 Requirements binding true XPDFeature JobCode Binding2 Printer 2 XPDFeature JobComment Binding1 XPDFeature JobCode Binding2 binding true setpagedevice The job would call for both Bindingl and Binding2 and would then print correctly on both printers The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris EXAMPLE OF AN XPD FILE USING DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURES The following example XPD file illustrates the use of device specific features and follows Adobe PPD syntax Testonly xpd ModelName Testonly XLPInputMedia Upper XLPInputMedia Lower Job Level Code hook XLPInputMedia Middle et eee se XLPInputMedia Tray4 XPDManageFonts Download XPDManageForms Download XPDManageGrafs Download XPD XJTVersion 0200 XPDFeature JobCode Binding wi binding setpagedevice XPDFeature XJT Binding amp bonding 76 XRXbinding via job ticket XPDFeature JobCommentBinding amp Whipping 7626 Requirements binding XPDFeature Page Binding amp holding 1 binding setpagedevice Include D PARISRRT X48 Job Level Comment hook Page Preamble hook f NOTE 1 The above example is only to demonstrate what the entries look like The PostScript commands are not necessarily cor
303. le 13 Typein the Text View Hex View model data Pi N QUEENSTOWN 865 LZw 02 10 00 04 10 00 30 75 05 10 00 10 10 00 28 50 15 10 00 38 50 28 70 250 00 47 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu 4 To save the file you have created select the Save button to display the Select Enter Save File Name DTA dialogue You can choose the required view of the files list details etc by clicking on the View Menu icon in the header of the dialogue Either Type a new name for the file in the File field give the file a DTA extension or To overwrite an existing file choose the filename from the File List The filename will appear in the Selected File field Choose Save The file will be saved to the PARIS DTA default directory Save in Dta t Ck EJ a Ms stat dta Filename INVSAMPLE DTA Save as type Jal Files Cancel Choose this button to exit the Edit Data File dialogue and return to the Environment Editor To load your model printstream file into the Environment Editor and create an environment use the Open Data option in the File menu 48 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu EDITING THE CURRENTLY LOADED MODEL SAMPLE DATA FILE After you have created your model printstream file your next step is to load the file into the Environment Editor and create an environment
304. le 5 4 Font Index Values 167 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu How DOES COLOR INDEXING WORK Color indexing works the same way as font indexing see p 165 that is a single byte in the incoming data is indexed to a list In this case the list is a list of colors rather than a list of fonts e The font and color index byte can be the same byte or separate bytes e The color index byte indexes to the Paris color palette The palette consists of 16 squares and is numbered from left to right and top to bottom starting from either 1 one or 0 zero e The maximum number of colors that can be indexed is 16 IN o immu START B r1 0 or 1 EDEN Options Left gt Right As with the Font Indexing option Color Indexing is calculated from the four lower order bits of the color index byte see Table 5 4 Font Index Values on page 167 for details 168 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu How DO USE THE COPIES OPTIONS In the Copies section of the View Change Output Settings dialogue three different types of collation are offered in the drop down menu e Collate on Page Boundaries e Collate on Report Boundaries e Collate on File Boundaries Collate on Page Boundaries This is the same as the Xerox CEP Uncollated option Basically a copy count of 3 will cause the final output to con
305. lect an event from the list then click on the Edit button to display the selected event s dialogue The Paris Designer Reference Manual 245 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Delete Select an event from the list then click on the Delete button A dialogue will display requesting confirmation of the deletion Clip Select the Clip button to display the Internal Clipboard The Clipboard allows you to copy events to and from other environments The use of the Internal Clipboard is described in Common Functions in the Paris Designer in Part Four of this manual NOTE Right mouse click on an event to display the Edit Delete and Clip pop up menu Choose the required option from the menu 246 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE PAGE PARA CHANGE FORM EVENT FUNCTION Change Form events are added to an environment before any text block editing or text block events are applied to the data WHEN WOULD USE A PAGE PARA CHANGE FORM EVENT The Paris Designer offers both Page Para Change Form events and Local Text Block Change Form events For reasons of control it is better to conduct form changes in text blocks as local text block events Remember any type of Page Para event is conducted on every text block on a page whereas a local text block event is conducted on its associated text block only For example For instance if you know the condition to test for such as the words Water Sports but do
306. lement tool is selected from the Tools Bar The Paris Designer Reference Manual 101 TOOLS MENU The options in the Tools menu produce the same editing tools as the buttons on the Tools Bar The options offer both mouse and control key activation of the tools m Selecting a tool option from the Tools menu activates the tool this will be indicated in the Tools Bar The currently active tool is indicated in the Tools menu by a black dot m Selecting the Tool Settings option will display the Default Settings dialogue for the tool that is currently active Each tool s Default Settings and View Change Settings dialogue is explained in Part Three of this manual The use of the tools to add dynamic or static form elements is explained in Chapters 10 and 11 respectively of the Paris Designer User s Manual Use the shortcut Select the Tools s keys to activate Meg to Add Text CUT the Tool the Tool Add Line Ctl L Add Box CH B Add circle ctl R Add Graphic Ctl I Add Chart Ctl H Add Text Block Ctl o Group Ct G Select this option or 4 Tool Settings Cts use the shortcut keys Ctl S to display the Move CteM Default Settings Delete Ct D dialogue for the Copy Ctl C active tool View Change Ctl V Edit The Paris Designer Reference Manual 102 CHAPTER 4 3 gt Text Editing FUNCTIONS IN THE TEXT EDITING MENU The Text Editing menu displays the options and associated shortc
307. ler is achieved simply by loading and printing the file Resource Manager Resource Name Resource Type Log Activity SEE Opening the Resource Manager utility will display the Resource Manager dialogue which contains five buttons options These are New Add Open Extract and Done The Done button exits the user from the Resource Manager The dialogue contains two views where information is displayed The upper view displays the names and types of the resources that have been packed whereas the lower view is a log view that simply displays a log of each pack session There is also an Activity display that animates during the pack unpack process The Paris Designer Reference Manual 290 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu How DOES RESOURCE PACKING WORK The packing process does not pack the file in the normal sense that is the file does not become smaller It uses a form of sixel encoding to ensure all characters in the file are in the normal printable character image This prevents any character integrity problems if the file is transferred from PC to host and back again this is especially important as the fields to be transferred are often font or graphic files which contain a large percentage of non printable characters When the file is unpacked a reverse form of sixel encoding is done to return the file to its original state Packing and unpacking resources can be done in any order For e
308. lettes pal S Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 22 The Color Palette function LOADING A COLOR PALETTE PAL FILE You can load any of the Paris supplied color palettes or if you have mixed and saved a color as a PAL file you can load the file and apply it to any environment or form gt To load a color PAL file 1 Open the 16 Color Palette and select Options to display the Palette Options dialogue Palette Options x Save Palette Custom Palette 2 Choose Load Palette from the dialogue to display the Select Enter File To Load dialogue Look in A Env E at Blue pal Blushade pal Red pal Default pal an Redshade pal Green pal Greyscal pal Grnshade pal Filename MYNEW PAL Files of type Color Palettes pal Cancel 3 Choose the required file from the list and choose Open The Paris Designer Reference Manual 535 CHAPTER 22 THE INTERNAL CLIPBOARD FUNCTION The Paris Designer provides a Clipboard for copying or moving local text block events page definitions fonts or fields These objects can be placed onto the Clipboard and copied to other environments or in the case of fonts copied to other environments or forms e Each object has a specific Clipboard which can hold several like objects e Objects can be added copied and deleted without losing existing objects on the clipboard
309. lick on the Edit button to display the event s dialogue to edit the event Refer to the section Adding an Environment Change Event for instructions on using the Change Environment event dialogue Delete Select an event from the list to activate the Delete button then click on the Delete button to delete the event A message dialogue will be displayed requesting confirmation or cancellation of the deletion NOTE Right mouse click on an event to display the Edit and Delete pop up menu Choose the required option from the menu This option is not available for Change Environment events 288 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 8 8 gt Utilities FUNCTIONS IN THE UTILITIES MENU The utilities accessed from the Utilities menu are Resource Manager Font Reference Euro Rates and Environment Dump Utilities Resource Manager F2 Font Reference F3 Euro Rates F4 Environment Dump 289 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE RESOURCE MANAGER The Resource Manager Utility provides an easy mechanism for the distribution of Paris resources from one system to another Its most important role is to gather all the resources from a newly developed or modified application in the Paris Designer and write it to a file When sent to the Paris Spooler and unpacked this file automatically updates the Spooler s directory structure with all the files required for this newly designed application The unpacking function in the Spoo
310. ll Name Both names must be entered and each is entered in the relevant box in the View Change Printer dialogue File Name The File Name default setting NEWPRT is used to identify the printer in the Paris system and must be a valid DOS filename up to 8 characters and must also be unique For example MRKTL3 Full Name The Full Name is displayed in the Printer list in the Select Printer and View Change Printers dialogues The default setting is NEW PRINTER Up to 16 characters can be used Spaces are allowed For example Marketing L3 57 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Printer Type The Type field displays the default printer driver The Type refers to the physical printer to which formatted output is to be directed and is displayed with the printers Full Name in the Select Printer and View Change Printers dialogue The printer type is selected from the Type drop down list in the View Change Printers dialogue The printers available in the list vary according to the configuration of the PC on which the Spooler is running Usually the list is broken into three general types differentiated by small graphic symbols as follows e HP PCL type printers indicated by the BLUE HP symbol e Adobe Postscript printers indicated by the RED stylized Adobe A e Available Windows devices indicated by the Windows symbol 37 Generi
311. lls in the page definition for Page 1 When the test is no longer satisfied e g on Page 2 Page 3 and so on it would revert to the page definition in the Print Order The page definition for Page 1 could be landscape orientation printing on letterhead stock from tray 1 while the page definitions for the remaining pages could be portrait orientation printing on stock from tray 2 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 251 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING CHANGE PAGE DEFINITION EVENT S Events menu gt Page Para gt Change Page Definition gt Add In the View Change Event List dialogue select Change Page Definition from the drop down menu then the Add button to display the Change Page Def Event dialogue 3 xi Description m Page Def Change To End Current Page 1st Test None ZndiTest Cancel Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list Select the Change To button to display the Select Page Def dialogue for selection of the required page def Select the required pagedef internal or external then the Add button to display the pagedef in the Change To field Change To End Current e Ifthe test is True and the End Current Page option is enabled Page the line satisfying the test becomes the first line of the new physical page If the test is True and the End Current Page option is disabled
312. logue The first step is to add a Field to the Field List 1 105 Select the Fields option from the Environment menu to display the Field List dialogue Select the Add button and enter the Field Name in the Add Edit Field dialogue Choose OK Add Edit Field X Attributes Name AreaCode 00 Type aMpNumic o Index Reset aPageStm e Calculate PO 2 Values Default Current Select the Edit tool from the Tools Bar then click on the text block from which the text is to be extracted Click to place the cursor at the beginning of the required text and press Ctl M The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 4 Functions in the Text Editing Menu 5 Use the arrow keys to mark the required text Once the text is marked it will appear on your screen in RED press Ctl U The Update Field Event dialogue will be displayed showing the Line and Character position and length of the marked text 6 Click on the Field button to display the Field List and select the previously added field from the list Choose OK The field will be displayed in the Update Field Event dialogue Current Fields Name Type Current Value 4 Month2 Month3 Month4 Month5 Month6 AreaCode Field List 3 x Currency Currency Currency Currency Currenc AlphaNumeric Add Edit Delete Clip 7 Enter a description for the event an
313. lt S kl c Save Button If you have made changes to the current environment you can save the changes by selecting Save Env from the File menu using the shortcut keys Alt S or clicking on the Save button in the Files Bar Save Button Paris Environraent Editor MYNEW iew Tools Text Editing Environment Move Utilities Events Help m SHE Q SHBRB AQAOA lt o gt If no changes have been made to the environment the option will not be available in the menu and the Save button will be inactive in the Files Bar If you want to save an environment under another name or create a new environment the Save Env As option is used refer to the following section f NOTE If you try to exit the Designer without saving an environment you have changed a message dialogue will appear You can choose to save or discard any changes you have made The Paris Designer Reference Manual SAVING AN ENVIRONMENT UNDER A NEW NAME Yi C File menu 7 Save Env As amp gt AIE A C Select Enter Save File Name dialogue Selecting the Save Env As option or using the shortcut keys Alt A displays the Select Enter Save File Name ENV dialogue to save an environment under another name or create a new environment To save an environment under a new name 1 Open the File menu and choose Save Env As from the menu or press Alt A The Select Enter Save File Name dialogue will be displayed 2 Type the new filename in the F
314. lue 194 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu by a Calculation String A value can to stored in a field by using the SET function in a calculation string refer to Field Calculations on page 201 for full details on creating calculations and Functions on page 209 for more information on the SET function System values such as the current date time page number and report number can also be used within the Calculation string of a Field Refer to Inserting System Values into Fields on page 219 by a Runtime Event The Runtime Event VAL can be used to assign a value to a Field The syntax for this event is XLP VAL fieldname fieldvalue END Any VAL events encountered are applied at the next physical page boundary The value of the named field is replaced by the new value This is equivalent to an Update Field event of type Fill The Paris Designer Reference Manual 195 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Using a Field s Value There are several ways in which the value of a field can be used when constructing a page e Insert the value into dynamic text attached to a text block e Insert the value into a text block e Use the value to select a graphic for placement on the page e Use the value as a point in a chart e Use the value in the calculation of another field e Create an index entry in an archive to insert a field into text gt
315. m the Events menu to display the dialogue Runtime Events 7 m Options IV Events are Active Offset jo Skip E Text XLP Save Text As EBCDIC I Implied ENDJOB Ignore Parser Warnings r Runtime E vent Modifications Display Modification results in Designer Description Condition Acton Rest amp Options Events are Active Selecting the Events are Active checkbox will cause Paris to search for the Runtime events command sequences that are embedded in the printstream data When False any runtime event records will be printed as normal data and will not be acted upon Offset The value entered in the Offset field tells Paris the starting position from the first position in the record for the Runtime event identifier The count starts from 0 zero that is the first character in the record is the character 0 zero not 1 one The Paris Designer Reference Manual 277 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Skip The value entered in the Skip field tells Paris the starting position from the first position in the record for the actual content of the Runtime event command sequence As with the Offset this starts at 0 zero For example in the Runtime command sequence XIL ORMS INVOICE END 01 the Offset would be 0 zero as the identifier XLP begins in the 1 position the Skip value would be 5 as the content FORMS begins in the 6 position Text
316. me events 282 modifying Input Filter 122 job ticket for an environment 31 32 printer 56 92 Translation Table 134 143 Move Menu functions Environment Editor 230 multiple licenses 353 N NEXTFILE appending the Number to the file name or extension 66 defining output settings 65 Maximum File Number 66 Name and Extension 66 Path 66 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 613 Index selecting as the printer output destination 65 Novell print queues capturing printstream data 35 40 41 42 creating 581 creating for input 582 preparing for input 584 O opening environment 26 operands in field calculations 210 constants 210 field names 210 functions 211 Operator Messages 223 25 using 225 operators in field calculations 205 arithmetic 206 comparison 208 ouput settings using the engine to handle copy requests 175 using the printer to handle copy requests 175 output settings effect of collate copy sensitive options on processing 173 engine and output device handling in copy processing 175 FORM and BFORM options 174 RTEXT and RFORM options 174 Output Settings 165 83 collate on file boundaries 171 183 collate on page boundaries 171 183 collate on report boundaries 171 183 color indexing 181 copies options using 171 copy sensitive processing 172 183 event handling suppressing generated blank lines 182 font indexing 180 page printing 177 printline size 179 using 176
317. measure The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 2 Functions in the Environment Editor Systems Menu Visible If the Visible box is checked the grid displays as a dotted array The grid can be made visible whether active or not as a visual aid to the positioning of elements If the Active box is checked an element being placed will automatically align to the nearest grid line ensuring consistent alignment and positioning of elements The Half option is only effective if the Active box is checked Selecting the Half checkbox turns on grid points half way between the horizontal and vertical units This assists in more exact positioning of elements The half way points do not display EDIT OPTIONS Auto Scroll With Cursor Show Block Numbers 96 Edit Options Movement Can move in both directions Y v Auto Scroll With Cursor Show Block Numbers The Movement pop up menu provides options for the control of the horizontal and vertical movement of elements This is useful for precise placement of related elements and groups of elements The grid settings do not affect the behavior of this option Can move in both directions allows unrestricted placement of elements Can only move vertically restricts movement to Vertical only Can only move horizontally restricts movement to Horizontal only Select the Auto Scroll With Cursor checkbox to be able to move the pointer around freely with t
318. method of placing the cursor and using the Ctl F and Ctl M keys Refer to the example on page 488 Data Change Event x r Description What To Change V Color iz v Font Line Printer 3 Regular IV Text V Position 0 0 Width 0 0 Justify Let Iv Case To Upper Case When To Change Across SpecifiedRange First Line Ez Number of Lines i First Char 1l Number of Chars ai Tst Test _ NONE v 2nd Test Cancel 474 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings When can changes be made with a Data Change event To Change Across Specified Range pps pe eS At Test Position Across Test Range Across Specified Range Across Range If Test Satisfied At Position Within Range The When To Change drop down menu in the Data Change Event dialogue displays the options for when and where the changes are to take place and are related to line and character positions and ranges in the text block The options increase in complexity from the first option in the list At Specified Position to the final option At Position Within Range Depending on the option chosen the Line and Character fields and Test buttons are activated At Specified Position When To Change Jat Specified Position First Line 3 Number of Lines E First Char A Number of Chars 100 ist Test NONE y Lar
319. mn to n code Output Codes in anged from the default Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual iew Change Translation Table x r Character encodings Double click in the Dutput Char column to change a translation code Output Codes in Red have been changed from the default Input Char QutputChar 4 ox goe dt 129 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu WHAT IS THE PURPOSE OF A TRANSLATION TABLE AND WHY IS IT NEEDED The purpose of a Translation Table in the Paris Designer is to translate individual characters in the printstream character set to another character set Why is this necessary To begin with let s consider the data in the input printstream An input printstream consists of a series of bytes each representing either a printable character or line page terminator Of the 256 possible byte combinations the lowest 16 are normally reserved for special characters such as line feeds and form feeds while the rest correspond to printable characters These byte combinations are relevant to the way computers communicate as the computers must agree on which byte value corresponds to which character This is done according to a recognized encoding system and is best explained by revising the way a computer organizes data About bits and bytes Computers store data as 1s and Os or binary digits called bits A bit has two possible states on or
320. n The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Across Test Range When To Change Across Test Range First Line 3 Number of Lines 15 First Char 5 Number of Chars 100 1st Test NONE 2nd Test This option tests the characters within a range of lines The event takes place if the test conditions are met and the characters will be changed according to the What To Change settings The change is only applied to the characters specified in the test This test option is used to change characters if the characters to be changed are the characters being tested It is used in situations where the line range is known but the character position is variable This option requires e First Line and Number of Lines to be specified and can be used to e Search and Replace e Highlight text by test change font color The Paris Designer Reference Manual 477 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Across Specified Range m When To Change Across Specified Rane xl First Line 3 Number of Lines D First Char 5 Number of Chars 32 istTest_ NONE v 20d7est This option is used to identify a column within your data The width and position of the column in characters is defined by the First Char and Number of Chars The line range is specified by the First Line and Number of Lines The event takes place across the ra
321. n t know where on the page it will appear you would use a Page Para Change Form event In a case where the words Water Sports could appear in any text block on a page but you only want to change the form when Water Sports appears in the Favorite Activities text block you would use a Local Text Block Change Form event You would conduct the form change test in the Favorite Activities text block as a local text block event The Paris Designer Reference Manual 247 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING A PAGE PARA CHANGE FORM EVENT YAO Events menu gt Page Para gt Change Form gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue select Change Form from the drop down menu then the Add button to display the Change Form Event dialogue Change Form Event x r Description Form Change To Tests 1st Test NONE z Ind Tes Description Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list Change To Select this button to display the Select Enter File To Load FRM dialogue for loading of the required form The selected form filename will be displayed in the Change To field in the Change Form Event dialogue 1 Test Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue and set up the test conditions for the Change Form event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on pa
322. n 408 square or rounded corners 408 setting the line and fill color from the Tools Bar 410 byte carriage return 113 115 control 139 form feed 113 line feed 113 PCC 138 150 byte values 113 C calculation string 204 syntax errors 215 capturing printstream data from a Serial port configuring port settings 37 from an LPD queue 44 capturing printstream data 35 from a Novell print queue 40 42 from a Serial port 36 carriage return byte 113 115 117 case changing in printstream data by using a Data Change event 485 Change Back Form Local Text Block event 507 adding 508 using 507 Change Back Form Page Para event 251 adding 252 Change Form Local Text Block event 504 adding 505 using 504 Change Form Page Para event 249 adding 250 change options for a Data Change event 478 83 490 Change Output Event List event 256 adding 257 Change Page Definition event 253 adding 254 changing page attributes in a form 363 printstream data using Data Change event 477 tabs and columns in printstream data by using a Data Change event 486 491 the case in printstream data by using a Data Change event 485 the color of printstream data by using a Data Change event 485 the font in printstream data by using a Data Change event 485 chart Complex Bar adding attributes 441 adding axis settings 448 adding data 443 adding general settings 450 adding headings 446 adding labels 445 addin
323. n marked Cut Ctl Y Cut any added or inserted text that has been marked Copy Ctl C Copy any added or inserted text that has been o 3 Ctl P Paste any cut or Paste any cut or copied text text Insert Field Ctl l Display the Add Edit Field dialogue to insert a field Fill Field Ctl U Display the Update Field Event dialogue to fill a field with marked text Change Data Ctl F Insert a Data Change event at the cursor position Edit Event Ctl E Edit the event at the cursor position displays the event dialogue Next Event Ctl N Go to the next event in the text block to Go to the next event in the text block next event in the text block Search Replace Ctl R Display the Search Replace dialogue to search for and replace added text Read Text File Ctl T Display the Read From File dialogue to import text from an ASCIl text file Read Next Text Ctl W Load the next line of text in the ASCII text file see above Font View Ctl V Display the Font View dialogue to add a non keyboard character to added text 104 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 4 Functions in the Text Editing Menu Filling a field using Ctl M and Ctl U A field can be filled with text extracted from the printstream data by using the shortcut keys Ctl M and Ctl U The benefits of this method are that the line and character position and the number of characters to be extracted are immediately displayed in the Update Field Event dia
324. n of the overwrite Choose OK to overwrite the file Click on the Close button to return to the Environment Editor To load your model printstream file into the Environment Editor and create an environment use the Open Data option in the File menu The Paris Designer Reference Manual PRINTING A PROOF OF THE CURRENT PAGE YQ C File menu gt Print gt Alt P The Print option in the File menu is used to print a proof of the page that is currently displayed on your screen The proof print will contain all form and environment elements that have been created For example when you have created an environment and form for your sample data you could use this option to view a hard copy of the document Choosing Print from the File menu or using the shortcut keys Alt P will print the current page and form of your environment on the printer currently selected for your PC The proof page will print from the current input tray however Duplex functions will not be honored 4 NOTE Refer to the following section re selecting the print destination for the proof print gt To print a proof of the current page 1 Display the page to be printed on screen 2 Choose Print from the File menu The page currently displayed will be sent to the printer selected for your PC 53 The Paris Designer Reference Manual SELECTING A PRINT DESTINATION D c File menu Select Printer C Select Printer dialogue This option i
325. n the Clear button is selected The next time an application that requires these resources is run they will be sent to the printer and the download flag will be set to ON again 84 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Resetting Resources m Resources Id 2 Update Reset MEN Never At Job Start At System Start The Reset options allow the user to instruct Paris when to reset the printer The options in the drop down menu are Never At Job Start and At System Start The option chosen depends on the storage capabilities of the printer being defined and whether or not the printer is being shared with other applications These are described as four general levels of resource management in the section How Paris manages printer resources on page 69 Choosing a Reset option A Printers with permanent storage facilities e If you are defining a printer with permanent storage facilities you would choose Never If it necessary to instruct Paris to download the resources again for this printer you would use the Update button Refer to Updating Resources on page 80 B PCL printers no permanent storage e If you are using a PCL printer with no permanent storage facilities that is NOT being shared with other applications you would choose Never However if the printer is turned off or reset you would have to modify the p
326. n the Environment Menu WHAT ARE THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE ENGINE OR THE OUTPUT DEVICE HANDLING COPY PROCESSING When selecting the number of copies of a file report or page to be processed two different approaches are available a The Paris Engine can handle the copy request or b The printer can handle the copy request Which approach is used depends upon the collation and copy sensitive options selected in the environment Using the Engine to handle the copy request If the Engine handles the copy request then the input data is reprocessed x number of times e The advantage of this is that the Engine can implement copy sensitive processing and the copies can be printed on printers that do not support copies e The disadvantage of this is that the processing time for the job is increased in direct proportion to the number of copies requested and the size of the output file can also be greatly increased Using the printer to handle the copy request If the printer handles the copy request the Engine processes the input once then the output is forwarded to the printer along with a command to apply the copies at the printer e The advantage here is that the Engine processes the input once only and the output file is kept to a minimum e The disadvantage is that copy sensitive process cannot be performed and only some printers support copies collate The Paris Designer Reference Manual 173 Chapter 5 Functions in
327. nd is intended for most general usage The Numeric and Currency types are provided to simplify the task of creating fields for mathematical purposes such as running totals or averages f NOTE By defining calculation strings to convert a Field s Type it is possible to use any type of field for any purpose The Type attribute merely simplifies this process by telling the system to implicitly manage some of the details of working with numbers 190 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu AlphaNumeric This is the default option when creating a new field e The current Field Value is stored as a string of characters e No checks or conversions are performed when setting an AlphaNumeric value Numeric Whole The current Field Value is stored as a numeric whole number e Setting an AlphaNumeric string or value into this type of field results in a current Field Value of 0 zero e Numeric strings or values are stored after any fractions have been removed e The Field Value can be negative Examples Inputsting abc CumentValue 0 zero Inputsting 75 45 Curent Value 75 Inputsting 75 CumentValue 75 Inputsting 75F CumnentValue 0 zero F causes invalid number Numeric Float The current Field Value is stored as numeric floating point number e Setting an AlphaNumeric string or value into this type of field results in a current value of 0 0
328. ne is displayed in the Sample field As adjustments are made to attribute settings the sample will alter accordingly The Paris Designer Reference Manual 395 Chapter 15 Editing Dynamic and Static Line Settings SETTING THE LINE POSITION m Position Left 15 0 Right 29 0 Top 380 Bottom 380 After a Line has been added its position on the page can be viewed and changed via the View Change Line dialogue The current position of the Line on the page grid is displayed in the dialogue The unit of measurement is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu Z NOTE The Line can also be moved by using the Move tool and its size changed by using the Edit tool Left The position of the left end of the Line on the page grid reflected in the Abs and Rel co ordinates The position on the right end of the Line on the page grid reflected in the Abs and Rel co ordinates Top The position of the top of the Line on the page grid relevant if the Line has been drawn at an angle See Unrestricted Draw in the Line Attributes section Bottom The position of the bottom of the Line on the page grid relevant if the Line has been drawn at an angle See Unrestricted Draw in the Line Attributes section 396 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 15 Editing Dynamic and Static Line Settings SETTING THE PROPERTIES FOR A DYNAMIC LINE ELEMENT Properties Horizontal Fixed
329. nes Pint sts The description that identifies the text block This can be any word up to 20 characters For easy identification a word that reflects the contents of the text block can be used For clarity the Description should be unique to every text block The number of lines to include in the text block f NOTE Without any tests the text block will always be the number of lines specified however any tests entered may end the text block before the specified number of lines is reached Choosing the Events button opens the View Change Event List dialogue for the addition and editing of events in the text block Refer to How are Local Text Block events added on page 472 Selecting the Data Clipping checkbox activates the clipping Settings Selecting the Settings button displays the Set Clip Attributes dialogue Refer to Clipping a Text Block in Chapter 6 of the Paris Designer User s Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 469 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Blank Lines 470 The Blank Lines option allows blank line i e lines with no printable characters in the printable range to be handled differently to non blank lines The options for Blank Lines are Print Remove Move to Top and Move to Bottom Print The line is treated normally Remove The line is removed in the editor and at print time Any special conditions such as font changes or spacing character are still honored M
330. ng Clicking on the Update button will display the View Change Resource Flags dialogue which gives you access to the individual Paris resources View Change Resource Flag x m Downloaded Resources Forms v Clear Forms Graphics The dialogue permits the user to select the necessary resource s to be updated and turn off the permanent download flag This means the next time a job is set for printing the selected resource s will be sent to the printer 83 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu To update a resource 1 Click on the Update button to open the View Change Resource Flags dialogue 2 Select the type of resource required from the drop down menu Forms Fonts or Graphics A list will be displayed of all the resources of this type that Paris has flagged as being permanently stored on the printer view Change Resource Flag m Downloaded Resources Arial 14 Bold Portrair Arial 12 Bold Portrair Arial 10 Bold Portrait Arial 5 Regular Portrait Courier New 10 Regular Portrait 3 Highlight the required resources to reset the flag 3 Highlight the resource or resources on which you require to have the flag set to OFF 4 Click on Clear The internal flags for the selected resources will be automatically set to OFF 5 Click on Exit 4f NOTE Flags are set to OFF only whe
331. ng form file FRM Save Form Alt S Save form information to a FRM file Save Form As Alt A Select Enter Save File Create a form file FRM name Form Attributes View Change Form Set the form page Attributes orientation and size attributes Form Info File Information Record information about the FRM file Merge Form Select Enter File To Load Load a FRM file to merge with current form Overlay Form Select Enter File To Load Load a FRM file to overlay current form Print Alt P Send the current page to the printer for proofing Select Printer Select Printer Select Print Destination Select Print Destination Destination Select the print destination the Select the print destination destination Modify Printers View Change Print Modify printer settings Destinations Reset Resources Reset the printer initialize Alt R the download list for non hard disk based printers Table 10 1 Functions in the File Menu 356 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CREATING A NEW BLANK FORM 8 c File menu gt New Form S gt AIt N D C New Form When you open the Paris Form Editor directly from your desktop New Form will be displayed in the header of the Form Editor window and a blank form will be displayed on your screen You can immediately begin creating a new form then save it by selecting the Save As option from the File menu If you load an existing form and then wish to create a
332. nge of lines and characters specified For example it could be a range of 11 lines from the 3 line to the 13 line in a column 32 characters wide from the 5 character the 36 character First Line 3 Number of Lines 11 First Character 5 Number of Chars 32 No tests are used with this option This option requires e First Line and Number of Lines and First Character and Number of Characters to be specified and can be used to e create columns for justification e overprint text down a given column e to make font color changes in a given column 478 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Across Range If Test Satisfied When To Change First Line 3 Number of Lines D First Char 10 Number of Chars 20 Ist Test NONE 2nd Tiest This option is similar to the Across Specified Range option however it is only applied to lines that satisfy the test If the test conditions are met the event takes place across the specified range of lines and characters This option requires e First Line and Number of Lines and First Character and Number of Characters to be specified and can be used to e change characters that are separate from the characters being tested as the option allows the test characters and event character to be different The Paris Designer Reference Manual 479 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Set
333. ngs Ej start at Une z Replace invalid index with first font ey 164 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu How DOES FONT INDEXING WORK It is possible to change fonts within text blocks via text block events These events can be configured to change at fixed line and column positions or by test In some cases however you may wish to change fonts explicitly by using a Font Index within your data If you do you must dedicate a given character position within every line usually the 1 or 2 if using PCC bytes Font index bytes must therefore exist in the print data and be added by the application producing the data This feature is common amongst print files being printed on Xerox CEP type printers If included within your data the font index byte acts as an index to determine the font in the pagedef s Font List to be used on each line A numeric value is derived from the index that will call the font in the corresponding position in the Font List e The first font in the list can be referred to as Font 0 or Font 1 e Selecting Start At One determines that the first font in the list is referenced as Font 1 View Change Output Settings x Page Printing Font Indexing Simplex v Active Offset o v Statst nd Macfie x Replace invalid index with first font Page Shift The Paris Designer Reference Manual 165
334. ning the field s current value DEF parameter This function returns the Default Value of the Field parameter If parameter is not a valid Field Name an error will be reported SET parameter1 parameter2 This function evaluates parameter2 and stores the value in the field parameter1 The function also returns the stored value If parameter1 is not a valid Field Name an error will be reported Examples SET AgeLimit 18 This function sets the Field AgeLimit to the Value 18 and returns the Value 18 SET AveAge NUM TotalAge 10 0 This function sets the field AveAge to the value of the field TotalAge divided by 10 TotalAge is converted to numeric floating to prevent loss of information This is only necessary if TotalAge is not a numeric floating Field The Value is also returned 210 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu IF parameter1 parameter2 paramerter3 This function provides a way to select which of two values is returned The function works by First evaluating ALL 3 parameters in order Secondly parameter1 is tested to see if it is equal to 0 0 If parameter1 is an alphanumeric or numeric whole value it is converted to numeric float If parameter1 IS NOT 0 0 then the function returns the Value parameter2 otherwise it returns parameter3 f NOTE If parameter or parameter3
335. nment Event Select Device Features option 601 selecting the Environment Output option 600 selecting the Run Time event Feature option 602 using 597 dialogue Data Change Event 477 Default Box Settings 405 Default Chart Settings 419 Default Circle Settings 400 Default Graphic Settings 411 Default Line Settings 395 Default Text Block Settings 464 Default Text Settings 386 Font List 517 Select Text Block 229 View Current Page Attributes 227 View Change Box 406 View Change Chart Settings 420 View Change Circle 401 View Change Event List 484 500 505 508 View Change Line 396 View Change Print Messages dialogue Operator Messages 225 View Change Text Block Settings 465 View Change Text Settings 387 DJDE options 278 281 PRINTER command using with JDE or JDL 276 280 document previewing 102 380 viewing zoom options 100 378 drawing lines at any angle 397 EBCDIC 132 140 See also encoding systems Edit Options for system settings 98 376 editing box 405 9 attributes 407 corners 408 dynamic properties 410 position 408 Chart element 419 63 circle 400 404 attributes 402 Index dynamic properties 404 position 403 data overflow option in a text block 473 Environment Change event 290 fields 191 font attributes in a text block 467 Font List 517 519 graphic 411 63 attributes 414 dynamic properties 415 frame 416 line 395 98 attributes 397 dynamic propertie
336. ns 0 0 w is greater than 5 text lt char returns 0 0 t is greater than c 45 8 lt 9 returns 1 0 4 is less than 9 206 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Equal This operator returns 1 0 if the Left returns 0 0 Examples 5 7 44 2 44 2 52 abc abc ab 0 abc abc 0 Not Equal This operator returns 1 0 if the Left it returns 0 0 Examples 3 7 54 21 54 21 52 abc abc st ab 0 0 abc abc 0 0 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu operand is equal to the Right otherwise it returns 0 0 returns 1 0 returns 0 0 abc converts to 0 0 returns 1 0 c is not equal to no char returns 1 0 abc converts to 0 i returns 0 0 a is not equal to O operand is not equal to the Right otherwise returns 1 0 returns 0 0 returns 1 0 abc converts to 0 0 returns 1 0 c is not equal to no char returns 0 0 abc converts to 0 0 returns 1 0 a is not equal to 0 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 207 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Operands Operands are made up of Constants Field Names and Functions Constants There are 3 different types of constants matching the 3 different types of fields 1 AlphaNumeric A string of
337. ns a PostScript interpreter has an associated PPD file When such an output device is made accessible to a host computer the PPD file is stored on the host computer The applications on the host computer can then determine the available features on a device by interrogating the associated PPD file How does an application interrogate a device s PPD file There is no need for an application to understand the device s features as PPD files contain structures that allow this interrogation From the list of features found in selected device s PPD file applications can then build a user interface To summon each feature the PPD file also contains the PostScript language code When a user selects a feature such as manual feed or duplex printing the code for each selected feature is extracted from the PPD file This code is included in the appropriate place in the output file before the output file is sent to the device In this case the output file refers to the file having the PostScript language description of the document created by the user What is the availability of XPD and PPD files 61 During installation some XPD and PPD files are copied to your system If you require further XPD or PPD files contact your Paris distributor Refer also to the section XPD Resource Management Commands for PCL and PostScript printers on page 71 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu
338. ns on page 201 for full details on using a field s value within calculations As an index entry To use a field as an index for creating archives select the Index attribute when creating the field Add Edit Field x Attributes Name MembNum Type AlphaNumeric m Reset x m Current Fields Calculate __ Name r Values MembName AlphaNumeric Default MembNum AUS 198 1045 tet AccntNum AlphaNumeric 001 410 198 1 Avail Currency 89453 Current Avail8 AlphaNumeric 91 567 Avail8 AlphaNumeric 100 332 Availl AlphaNumeric 102 323 zi Add Edit Delete Clip Cancel Any field marked as an index will automatically generate an archive index entry whenever an Update Field event or Runtime VAL event changes the value of that Field 200 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu FIELD CALCULATIONS The calculation string for a field is a series of instructions detailing how to prepare or modify the current value to produce the output value If you click in the Calculate text field of the Add Edit Field dialogue the Browse button will be activated Click on the button to display the Field Calculations dialogue The dialogue lists all the Paris field calculations that can be used in a calculation string and shows the function name brief description and syntax If you click on a function the correct syntax for the
339. nt environment and will apply only to print jobs containing that environment 4f NOTE Currently Paris Job Ticketing applies to Xerox 4050 NPS 4850 NPS 4090 NPS 4890 NPS and 4635 NPS printers only iew Change LPR Defaults x Host Name Po User Name Class Name PO Job Name Input Name Title i SC S Cancel 30 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu MODIFYING A JOB TICKET FOR AN ENVIRONMENT PRINTING INFORMATION Selecting the Env Info option from the File menu displays the Environment Information dialogue This will contain the Design Information for the environment To modify a job ticket for the environment enter the Printing Information as follows A name associated with the print job usually the sender A name associated with the job usually the name of the type of document The name of the account that will be charged for the printing costs associated with the job The accounting details will appear in the comma delimited file on NPS and are available from there if required LPR Defaults Clicking on the LPR Defaults button will display the View Change LPR Defaults dialogue The dialogue displays settings for the Host User Class Job and Input names and the Title of the job If the control file being read by the Spooler does not have an entry in some of these fields these settings are u
340. nt only no font handling XPDManageFonts Harddisk For 4517 4220 4230 printers Downloads to the hard disk once XPDManageFonts Download For PCL and PostScript printers which have no hard disk Downloads the fonts as needed XPDManageFonts Always Default for Post Script XPDManageFonts True Same as Download NOTE PostScript defaults to Always PCL defaults to Download Refer to Support for Printer resident fonts PostScript in Paris on page 74 Substitution file information on page 75 and Font Name Mapping file information on page 75 71 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu XPD ManageForms Command The options for the XPDManageForms command and their use are as follows XPD ManageForms Command Use XPDManageForms None For Docuprint only no form handling XPDManageForms Harddisk For 4517 4220 4230 printers Downloads to the hard disk once XPDManageForms Download for PCL and PostScript printers which have no hard disk Downloads the forms as needed XPDManageForms Always Default for Post Script XPDManageForms True Same as Download XPDManageForms False Same as None NOTE PostScript defaults to Always PCL defaults to Download XPD ManageGrafs Command The options for the XPDManageGrafs command and their use are as follows XPD ManageGrafs Command _ Use XPDManageGrafs None For Docuprint only no g
341. nter Select Print Destination Select the print destination Modify Printers View Change Print Modify printer settings Destinations Reset Resources Reset the printer initialize the download list for non hard disk based printers Table 1 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu 24 The Paris Designer Reference Manual OPENING AN ENVIRONMENT JD gt File menu gt Open Env amp gt alt o C Select Enter File To Load dialogue Selecting the Open Env option from the File menu or using the shortcut keys Alt O will display the Select Enter File to Load ENV dialogue for loading an environment file into the Environment Editor f NOTE The Select Enter File To Load dialogue is displayed when any files are to be loaded in the Designer The extension in the File field indicates the file type gt To load open an environment 1 Open the File menu and choose Open Env The Select Enter File To Load ENV dialogue will be displayed In Paris environment files ENV are stored in a pre determined directory i e LENV Choose the required file from the File list and choose Open The selected environment will be loaded into the Environment Editor Look in Cx Env E iaa AUTOSAVE DFLTP ENV Dfltl env an Dfltp env an MYNEW ENV Files of type ENv Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 25 SAVING AN ENVIRONMENT 26 Jj c File menu Save Env gt A
342. ntime event marker identifier 280 using 277 using the event modifications option 282 Run Time Events 232 273 84 Runtime event marker identifier 280 S Save Options for system settings 99 377 saving Color Palette 524 528 537 environment 27 under a new name 28 Font List 517 518 form 361 under a new name 362 Input Filter 129 PCC table 163 printer definition 90 Translation Table 144 select device features event local text block adding 511 616 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Select Device Features event local text block adding 510 Select Device Features event page para 246 270 Select Input Tray event 266 adding 266 Select Output Tray event 267 adding 267 Select Text Block dialogue 229 selecting an environment for Media Mapping 569 Device Specific Features 599 Environment Event Select Device Features option for Device Specific Features 601 Environment Output option for Device Specific Features 600 NEXTFILE as the printer output destination 65 printer in the Environment Editor 55 in the Form Editor 370 printer type 59 Run Time event Feature option for Device Specific Features 602 watermark option for a graphics file 415 Serial port capturing printstream data 35 36 configuring port settings in preparation for capturing printstream data 37 setting See also editing font attributes in a text block 467 position of a text block 469 resource packer options 295
343. nts are compatible with the runtime events syntax used by the Xerox CEP family of printers This allows users with printstream data already set up for the CEP to transfer these to Paris without altering their mainframe programs To transfer print environments from the CEP set the runtime event marker to SDJDE or whatever the IDEN is set to in your JSL NOTE Paris does not support all CEP DJDE options Refer to Table 7 6 DJDE Functions Supported for a full list of CEP DJDE compatible functions The Paris Designer Reference Manual 273 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu How DO RUNTIME EVENTS DIFFER FROM OTHER INPUT EVENTS Runtime events act as a switch and in this way differ from other events because they have the capacity to act as a toggle Runtime events remain in effect until another runtime event is encountered as opposed to other events which only apply to the page on which they are found Runtime events are executed after the page in which the event is encountered is completed that is the current page is printed the runtime event is performed and anew page is started There are exceptions to this such as the ENDJOB command which causes an immediate end of a print job and the ENV JDL and JDE commands which cause an immediate end of job condition when the Implied ENDJOB option has been selected The Implied ENDJOB option is selected in the Runtime Events dialogue Refer to the s
344. nual 467 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Vertical Vertical justify aligns text to the Top Bottom or Center of the Justify frame The Relative option allows you to set up a text block with a position on the page that is relative to the length of the previous text block Relative Position IV Relative Frame Left 0 5 Width Height Horizontal Justify Left Y When the Relative checkbox is Vertical Justify Top selected for a text block it allows the text block to float vertically relative to the last line of the previous text block The Relative option is particularly useful when used in combination with blank line handling refer to Blank Lines in Setting Text Block Options that follows For example a Name amp Address text block TEXT BLOCK 1 with blank lines can be compressed using blank line handling In the following text block TEXT BLOCK 2 the Relative option can be selected to enable it to float up and down relative to the last line of the previous text block TEXT BLOCK 1 468 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings SETTING TEXT BLOCK OPTIONS Options Description Lines per page Events View Change Data Clipping Description CE Lines per page ENS Data Overflow Active Events View Change Overflow Page Data Clipping Active Settings Overlow Form e Blank Li
345. nvironment The View Change Box dialogue is used to view or change the settings for a selected Box To use the options within each dialogue the same processes are required with the addition of the Properties function for Dynamic Box elements DEFAULT BOX SETTINGS DIALOGUE Selecting the Box tool then clicking on the Settings button will display the Default Box Settings dialogue When adding a Dynamic Box to an environment the Default Box Settings dialogue displays a Properties option for setting Fixed Float or Resize properties Default Box Settings Sample Attributes Border Solid Weight flight Y 1 Fill None Shadow None m Corners Square x Size o y Size f0 Properties Horizontal Fixed X Vertical Fixed m l il Cancel 403 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 17 Editing Dynamic and Static Box Settings Default Box Settings Sample Attributes Border Solid Weight Light v il Fill None Shadow None Corners Square m Size o v Size o Cancel The Default Box Settings dialogue when adding a Static Box to a form no Properties option VIEW CHANGE BOX DIALOGUE Selecting the View tool then clicking on an added Box element will display the View Change Box dialogue When changing a Dynamic Box element in an environment the View Change B
346. o set the color of the border choose the adjacent Color box to open the Color Palette The function of the Color Palette is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer The weight thickness of a circle can be defined as Light Medium Heavy Custom If this option is selected the adjacent field is activated for entry of the required outline weight in 300 inch dots A sample of the circle is displayed in the Sample field As adjustments are made to attribute settings the sample will alter accordingly The fill for a circle can be defined as None Light Medium Heavy Solid To set the color of the fill choose the adjacent Color box to open the Color Palette The function of the Color Palette is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer 400 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 16 Editing Dynamic and Static Circle Settings SETTING THE CIRCLE POSITION iew Change Circle m Sample Attributes Border soia v Weight Light 2 Fil None v m Properties Horizontal Fixed Vertical Fixed Position Left 45 Width 13 0 Top 31 60 Height 7 800 Cancel After a Circle has been added its position on the page can be viewed and changed if required via the View Change Circle dialogue The current position of the Circle on the Abs and Rel co ordinates is displayed in the dialogue The unit of
347. ockSet name from the CEP data stream to a Paris tray This tray will then be used to select either an Input Slot or a Media Map depending upon the type of printer being used The StockSet xpi file The StockSet xpi file is a simple text file and can be created and edited with any standard text editor The following apply when you are creating the file e The file should not contain blank lines and e the last valid line should end with a line terminator CF LF Any invalid entry in the file will be ignored and no error or warning will be given by the Paris system when it attempts to read the file The XPDBaseStockSet and XPDEnvStockSet entries The StockSet xpi file consists of two types of entry There can be any number of entries of each type 1 XPDBaseStockSet The XPDBaseStockSet entry is used to create a mapping that will apply across all ENVs This is the simplest way to create a series of system wide mappings for example to map MAIN to Tray2 for all jobs 2 XPDEnvStockSet The XPDEnvStockSet option is used to create a mapping that is specific to a single environment An ENV specific mapping will override a base mapping if the name of the StockSet is the same 572 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function The syntax of these entries is XPDBaseStockSet stocksetName trayName e stocksetName The name of the StockSet to mapped This is the name that will appear in
348. of the Adobe PPD PostScript Printer Description files used to describe the features of PostScript output devices What is the purpose of an XPD file An XPD file serves a dual purpose in the Designer e First it makes the various printer features described in the XPD file available in the editor For example if a printer has support for 10 different page sizes the XPD file makes this information available in the editor e Second the task of an XPD file is to put the appropriate instructions into the output file to call the features that are on the printer PostScript printers also use XPD files In this case the XPD is really just a pointer to the appropriate PPD file Normally an XPD file for a PostScript printer contains a single line which simply incorporate the PPD files into the XPD What is the purpose of a PPD file 60 Devices that contain PostScript interpreters may contain a wide variety of features such as different page sizes different methods of paper handling the type of fonts available and so on Not all devices have the same set of features nor are these features called up in the same way PPD PostScript Printer Description files are text files that have the purpose of providing a uniform approach to using the features of such devices The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu How do PPD files provide this uniform approach An output device that contai
349. ogical page after printing the current line NOTE Display can be in Decimal Hex or 118 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Skipping to the next physical page In some cases you may find that you do not want to skip to the next logical page but would rather skip to the next physical page In this case you would select the Page End option in the Character section of the Input Filter dialogue as well as Line End This will have the effect of ignoring any remaining text blocks on the current page and starting a new page at the first text block of the new page Refer to Using the Skip option on page 126 4f NOTE In most cases you will need to skip to the new page after printing the current line View Change Input Filter x Input Characters Character Attributes Char Print Line End This character is a Printable character i ae M ES v This character is a Line End 2 Ignore No End 3 Ignore No End 4 Ignore No End 5 lanore No End E pedes y E Before printing the current line 8 Ignore No End Skip to channel 1 3 No End Space 1 line v Print the current line v After printing the current line Skip to channel 1 C Space 1 line Cancel Use This character is a Page End with the form feed input character to skip to the next physical page after printing the current line
350. ogue when adding Static Text to a form no Properties option VIEW CHANGE TEXT SETTINGS DIALOGUE Selecting the View tool then clicking on an added Text element will display the View Change Text Settings dialogue When changing a Dynamic Text element in an environment the View Change Text Settings dialogue displays the current Properties setting for the element The Paris Designer Reference Manual 385 Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings SETTING TEXT ATTRIBUTES r Attributes Font Arial 10 Italic 48 0 dts Add Spacing 48 0 Dots Reset E dit font list Rotate None Word wrapping enabled Spacing 4f NOTE The measurement selected should conform to the grid settings selected for the environment refer to Setting the Grid Line Spacing in Chapter 3 of the Paris Designer User s Manual 386 The font displayed in the font field is the default font for text settings or if viewing added text the current font for the added text To change the font use the arrow adjacent to the Font field to display the Font List and select a font The Spacing fields show the font s vertical line spacing and the unit of measure for the line spacing In the example above the line spacing is 42 dots at 300 dots per inch Use the arrow adjacent to the Spacing field to display the units of measure list The options for vertical line spacing are Inches Centimeters Dots 1
351. olor changes have already been made are those of the default palette Custom colors Hue 220 Red 128 Sat 240 Green o ColorlS alid Lum Jeo Blue 64 Add to Custom Colors 4 Click on the color in the Custom colors that you wish to change The color will be displayed in the Color Solid sample display The Paris Designer Reference Manual 533 Chapter 22 The Color Palette function 5 7 Either Alter the Red Green and Blue values as necessary Or Select a color from the Basic colors that is the color you wish to add or close to it and alter the Red Green and Blue values as necessary Refer to the previous section Mixing a Custom color Once the color is mixed click on the Add to Custom Colors button The color displayed in the Color Solid sample will be added to the Custom colors in place of the previously selected color Repeat the process to change any other colors Click on OK The 16 color palette will be displayed with the changed colors SAVING THE COLOR PALETTE If you have mixed a color or a number of colors you can save the palette as a PAL file for use in other forms or environments 534 gt To save the palette 8 Choose the Options button to display the Save File As dialogue Enter a name for the palette with a pal extension in the File name field e g mynew pal and choose Save x Save in 3 Env e EJ File name mynew pal Save as type Color Pa
352. on the page where you want to add the text 2 Press Ctrl P to paste the copied text Z NOTE Text can only be pasted in Paris while in Text Add mode The font used in the editor will be the font that is active at the time Line ends in the copied text will be lost The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 15 EDITING LINE SETTINGS The Default Line Settings dialogue is used to edit the default settings for a line before it is added to a form or environment The View Change Line dialogue is used to view and edit the current settings for the selected Line To use the options within each dialogue the same processes are required with the addition of the Properties function for Dynamic Line elements DEFAULT LINE SETTINGS DIALOGUE Selecting the Add Line tool then clicking on the Settings button will display the Default Line Settings dialogue The Default Line Settings dialogue displays a Properties option for setting Fixed Float or Resize properties when adding a Dynamic Line to an environment Default Line Settings x Sample Attributes Style Sotid mem Weight Light X aaa Unrestricted Draw m Properties Horizontal Fixed M Vertical Fixed Y i A Cancel 393 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 15 Editing Dynamic and Static Line Settings Default Line Settings x Sample m Attributes sye soa MEM Weight Light
353. onment Menu How DO INPUT CHARACTER SETTINGS INTERACT WITH PCC BYTE INSTRUCTIONS SPACING SETTINGS 128 As you can see from the previous sections the Input Filter can determine some basic vertical spacing properties of the print file In the cases where your print file employs Printer Carriage Control PCC bytes there could be conflict between the PCC spacing instruction and that of the Input Filter In these cases you can instruct the Paris Designer to ignore the Input Filter s spacing instructions The Line Termination function will still be honored however the vertical spacing will then be controlled by the PCC byte The Input Filter s spacing control is disabled by de selecting the Use Line Terminators as default option in the View Change PCC and Channel Assignments dialogue refer to The Spacing Settings function on page 147 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE TRANSLATION TABLE FUNCTION To open a Translation Table select the Translation Table option from the Environment menu A translation table can be displayed in Decimal Literal or Hex format View Change Translation Table xi r Character encodings Double click in the Output Char column to change a translation code Output Codes in Red have been changed from the default InpuCha Output Char Display Hex Load Save E Cancel i Decima Y Load Save Dutput Char colu
354. onment Menu Setting the Field value A Field always has a Value The Current Value can be set in one of the following ways e By specifying a Default Value e By an Update Field event e By a Calculation String of any Field e Bya Runtime Event by specifying a Default Value A Field s Default Value determines the initial contents of the Field At Job startup and at times specified by the Reset attribute the Current Value of a field is set to the Default Value If no Default Value is entered then numeric Fields are set to 0 zero and AlphaNumeric Fields are set to empty by an Update Field Event The most common way to change the Current Value of a field is to create an event that extracts data from an input line and places it into the field The Update Field event provides this capability The event is created like any other and when the event conditions are TRUE the specified characters are extracted from the input line and placed in the field An Update Field Event can be of two types Fill or Increment e A Fill event replaces the previous Current Value with the extracted data e An Increment event adds the extracted data to the Current Value If the field is a Numeric field the extracted data is converted to a number and added to the Current Value For Alphanumeric Fields the extracted data is appended to the end of the Current Va
355. ons for a Line feed character In the case of a Line feed character you would normally space after printing the line in the same way as a typewriter does Selecting the spacing options for a Carriage return character It possible to perform no spacing at all and this is how the carriage return byte should be set By not selecting any spacing action the next line will overprint the same line The above spacing settings are illustrated on pages 115 and 92 126 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Saving Loading an Input Filter The Save function allows you to save the current input filter for use in other environments Choosing this button opens a standard Select Enter Save File Name FIL dialogue Save the table with the file extension FIL Select Enter Save File name Save in a Env z E3 File name USER FIL Save as type FIL Y Cancel The Load function allows you to load a pre existing Input Filter Doing so will overwrite the current Input Filter settings with those of the Input Filter being loaded Selecting the Load button will display the Select Enter File To Load FIL dialogue Any Input Filter displayed in the list including DFLT FIL can be loaded Select Enter File To Load Look in a Env zj EJ File name DFLT FIL a a Files of type FiL x Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 127 Chapter 5 Functions in the Envir
356. onts in a job being sent to a PostScript printer Paris converts the TrueType fonts into bitmap fonts Type3 before sending them instream This technique although effective and transparent to the user does have the effect of increasing the size of the PostScript output file In some cases where there is a heavy use of large TrueType fonts in the job the amount of font data contained in the output file could actually exceed the amount of actual data Code has been introduced into Paris to eliminate this problem in those cases where the printer has the required functionality i e a TrueType rasterizer As a result of this new code instead of converting each different size and style TrueType font to a bitmap Paris now sends down a single Type42 outline font per family Paris sends Type42 outline fonts by default At print time during the normal scan of the printer PPD file the code now looks for the PPD entry TTRasterizer Type42 This entry indicates that the printer is capable of taking in Type42 fonts If this entry is found in the PPD file Paris will automatically send Type42 outline fonts rather than converting to bitmaps If the entry is not in the PPD file bitmaps will be sent This is now the default function of the Paris software Overriding Type42 downloading 80 If necessary this function can be overridden and TrueType font handling can be returned to the bitmap method even if the PPD has the Type42 rasterizer entry To
357. opying from the Clipboard 543 copying onto the Clipboard 541 form creating 359 loading 360 merging 366 overlaying 367 saving 361 under a new name 362 summarizing the form file 364 365 Form Editor File menu functions 357 Form Editor functions 356 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 611 Index FORM and BFORM options in output settings 174 form feed 116 Skip option 119 21 128 form feed byte 113 117 frame placing around added text 390 placing around an added graphic 416 functions in the Euro Rates utility 320 functions in a calculation string 211 G general settings adding to a Complex Bar chart 450 adding to a Complex Plot chart 435 adding to a Pie chart 462 adding to a Simple Bar chart 440 adding to a Simple Plot chart 425 graphic dynamic floating 415 resizing 415 editing 411 63 attributes 414 dynamic properties 415 frame 416 loading 414 placing in a frame 416 previewing before adding 413 re scaling 417 rotating 415 using the watermark option 415 Green Palette 526 Greenshade Palette 526 GreyScale Palette 527 Grid 97 375 H headings adding to a Complex Bar chart 446 adding to a Complex Plot chart 431 adding to a Pie chart 460 Help Menu using 354 Help Menu Functions 352 about the Paris Designer 354 Contents 354 hooks defined for Device Specific Features Job Level Code 598 Job Level Comment 598 Page Preamble 598 Xerox Job Ticket 598 j
358. or by using logical OR statements where either test condition is met That is e If BOTH TEST 1 AND TEST 2 conditions are met make the changes specified e If EITHER TEST 1 OR TEST 2 conditions are met make the changes specified 6 WARNING If using the AND condition both conditions must be satisfied on the same line The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu SETTING THE TEST CONDITIONS iew Change Test Test Info First Line Num lines 0 Offset o ien 89 Mask 255 Test Input EqualToValue v Field Rr Add string Add byte Display Decimal Cancel First Line Enter the number of the first line to be tested For example is the first line to be tested is line 6 then First Line 6 Num Lines Enter the number of lines to be tested including the first line For example e f only the first line is to be tested then Num lines 1 e If lines 6 7 and 8 are to be tested then Num lines 3 An offset of 0 means the first position in the line Enter the start position in the line of the byte or character string being looked for The Paris Designer Reference Manual 239 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu The mask can be applied to the data to convert its value Refer to What is the Mask and how is it used on page 237 4 NOTE Normally you would not use any value other than 255 in this field T
359. order for everything to be in sync the logical names of Ipf fonts such as line printer 9 regular in fonts ini reflects or corresponds to the actual physical files on disc in this case LI09 lpf or similar name Hence if a user deletes the physical file the reference is still in the fonts ini file and Paris will still build a list that contains the logical name However there is no corresponding physical file on disk in the Paris fonts directory Therefore another way of putting this question would be I have 10 physical Ipfs in my Paris fonts directory but more than that appears in the font view in the add dialog the answer is that some physical files have been deleted in the Paris fonts directory Q Tm trying to unpack a pak file but the Resource Manager keeps coming up with the message Not a valid pack file Why A Theonly answer is that the pak file has been corrupted or the file extension of a normal file has been deliberately changed to pak a highly improbable occurrence The Paris Designer Reference Manual FONT REFERENCE UTILITY Vj c Utilities menu Font Reference Font Reference Utility dialogue Font Reference Utility Ea Fonts Families Sizes Styles Bold Add Reference Make Disk File Delete Reference Mapped Font Names ma s Corresponding Portrait LIOSNP Inv Portrait fu O3NI Xerox CEP font names of Landscape LiosNt Inv Landscape fu O9NJ converted fonts
360. orms can be edited then the newly created form can be saved by the name of the current form or by a new name For example you could use this option to merge the design elements of two forms edit the elements as required and create a new form gt To merge forms 1 Load the first form file into the Form Editor 2 Select Merge Form from the File menu The Select Enter File to Load dialogue will be displayed 3 Select the form file to be merged with the current form from the File list then choose OK The form file will be loaded and appear on your screen merged with the current form in the Form Editor Edit the merged forms and save as required The Paris Designer Reference Manual OVERLAYING A FORM TO ACT AS A TEMPLATE i gt File menu gt Overlay Form C Select Enter File To Load FRM dialogue The Overlay Form option allows you to load an existing form to act as a template on which to create a new form or to modify an existing form An overlaid form is solely a template and cannot be edited nor does it become part of the form being created modified but can be removed once its use as a template is completed Whether you are creating a new form or modifying an existing form an overlay form can be loaded and removed at any time This means you can open a new form or existing form then load the overlay or you can load the overlay then a new or existing form gt To overlay a form 1 Select Overlay from the
361. osition is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu The position of the left side of the Chart on the page grid The position of the top of the Chart on the page grid The width of the Chart The height of the Chart Horizontal The Horizontal and Vertical properties of dynamic chart elements and Vertical can be set to Float or Resize according to data in the linked text block These options do not appear in the Default or View Change dialogues in the Form Editor Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Designer User s Manual 420 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Data to a Simple Plot Chart Attributes Data Asis General P Add Point Font l 3 Remove Point Point 3 ETR Add Set Point 4 Point 5 Remove Set The value of the point Double click in the adjacent Value box to add a point value If adding a dynamic chart the value can be filled by a field Refer to Using Fields to Create a Chart in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual The label for the point on the X axis Double click in the adjacent Label box to add a point label See above The attributes for each point can be defined as the style of line required Solid Broken or Dotted Click on the Remove Point button to remove a point from the set NOTE A simple plot chart can
362. ove to Top The blank line s are moved from their current position in the text block to the top Move to Bottom The blank line s are moved from their current position in the text block to the bottom Used in combination with the Relative option blank line handling is particularly useful The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Using the Text Block Data Overflow option The Data Overflow option allows you to define the form and page definition to be used when a text block overflows This is an extremely useful option that is also very simple to use For example Imagine you have a statement type application that is normally one page but can sometimes go to multiple pages The single page format might contain the address details a list of transactions and a payment advice When there are too many transactions to fit the single page format you normally want the continuation page to be a different layout in other words you would want to invoke a different set of rules in an overflow situation Data Overflow w Active Overflow Page Page2 Select Overlow Form MS FORM2 Select When the Data Overflow option is activated Paris counts the number of lines for this text block as usual then when the maximum number of lines for the text block is reached it goes into its overflow processing loop The software goes to a new page and uses the selected Overflow Page pagedef and O
363. ow View Change PCC amp Channel Assignments x r PEC Assignments Char Before Print After r PEC Attributes Before printing C Skip to channel EH Space lines ig characters are IV Print the current line assigned in the PCC table After printing lay Decimal C Skip to channel 0 Space lines ole sew Print Options Use the spacing options m PCC Idenifier from the Input Filter for ssianments Dffset 0 Munassigned PCCs is vels Lines checked default setting r Print Options 1 Z Adine V Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for A _Deleteine line unassigned PCCs 5 Apply the Before printing options of the first line 6 JV Apply the After printing options of the first line i Cancel e Ifthe Print Option Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs is checked any PCC values NOT assigned in the PCC table that is all values falling under Def will use the spacing values specified in the Input Filter e If the Print Option Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs is unchecked the spacing values specified in the PCC table for Def will be used instead of those specified in the Input Filter 150 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu USING THE SPACING SETTI
364. own menu lists the resources that can be packed That is environments forms pagedef font graphics translation table and so on The dialogue will list files of the currently selected resource type The default setting is environment It is important to understand that there are resources that can hold further resources within them and atomic resources which cannot For example an environment can contain forms forms can contain graphics or fonts However fonts cannot contain further resources Hence an environment or form is a resource and a font or graphic is termed an atomic resource Hence the radio buttons are enabled and disabled according to the selection of resources If a non atomic resource is selected then all the three radio options will be available Add Selected Files This option will pack the selected resources only Only Add Selected Files This option unconditionally packs the resource and its f associated sub resources and Required Resources The Paris Designer Reference Manual 295 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu gt To pack selected files only or selected files and required resources 1 Select the file type and the required files then the desired radio button either Add Selected Files Only or Add Selected Files and Required Resources Add Pack Files Select File Type Form 2218 Bytes 21 11 2000 J 414 Bytes 14 11 2000 1911 Bytes 11 06 1998 7588 Bytes 10 1
365. ox Settings SETTING Box CORNERS Square x Size o y Size o Comers The box corners can be set to Square or Round If Round is chosen the adjacent x Size and y Size boxes will be activated and the degree of curvature can be defined Z NOTE 1 Round corners are not supported by HP PCL 4 printers 2 Shadow cannot be used with Round corners 406 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 17 Editing Dynamic and Static Box Settings SETTING THE POSITION FOR A Box Position Left 125 Width 12 5 Top 34 0 Height 6 0 After a Box has been added its position on the page can be viewed and changed if required via the View Change Box dialogue e The current left and top position of the Box on the page grid is displayed in the dialogue The unit of measurement is that selected for the grid spacing in the System Settings dialogue Systems menu f NOTE The Box can also be moved by using the Move tool and its size changed by using the Edit tool LM eee RN ee The Paris Designer Reference Manual 407 Chapter 17 Editing Dynamic and Static Box Settings SETTING THE PROPERTIES FOR A DYNAMIC Box ELEMENT r Properties Horizontal Fixed M Vertical Fired L f In the Horizontal and Vertical fields set the properties of Horizontal and Vertical a dynamic box element to Fixed Float or Resize Refer to Chapter 10 Using Dynamic Form Elements in the Paris Desi
366. ox dialogue displays the current Properties setting for the element 404 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 17 Editing Dynamic and Static Box Settings SETTING Box ATTRIBUTES Sample Attributes Border Soid v Weight Light v Fill None v Shadow Noe v The outline of a box can be defined as Solid Broken Dotted None no line to be drawn around the box Click on the adjacent Color box to open the Color Palette and set the border color The use of the Color Palette is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer The weight thickness of a box can be defined as Light Medium Heavy Custom When Custom is selected the adjacent box is activated for entry of the required outline weight in 300 inch dots The fill for a box can be defined as None Light Medium Heavy Solid Click on the adjacent Color box to open the Color Palette and set the fill color The use of the Color Palette is described in Part Four Common Functions in the Paris Designer The shadow for a box can be defined as Left Top Right Top Left Bottom If a shadow option is selected the adjacent box is activated for entry of the required shadow weight in 300 inch dots The default weight is the weight of the Border The current attribute settings are displayed in the box in the Sample field The Paris Designer Reference Manual 405 Chapter 17 Editing Dynamic and Static B
367. palette the tiles have no green or blue values Color puse Color Color m m HEN HEEN EEEE HEEN EHNEN BENMN EEEE Options Options The Blueshade Greenshade and Redshade Palettes The Blueshade Greenshade and Redshade palettes provide a Black and White tile then a further 14 tiles with the value of the primary color remaining at 255 and the Blue Red and Green values varying to produce each shade Color Color B B mH EEEE TETEN EEE Options The Paris Designer Reference Manual 523 Chapter 22 The Color Palette function The GreyScale Palette The GreyScale Palette Greyscal Pal contains the usual black in the first tablet then white in the second with incrementally darker grey tones in the following fourteen tablets These grey tones can be used as shade patterns on PostScript printers as an alternative to the current three density system light medium and dark available in Paris f NOTE The GreyScale Palette will only work on PostScript printers On non Post Script printers the grey tones will print as solid black Color pm B 5 Oo Options A Paris form called Greyscal Frm can be found in your Paris form directory PARIS FRM which can be loaded into your Paris Form Editor and printed on your PostScript printer so that you can compare the relative densities of the Grey tones Shade patterns For example in the two squares illustrated above the Fill attr
368. play the 16 color palette then click on the Options button to display the Palette Options dialogue View Change Text Settings x m Attributes r Position Font arial 8 Regular 6 0 Ipi Add Frame Spacing eo Per Inch Reset Edit font list Left 42 0 Rotate None i Color ia a Word wrapping enabled i Width 17 1000 BM m Sample B Height 123 ABC x BOGE BEEBE Horizontal Justify Left CPUS Vertical Justify Top 52 Cancel x Save Palette Custom Palette The Paris Designer Reference Manual 531 Chapter 22 The Color Palette function 3 Choose Custom Palette from the dialogue to display the Color Palette The 16 colors displayed in the Custom colors range will be those of the currently loaded palette whether the default palette red redshade etc color S E mI HESS BI rmm ee f ie f AEs EEFT g EEE EEE ee BEMENESENINM Custom colors BH m mr m Hue 200 Bed 2 ime Fe m F Define Custom Colors gt gt ColorlSolid Lum 120 Blue 255 Cancel Add to Custom Colors 4 Choose a color closest to the color required from the Basic or Custom colors range then Either Move the selector within the color spectrum up down left or right and the pointer up or down the scale to adjust the color levels Or If known enter the color levels required
369. pter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu 9 To load a data file 1 Choose the Open Data option or using the shortcut keys Alt D The Select Enter File to Open DTA dialogue will be displayed listing the data files in your Designer system Look in S Dt e amp ierER a Ms stat dta Files of type Data Files dta Cancel 2 Select the required file from the File List then choose Open 4f NOTE Loading a sample printstream data file is also explained in Chapter 3 of the Paris Designer User s Manual 33 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CAPTURING A SAMPLE OF THE PRINTSTREAM DATA Yi C File menu gt Data Capture Data Designing a Paris environment that processes your print files correctly requires an accurate sample of the corresponding input data print file It is possible to create sample data files via the Data Edit Data function however you must ensure that the data file is identical to any live data that will be used by the Paris Spooler Alternatively the Paris Designer s Capture Data function can be used In order to capture an accurate sample of data from your print files Paris includes a Capture Data function that allows you to direct sample data files to disk for future use in the Environment Editor In this way you can be sure that your environment is configured for live data The Capture Data function allows you to capture data to disk from either
370. put Char column to change a translation code is displayed in the dialogue view Change Translation Table r Character encodings Double click in the Output Char column to change a translation code Output Codes in Red have been changed from the default Output byte value Input byte value The Paris Designer Reference Manual 139 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Displaying the character set The Display drop down menu allows you to select decimal hex or Displa rae literal characters for the display of the current character set 26 26 27 27 28 28 The Decimal table ranges from 30 30 0 to 255 and uses ten different 31 31 characters usually the decimal 32 32 digits Display Decimal 14 14 1B 1B 1c 1C 1D 1D Hexadecimal is a base 16 numbering system using the Display Hex digits 0 to 9 then the letters A to F eg decimal 12 equals hexadecimal C Omr g vit u C r 8 5vwu Literal units directly represent Display Literal a value for example 14 represents the integer fourteen April represents the character string April 140 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Modifying the output value of a character You can modify the output value for the relevant input value directly in the Translation Table dialogue Any modified values are displayed in RED In the example below we have selected the
371. py Pagel Page2 All None All None Delete 8 Click on the page def in the Clipboard list the lt lt Copy button will be highlighted 9 Select the lt lt Copy button the pagedef will be copied to the Objects list Internal Clipboard x Eopy gt gt lt lt Copy 10 Click on the Exit button you will be returned to the Select Page Def dialogue The Paris Designer Reference Manual 559 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Select Page Def x You can select Files and edit the File To Edit Create Paget copied pagedef Internal External Delete D elete Clip Edit Create Exit You can select and edit the copied pagedef or exit the dialogue to return to the View Change Print Order dialogue e The copied page def will not be displayed in the dialogue and must be added to the Page Definitions list e Creating a new pagedef will add it to the list of available pagedefs however it does not make it the current pagedef 4f NOTE If a page def has been created as an external page def it is available to be added to all environments and can be displayed and added by selecting the Add button in the View Change Print Order dialogue 560 The Paris Designer Reference Manual APPENDIX A USING THE MEDIA MAPPING FUNCTION Appendix A USING THE MEDIA MAPPING FUNCTION The Media Mapping function in Paris applies only to Xerox Docuprint 4050 NPS
372. r the downloading and management of resources to Windows 6 WARNING Windows GDI does not understand bitmap fonts If the application contains bitmap fonts Windows passes the information to the driver It is up to the printer driver to provide a solution to managing the fonts Note also that bitmap fonts will not appear in the Font List if a GDI printer driver is selected Refer to Chapter 20 Using the Font List function of this manual and Adding a font to the font list in Chapter 11 of the Paris Designer User s Manual 70 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu XPD Resource Management Commands for PCL and PostScript printers XPD files contain command options to manage printer resources These options enable you to tailor Paris resource management according to the particular requirements of your printer Some Paris supplied XPDs have these entries already added 6 WARNING XPD files can be edited using a standard text editor however changing XPDs without proper instruction can be detrimental It is recommended that XPD files should NOT be changed except by experienced users or under instructions from the distributor A full description of the working of XPD and PPD files can be found on page 60 XPD ManageFonts Command The options for the XPDManageFonts command and the applicable printers are as follows XPD ManageFonts Command Use XPDManageFonts None For Docupri
373. r to the section Adding Modifying and Removing a Print Destination in Part One Chapter One of this manual The Reset Resources option in the File menu is used to reset the default printer before you print for the first time for the day or if the printer has been turned off This is necessary for Paris to send the special characters for drawing elements before the printer can print them correctly 370 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 11 8 gt System FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR SYSTEM MENU The System Menu lists the functions relevant to the on screen display such as grid time and date the view of the document switching editors and print preview Table 11 1 indicates the System menu options and the dialogue displayed when the option is chosen if applicable and the function of the option Each function and the use of any associated dialogue is described in detail on the following pages Settings Alt E System Set the grid attributes time and date Settings display and edit options Zoom Full Page Alt 1 Displays the full document scaled to fit the Screen Zoom Out Alt 2 Reduces the view of the document on screen by 50 Zoom In Alt 3 Enlarges the view of the document on screen by 50 Switch AlttW Switch to Form Editor Preview Alt V Po Display the document as it will print Table 11 1 Functions in the System Menu The Paris Designer Reference Manual 371 DEFINING THE SYSTEM
374. r used as a line delimiter The Paris Designer Reference Manual 123 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu View Change Input Filter Input Character r Input Characters 4 p Character Attributes 7 bypassed This character is a Printable character This character is a Line End This character is a Page End r Spacing Ignore Ignore Ignore Skip to channel 1 Ignore eee o lanore Line End Space 1 line Ignore No End Pr ntthe current line lgnore Line End m 2 J After printing the current line isplay H Display Hex E C Skip to channel 1 Load Save Space line a special m J Before printing the current line If the selected character has been defined as a Line End the line spacing action to be taken is set in the Spacing section of the dialogue Z NOTE Printable It is possible for a character to be both printable and a line end character in which case it will print as well as act as a line delimiter However this is not common Line End Page End When This character is a Page End option is selected the character will act as a form feed and should only be associated with the form feed byte The use of this option should also be coordinated with the Spacing settings The Line End checkbox will also have to be selected to activate the Spacing options Refer to the section Wit
375. r your PC Print Mode may be Simplex or Duplex This refers to whether the page will be printed on one side or both sides duplex printer only If the Print Mode is Duplex the current side Front or Back being printed will be displayed If Simplex Front will always be displayed The information that determines the end of a page This can be a run time event page event or the number of pages being read The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE SELECT TEXT BLOCK FUNCTION D c Environment menu Select Text Block Select Text Block dialogue gt CH N 4 Message 11 n Text Blocks Description Max Lines Number of Events 5 01 lt Repeated Data O1 Membership De B B 02 MemName amp Ad B 0 02 Summary 12 1 03 Travel History 10 7 D 5 5 Fliaht Details The Select Text Block dialogue lists the number and description of the text blocks in the current environment including the number of lines and events in each text block The dialogue is used to set the current text block for adding dynamic form elements Refer to Chapter 10 of the Paris Designer User Manual 227 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 6 gt Move FUNCTIONS IN THE ENVIRONMENT EDITOR MOVE MENU The Move Menu lists the options for displaying the pages in the current environment It works as a Go to page function 4 NOTE The Files Bar also contains First Page Any Page
376. raphic by selecting the filename is described In Chapter 10 of the Paris Designer User s Manual under Adding and floating a dynamic graphic If the Select By Field option is chosen the label on the adjacent button will be Field r Attributes Source Ef Y Name Field Clicking on the Field button will open the Fields List dialogue Loading Select By a dynamic graphic by selecting a field is described in Chapter 8 of the Field Paris Designer User s Manual under Using a field to load a graphics file Field Loading a Static Graphic Name Graphic Graphic Choosing the Graphic button opens the Select Enter File to Load dialogue to load a graphic file from your hard disk A graphic file must be stored in the PARIS GRF directory to be accessible for loading Loading a static graphic by selecting the filename is described in detail in Chapter 11 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Attributes 412 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 18 Editing Dynamic and Static Graphic Settings Watermark Active Color hz Rotation The Rotation drop down menu offers the options None Left 90 Invert and Right 90 Select the required option to rotate the graphic accordingly Making the Watermark active selecting the Active checkbox changes the order in which objects elements are sent to the printer This will ensure that the graphic is the first object sent to the printer Subsequent elem
377. raphic handling XPDManageGrafs Harddisk For 4517 4220 4230 printers Downloads to the hard disk once XPDManageGrafs Download For PCL and PostScript printers which have no hard disk Downloads the graphics as needed XPDManageGrafs Always Default for PostScript printers XPDManageGrafs True Same as Download NOTE PostScript defaults to Always PCL defaults to Download 72 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu XPD Graphics Compression commands Paris offers you the option to compress graphics using XPD Graphics Compression commands Using graphics compression will make the output files created by Paris considerably smaller an important benefit when color applications are involved Using XPD Graphics Compression commands Graphics compression is activated in Paris via an XPD entry in the XPD file as follows XPDGrafCompression type where type can be either None RLE or Flate Using either RLE or Flate invokes the graphics handling system None Using None restores the original Paris graphics handling system The benefit of size reduction to output files is not available using this type RLE Using RLE achieves a 20 reduction in size of simple images e g black and white less on color graphics only 1 2 in some cases RLE can be used with PostScript Level 2 printers and up It has little effect on increasing Paris Engine throug
378. re edited in the element s Default Settings and View Change dialogues The Default Settings and View Change dialogues for Dynamic Form Elements elements added to an environment and Static Form Elements elements added to a form are similar The dialogues for Dynamic Form Elements have additional functions for setting the element s dynamic properties Selecting an Element tool from the Tools Bar then clicking on the Settings button will display the element s Default Settings dialogue Selecting the View tool then clicking on an element in an environment or form will display the element s View Change dialogue Using each element s dialogue to edit the settings is illustrated and described on the following pages The Paris Designer element tools are e Text tool e Line tool The use of these tools to add an element is described in Chapter 11 of the Paris Designer User s Manual e Box tool e Circle tool e Graphic tool e Chart tool The use of the Add Text Block tool to add a text e Text Block tool _ block is described in not available in the Form Editor Chapter 3 of the Paris Designer User s Manual BI Ei i e e Fei e The Paris Designer Reference Manual 383 CHAPTER 14 EDITING TEXT SETTINGS The Default Text Settings dialogue is used to edit the default settings for text before it is added to a form or environment The View Change Text Settings dialogue is used to view and edit the c
379. ream In some cases however data does not exist and a model printstream will need to be created which can then be used to help design the application which will generate the actual printstream CREATING A MODEL OF THE PRINTSTREAM DATA The Edit Data function is used to create a model printstream data file Your model printstream can contain all the parameters you have in your larger print files Once created and saved in the Edit Data File dialogue your data file can be loaded into the Environment Editor divided into text blocks and have other elements added to test its modeling parameters If further changes are required the file can be reloaded into the Edit Data File dialogue and edited as required EDITING A SAMPLE OF THE ACTUAL PRINTSTREAM The Edit Data function can also be used to edit a sample of the actual printstream to simulate any conditions that may be required in your larger print files The file can be displayed in Text View or Hex View In the same way as the model printstream the edited sample printstream can be saved and loaded into the Environment Editor for testing then reloaded into the Edit Data File dialogue if further changes are required FILE SIZE IN THE EDIT DATA FUNCTION 45 The Edit Data function has a file size limit of 32 000 characters If you attempt to load a file greater than 32 000 characters you will be prompted with a dialogue that gives you the option to truncate the file If you accept the
380. rect 2 The XPDFeature entries must be placed before the Include line in the XPD On the following pages the appearance of the features in the Paris system is demonstrated The Paris Designer Reference Manual 601 Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris Using the Environment Output option to select a feature The Testonly xpd file would produce the following list in the Output Settings dialogue iew Change Output Settings x m Page Printing Font Indexing Simplex Active Offset o J Start at One Mafie gt 3 Replace invalid index with first font Page Shift Front Back Along long edge m Color Indexing Active Offset Along short edge 7 Start at One Printline Size Event Handling Offset jo Lenath f 33 Suppress Generated Blank Lines Device Specific Features Binding amp bondina insert in Xerox Job Ticket Binding amp Mwhipping insert in P 5 Job Comments Binding insert in Job Header Binding bonding Peros Job Ticket Binding amp Whipping Job Comment Binding Job Preamble Entries selected from the Drop down list of Device drop down list P Specific Features f NOTE Refer to Using Output Settings in Chapter 5 for instructions on using the Output Settings function in Paris 602 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix D Device Specific Features in Paris Using the Env
381. reen checkbox displays the message s on the computer screen Selecting the Show at Printer checkbox displays the message s on the printer screen of those printers with screen capabilities Selecting Wait will keep the print job in the Spooler until released A message of up to 80 characters can be entered in each Line field Clears the message from the dialogue and disables the function To activate the Reply feature Either Enter the name of a valid field in the Field to store reply in box Or Click on the Select Field button to select a field from the Fields dialog If the Field to store reply in box contains a valid field name then the Engine will fill that field with whatever value the operator specifies at runtime If the operator does not enter a reply the field will be left unchanged This allows a default to be entered at design time The Paris Designer Reference Manual 223 THE CEP FUNCTION D gt Environment menu gt CEP Options View Change Xerox CEP Options dialogue x General Options Fixed Length Input Records 128 v Translate Control Bytes Emulate Online JDE New Sheet on Input Tray Change m Spacing Options CEP Spacing Reset Spacing On Page Boundary Align Overprint Line baselines DJDE Options Emulate ITEXT OTEXT WAIT Preserve CME Events for BEGIN DJDE Channel Skips generate blank lines R T Event Offset Adjustment o
382. relatively standard and will normally include all bytes with decimal values of 016 through to 255 The bytes with values below decimal 016 are generally reserved for special functions such as line terminators and page ends and also includes communication protocol bytes escape bytes and many other special functions which will not be required by the Paris Designer Which of these special function values should I be concerned with In almost all situations the Input Filter should be set up to ignore all bytes less than decimal 016 with the exception of line and page terminators Refer to the section What do carriage return line feed and form feed bytes look like on page 5 for descriptions and illustrations The Paris Designer Reference Manual 111 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu What does a line terminator look like A very simple analogy is that of a typewriter Imagine that the Paris Designer is a person typing onto an old fashioned typewriter As the person types they will mainly press keys corresponding to a hammer which delivers the image of a character onto the paper When they reach the end of the line they will need to perform two functions otherwise they will type off the edge of the paper 1 They will need to move the carriage of the typewriter so that the next character is positioned at the start of a line left most position 2 They will then need to feed the paper up one line so that the
383. rence Manual 335 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer The EuroGoods field calculation string Field Calculations x r Calculations The calculation string CUR2STR EURO Goods FROM GBP 2 2 FRONT is made up of the CUR2STR function and the EURO Rounding function The functions convert a plain currency into a formatted string and a national currency to the Euro rounding to two decimal places The syntax of the two functions combined is a A string containing the unformatted currency and the amount to convert the field Goods which is filled with the extracted text 24444 00 b The direction of the conversion FROM to convert to Euros from a national currency c The rate id GBP Pounds Sterling the national currency identifier already added as a variable rate d The precision 2 to two decimal places e The character to use as the decimal separator f The character to use as the thousands separator g The precision 2 to two decimal places h The negative option FRONT any negative values to be printed with a leading char This calculation string returns 3 627 19 the converted Goods amount in Euros the field value EuroGoods f NOTE If you click in the Calculate text field of the Add Edit Field dialogue the Help button will be activated Click on the button to display the Field Calculations dialogue which lists all the Functions that can be
384. returns abc has no effect The Paris Designer Reference Manual 205 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Comparison Operators Comparison Operators always return a numeric floating value of either 0 0 or 1 0 They perform a comparison of the two operands and then return the appropriate value Strings are compared character by character until either the end of one string is reached or a non matching character is found The result of the operator is determined by the ASCII values of the characters at the point where the comparison stops The following Comparison operators are available gt Greater Than This operator returns 1 0 if the Left operand is greater than the Right otherwise it returns 0 0 Examples 5 gt 7 returns 0 0 44 2 gt 21 6 returns 1 0 52 abc returns 1 0 abc converts to 0 0 32 67 gt 100 returns 0 0 100 converts to 100 0 abc gt ab returns 1 0 c is greater than no char xyz gt 5 1 returns 1 0 5 1 converts to string 5 1 3 gt 21 returns 1 0 3 is greater than 2 lt Less Than This operator returns 1 0 if the Left operand is less than the Right otherwise it returns 0 0 Examples 2 lt 17 returns 1 0 4 7 lt 32 76 returns 0 0 3 5 text returns 0 0 text converts to 0 0 13 4 56 returns 0 0 56 converts to 56 0 word lt 55 retur
385. ring the editing process The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE GRID A check indicates the option is selected Display the drop down menu to choose the required measurement f NOTE Different units of Chapter 2 Functions in the Environment Editor System Menu Enter the unit of measurement in System Settings the adjacent boxes Horizontal Per Inch 10 0 ertical Per Inch 6 0 v Visible IV Active v Half measurement may be used for Horizontal and Vertical grid spacing Preferably the Vertical grid should be set equal to the line spacing used in the text blocks in the environment For example when you need to design a form or pagedef to fit data with a given number of lines per inch the text blocks may be 6 lines per inch it is easier to align form elements if the vertical grid spacing is set to the same line spacing Horizontal and Vertical 95 Horizontal and Vertical drop down menus provide options for setting the grid measurement as follows Inches Grid divisions in multiples of 1 inch apart Centimeters Grid divisions in multiples of 1 cm apart Dots 1 300 inch The default resolution of a laser printer is 300 dots per inch Points 1 72 inch 0 353mm Units per inch Number of lines characters per inch Units per centimeter Number of lines characters per centimeter The spacing for the grid measurement is entered in the boxes adjacent to the Horizontal and Vertical
386. rinter definition and select the Reset at start of next job checkbox This causes the Spooler to reset the resources at the beginning of the next job Once the resources are sent the Reset at start of next job option is canceled 85 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu e If you are using a PCL printer with no permanent storage facilities that IS being shared with other applications you would choose At Job Start This will cause the Spooler to reset the resources at the start of each job as the resources are overwritten if another application sends output to the printer e If you are using a PCL printer with no permanent storage facilities as a dedicated printer you would choose At System Start to reset the resources each time the system is started C PostScript printers no permanent storage e Ifyou are using a Postscript printer with no permanent storage facilities the option chosen will be irrelevant as Paris must send all the resources required for a job at the beginning of each job Media Mapping Media Mapping is specific to Xerox Docuprint 4050 NPS 4850 NPS 4090 NPS 4890 NPS and 4635 NPS printers only Resources Reset Never M If you are defining a Docuprint printer you must define the media mapping for the printer if you wish to create jobs that use different media types within a single job This is explained in Appendix A Using the Me
387. rinting the current line i E H 20 i Skip to channel Load Save Space 1 line Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 115 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Line feed Return the print position to the left and feed a line after printing Do not print the character OA Hex 10 Decimal iew Change Input Filter Input Characters cha Pint Jing End Ja Line End No End Line End x OB Ignore oc Ignore Display He Save Load x r Character Attributes This character is a Printable character IV This character is a Line End This character is a Page End Spacing Before printing the current line Skip to channel 1 Space 1 line IV Print the current line JV After printing the current line C Skip to channel 1 Space 1 line Form feed Return the print position to the left and end the logical page after printing Do not print the character OC Hex 12 Decimal View Change Input Filter Input Characters Char P nt Line End Ignore No End Di lgnore No End 02 Ignore No End 03 Ignore No End 04 Ignore No End 05 Ignore No End 06 Ignore No End 07 Ignore No End n8 Ignore No End n3 Ignore No End lgnore Line End Ignore No End Line End Display Hed Load Save Ignore r Character Attributes
388. ris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu What do carriage return line feed and form feed bytes look like Binary representation of functions such as printable characters carriage returns line feeds and form feeds are purely arbitrary however certain standards have emerged In almost all cases the carriage return line feed and form feed bytes are represented by the following decimal hexadecimal values a Decimal Value Hexadecimal Value Carriage return byte 0D Line feed byte 1 0A Form feed byte 12 0C What is the best way to interpret the carriage return line feed and form feed input characters As carriage returns and form feeds may or may not be required it is recommended that the following actions be defined for each of these functions In this way they will be interpreted correctly should they be included in the data however simple line end only terminated lines will still function Carriage return Return the print position to the left but do not feed a line Do not print the character OD Hex 13 Decimal iew Change Input Filter m Input Characters Character Attributes IPint a This character is a Printable character This character is a Line End This character is a Page End Spacing J Before printing the current line Skip to channel 1 Space 1 line Print the current line Ignore No End m 3 zl After p
389. ris Dta INVSAMPLE DTA already exists Do you want to replace it Choose OK to overwrite the file f NOTE If you use this method when you return to the Environment Editor you will immediately see the effect of the changes you have made Or Type a new name for the file in the File field then choose OK The new file will be saved to the source directory f NOTE If you use this method to view the effect of the changes you have made you will have to return to the Environment Editor and load the new data file into your model environment 50 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Choose Close to exit the Edit Data File dialogue and return to the Environment Editor You can repeat the process until you have achieved all the conditions in your model printstream that you wish to apply to your main printstream files f NOTE If you click on the Hex View tab you will be able to view the data in hexadecimal Edit View Data File Xl Text View Hex View CNPARISNDTANNVSAMPLE DTA Ss Mr Murray Dell a 33 Pleasant Place Picton N QUEENSTOWN 865 LZw 02 10 00 04 10 00 30 75 05 10 00 10 10 00 28 50 BD xa Text View Hex View 30 10 00 260 00 Edit View Data File 6C OD Mr Murray Dell 6C 61 33 Pleasant Pla 20 51 ce Picton N Q AC 5 UEENSTOWN 865 LZ 20 W 02 10 00 20 20 35 258 65 20 04 10 0 20 30 75 20 2E 30 289 40 05 10 0 20 20
390. ro Rates utility 319 pasting copied text into Paris 394 PCC bytes 138 150 and EBCDIC 140 channel number 158 defining actions 150 155 position in print record 160 print options 152 printing 151 spacing the first line in a text block 162 using line terminators as default 152 PCC table loading 154 saving 163 PCC value adding 164 PCL4 72 Pie chart adding data 457 adding general settings 462 adding headings 460 adding labels 459 adding legend 461 PostScript Type 1 font re encoding 81 PPD PostScript Printer Description files 59 62 previewing a document in the Environment Editor 102 previewing a document in the Form Editor 380 Previewing a graphic before adding 413 Print Order function 184 Print queues Novell creating 581 Novell creating for input 582 Novell preparing for input 584 printer adding 56 57 attributes 58 defining NEXTFILE output settings 65 media mapping 88 modifying 56 92 output destination 64 PCL4 72 physical page shift 89 PostScript how Paris handles TrueType fonts 82 rebuilding printer type list 63 removing 56 93 resetting resources 87 94 372 resource storage 70 selecting Index in the Environment Editor 55 in the Form Editor 370 NEXTFILE as the output destination 65 support for printer resident PostScript fonts 76 type 59 type list 59 updating resources 85 86 XPD graphics compression commands for PCL and PostScript printers 75 XPD r
391. ro to a national currency 342 Euro Rates utility 327 field value 198 as an index entry 202 as part of a calculation 202 to build a chart 202 to insert into static text 198 to select a graphic 201 Font Indexing 167 Font Reference utility 306 Help Menu 354 Input Filter 124 Input Settings 148 Media Mapping 565 Operator Messages 225 Output Settings 176 Page Printing in Output Settings 177 Printline Size in Output Settings 179 Relative option in a text block 470 Resource Manager utility 294 Run Time events 277 Skip option in the Input Filter 128 Spacing options in the Input Filter 127 Spacing Settings 151 153 square or round corners in boxes 408 text editing options 106 Translation Table 141 Update Field event local text block 498 Update Field event local text block to fill a field value 502 watermark option for a graphics file 415 Utilities Euro Rates 308 Font Reference 305 Resource Manager 292 Utilities Menu 291 307 V View Current Page Attributes dialogue 227 View Menu functions Environment Editor 103 View Menu functions Form Editor 381 View Change Box dialogue 406 View Change Chart Settings dialogue 420 Index View Change Circle dialogue 401 View Change Event List dialogue 484 500 505 508 View Change Line dialogue 396 View Change Print Messages dialogue Operator Messages 225 View Change Text Block Settings dialogue 465 View Change Text Settings dialogue 3
392. ross referencing the font entries from the printer s XPD PPD with the XPDFontName entries from the FontName xfs file This gives us the Windows equivalent name and style for the printer font 4 This Windows name and style is then checked against the XPDFontSubstitution entries from the FontSub xfs file If a match is found then we know we can find a width table for this font The original windows name and style are then checked against the fonts added by ATM If there is no match then this font is added The check against the ATM list simply prevents a problem where ATM and the printer PPD both reference the same font name such as Helvetica If ATM is not loaded The list of available Type 1 fonts is built by comparing the Printer resident fonts with the FontName xfs and FontSub xfs files as in the above process 76 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Adding a new resident font to Paris There are 3 ways to make a resident printer font available to Paris 1 Add a font entry to the XPD PPD for the printer Most manufacturer supplied PPD files will already contain these entries 2 Add an XPDFontName entry to the UserName xfs file This maps the internal name from the font entry to a Windows family name and style If ATM is loaded and can supply a font with the same Windows name and style as entered then that is all that needs to be done 3 Ad
393. rt A complex bar chart can have one or more sets Label Set The label for the set on the Legend Double click in the adjacent Label box to add the label Add Bar Click on the Add Bar button to add a bar to the set Value The value of the bar Double click in the adjacent Value box to add a bar value If adding a dynamic chart the value can be filled by a field The Field exact field name must be entered Refer to Using Fields to Create a Chart in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Label The label for the bar on the X axis Double click in the adjacent Label box to add a bar label If adding a dynamic chart the label can be filled by a field See Field above The Paris Designer Reference Manual 441 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Remove Bar Click on the Remove Bar button to remove a bar from the set The last added bar will be removed from all the sets Attributes Fill If you have chosen to display the chart in color you do not need to define the fill attributes If more than one set has been added to the chart the Attributes column will display Set 1 Set 2 and so on The attributes for each set can be defined as the style of fill required Light Horz stripe Diag hatched Horizontal Medium Vert stripe Cross hatched Vertical Heavy 45 stripe Forward diagonal Cross None 135 stripe Back diagonal Diagonal Cross Solid Choose a different fill for each set Z NOT
394. s Set the justification to Right Set the Number of Chars to 15 7 Click on OK 492 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Example 2 Using a Data Change Event to change the font and text Select the Edit tool i and place the cursor Previous total in the required Mew miles fF atta tah E epee oe a position in the text block The position is displayed in the status bar Statement date Press Ctl M to mark the text to be Last statement date lt 12 Oct 97 overwritten EM 12 Apr 98 Using the right arrow key mark the text Previoustotal Total Miles New miles sene Press Ctl F to display the Data Change Event dialogue Statement date Last statement date 12 Oct 97 12A pr98 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 493 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Select the Font checkbox and What To Change the font Arial 10 Color Palette Bold from the LE Font List Xp iv Font ARIAL 10 Bold v Tex Total Miles Available Select the Text n checkbox and Position 38 400 enter the text Ma 34 TT Total Miles Width 6 8333 Justify en 1 Available in the Case 5 E Text edit field LUHPDERENIS FilField Options When To Change Because you have Across Specified Range marked the text to be EAS 7 overwritten Across First L
395. s 399 position 398 Page Para event 247 position of a text block 469 printstream data 46 47 50 text 386 94 attributes 388 dynamic properties 392 position 390 Text Block element 464 513 text block event 512 513 Text Block options 471 the mappings in an environment 573 the text blocks in a page definition 187 the tray mapping in an environment 571 variable rates in the Euro Rates utility 315 E editing text options 105 options using 106 editors switching 101 379 encoding systems 132 133 140 End Current Page event adding 260 using 259 End Text Block event 262 adding 264 environment opening 26 recording environment design information 30 recording environment information 29 saving 27 under a new name 28 Translation Table 136 using Media Mapping 567 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 609 Index Environment Change event 287 adding 289 editing 290 Environment Change event list 287 packing 288 Environment Editor functions 23 Environment Information dialogue recording environment information 29 Environment menu functions 109 229 Environment Output option for a Device Specific Feature 600 Euro functions using to convert a national currency to the Euro 337 using to convert any national currencies 342 using to convert the Euro to a national currency 342 Euro functions in the Euro Rates utility 320 Euro Rate utility Euro functions 320 Euro Rates utility 308 about u
396. s then repeats x number of copies Z NOTE The collate option also affects how copies are applied If the collate option is Report then the Paris Engine will handle copy requests The input data is processed x number of times and the data output will be x times larger If an input file contains only one logical report then there is no difference in the output between report and file collation However there may be a difference as to where the copy request is handled The rule for using the Copy Sensitive Processing feature is very simple If the input data contains copy sensitive commands then turn this on Otherwise leave it OFF Refer to What is the effect of the Copy Sensitive Processing Required option on page 170 and How do the Collate Copy Sensitive options affect processing on page 171 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 181 THE PRINT ORDER FUNCTION gt Environment menu C Print Order C View Change Print Order dialogue View Change Print Order 7 x Page Definitions Forms Back Page Forms Add Edi Clear Add Clear Add Clear Refer to Chapter 9 of the Paris Designer User s Manual where the use of the Print Order function is explained in detail The Paris Designer Reference Manual 182 THE CURRENT PAGE DEFINITION FUNCTION The View Change Page Definition dialogue displays the attributes and text blocks for the current page definition
397. s and features can be recorded in the dialogue Whenever the form is opened the Form Info dialogue can be displayed to confirm and update the information The date and time are automatically updated by the system to reflect the last save Form Information xj Description Designer Mie Nyborg Description Form for MileS aver monthly statements Last Changed Date fi 9 01 2001 Time fi alan coca 362 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 10 Functions in the Form Editor File Menu SUMMARIZING THE FORM FILE Form Information x m Description Designer Mie Nyborg Description Form for MileSaver monthly statements m Last Changed Date j 3 01 2001 Time E JELE Cancel Description Use this field to type in a description of the form file for example monthly invoice form quarterly statement form electricity account form You can enter up to 255 characters or 5 lines of text Use this field to type in the form designer s name Last Changed This field displays an automatic log of the date and time when the form file was last saved The Paris Designer Reference Manual 363 364 ERGING FORMS TO CREATE A NEW FORM i gt File menu gt Merge Form Select Enter File To Load FRM dialogue The Merge Form option allows you to load and merge an existing form with the form that is current in the Form Editor All the elements within the merged f
398. s half way between the horizontal and vertical units This assists in more exact positioning of elements The half way points do not display EDIT OPTIONS Movement Can move in both directions v Auto Scroll With Cursor Numbers Edit Options The Movement pop up menu provides options for the control of the horizontal and vertical movement of elements This is useful for precise placement of related elements and groups of elements The grid settings do not affect the behavior of this option Both Choose Both to allow unrestricted placement of elements Vertical Choose Vertical to restrict movement to Vertical only Horizontal Choose Horizontal to restrict movement to Horizontal only Auto Scroll Select the Auto Scroll With Cursor checkbox to be able to move the With Cursor Pointer around freely with the mouse and click and place the text cursor when entering or editing text The default setting is for the option to be selected Show Block This option relates to text blocks and is not available in the Form Numbers Editor 374 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 11 Functions in the Form Editor System Menu AUTOSAVE AND SAVE r Autosave v Active Save every 5 minutes OK and Save Cancel Selecting the Active checkbox activates autosave for the form The default setting is autosave Active Save every Enter the required interval number of minutes for Autosave in this
399. s in the Environment Editor File Menu Status The Status is Active when receiving Waiting when inactive and Error when a problem occurs Blocks The number of Blocks indicates the data captured As a Block is 256 bytes you can estimate the amount of data captured and exit the process when required Exit At any time you can select Exit to stop the capture process This will close the file at that point Once a data file has been captured you can use it repeatedly within the Environment Editor Refer to Loading a Sample of the Printstream Data on page 32 and Creating Editing Model Printstream Data on page 45 42 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu How DO CAPTURE DATA FROM AN LPD QUEUE If you have created a job definition in which you have defined an LPD Queue as the input source in the Spooler refer to Chapter 2 of the Paris Spooler Technical Manual you can capture a data file from the LPD queue To begin with on your host computer create a test file and configure your LPR with the test file to go to the Paris LPD Queue gt To select LPD as the Input Source for Data Capture 1 Choose the Capture Data option from the Data sub menu The Select Input Source for Data Capture dialogue will be displayed Select Input Source For Data Li x Input Type Type LPD M m Input Source Settings Cancel
400. s possible to specify a number of bytes and a number of lines In this case the bytes are stripped first and then the lines The result is an accumulation of the two 144 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu THE INPUT SETTINGS INPUT PROCESSOR PLUG IN FUNCTION Input Plug Ins provide a mechanism for a separate program to process input data before being delivered to the Paris Engine for final formatting Creation of these Plug Ins can only be done by XLPrint or XLPrint accredited developers Please contact XLPrint for details The Paris Designer Reference Manual 145 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu USING INPUT SETTINGS Yi gt Environment menu Input Settings View Change Input Settings dialogue View Change Input Settings i x m Skip at start of Report Bytes D Lines 0 r Input Processor Plug In No Input Processing Settings No Special Input Processing has been selected Skip at start of Report I the Bytes and Lines fields enter the number of bytes and or lines to be ignored at the start of each new report If you have an Input Plug In see previous page enter the name in the text box or select from the drop down menu Input Processor Plug In 146 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE SPACING SETTINGS FUNCTION The Spacing Settings function is accessed via the Environment menu Selecting the Spacing
401. s used to select one of the defined print destinations as the current printer All proof prints will be directed to the currently selected printer It is not possible to select more than one printer Print destinations are those output devices available to the PC running the Designer that have been added to the list of print destinations Print destinations are added via the View Change Printers dialogue Refer to Adding Modifying and Removing a Print Destination on page 55 gt To print to a selected print destination 1 Choose Select Printer from the File menu The Select Printer dialogue will be displayed 2 Choose the required print destination from the list then choose OK Select Printer x Printers Name Type Output Default Generic PCL5 Sim LPT1 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 54 ADDING MODIFYING AND REMOVING A PRINT DESTINATION Yi c File menu gt Modify Printers C View Change Printers dialogue To add or modify a print destination the Modify Printers option is selected from the File menu to display the View Change Printers dialogue When Paris is first installed a default printer driver is supplied Generic PCLS and is displayed in the list of printers in the View Change Printers dialogue In the View Change Printers dialogue either select the Add button or right mouse click on a printer to display the pop up menu and choose Add The View Change Printer dialogue will be di
402. se PCC bytes 1 Clear all entries from the PCC Assignments list except for Def PCC Assignments Char Before Print 2 Select the checkbox for Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs i oe Print Options v Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs 6 WARNING Any values left in the PCC table other than Def will override the Input Filter settings B If the printstream data DOES use PCC bytes 1 Set the PCC table as required Any PCC values not assigned will be processed as Def 2 Deselect the checkbox for Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs This is so that the spacing value of Def will be taken from the Spacing Settings function and not from the Input Filter function Use the spacing options from the Input Filter for unassigned PCCs If necessary refer to Which spacing method takes priority on page 150 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 159 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Spacing the first line in a text block Apply the Before printing options of the first line Apply After printing options of the first line For compatibility reasons PCC spacing values of the first line in a text block will be ignored However this can be modified in the Print Options section of the dialogue by selecting the checkbox to apply the Before or After printing
403. sed to insert a default name For example a job name that may not be in the control file may be inserted by the user as a default name The default job name may be passed on through the Spooler s LPR control file as if it was in the control file being read by the Spooler 31 The Paris Designer Reference Manual LOADING A SAMPLE OF THE PRINTSTREAM DATA Yi C File menu gt Data gt Open Data S gt Alt D To be able to create an environment that processes your print files correctly you will require an accurate sample of each print file A sample of the printstream data is loaded into an environment by selecting the Open Data option from the Data sub menu The Paris Designer will list up to four of the last used data files below the Data sub menu the most recently opened data file appearing first in the list Clicking on a listed file will open it The PARIS DTA directory is a default only Data can be loaded from any available directory however it would be more efficient to store all sample data files in the default directory The DTA extension is also a default only The Paris Designer can accept any legitimate DOS extensions NOTE A sample of the printstream can be captured from your data files or can be created in the Edit Data File dialogue Refer to Capturing a Sample of the Printstream Data on page 34 and Creating a model of the printstream data on page 45 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Cha
404. sing the Euro functions 322 access levels 310 adding fields to the field list 330 converting a national currency to the Euro 337 converting any national currencies 342 converting the Euro to a national currency 342 data change events 308 defining the attributes for a variable conversion rate 312 example of using the Euro functions 326 fields and calculation strings 308 filling fields using a local text block Data Change event 332 filling fileds using data change events 309 ISO Currency Codes 343 setting the password 319 using 327 using Euro functions 327 viewing conversion rates 314 viewing fixed rates adding or editing variable rates 315 event handling in output settings suppressing generated blank lines 182 events Run Time 273 Events Change Back Form Page Para 251 Change Back Form Local Text Block 507 Change Form Page Para 249 Change Form Local Text Block 504 Change Output Event List 256 Change Page Definition 253 Data Change 476 End Current Page 258 End Text Block 262 Environment Change 287 Page Delete Page Para 272 Page Para 245 Select Device Features 601 Select Input Tray 266 Select Output Tray 267 text block copying from the Clipboard 548 copying onto the Clipboard 546 Update Field local text block 498 Fill field 498 501 502 Increment field 501 Update Field Page Para 268 Events Menu functions 231 90 example of using Device Specific Features in an XPD file 603
405. slands Pound Sterling GBP GWP Haiti Gourde HTG US Dollar USD Jersey Channel Islands Pound Sterling 344 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Korea Republic of Won Kyrgyzstan Som Lesotho Loti LSL Rand ZAR Libyan Arab Jamahiriya Libyan Dinar LYD Macau Pataca MOP O Madagascar Malagasy Franc MGF Marshall Islands US Dollar USD Wamwa Ouguiya MRO The Paris Designer Reference Manual 345 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer East Caribbean Dolla XCD Namibia Rand ZAR Namibia Dollar NAD Netherlands Netherlands Guilder NLG New Zealand New Zealand Dollar NZD Niger CFA Franc BCEAO XOF Northern Mariana Islands US Dollar USD US Dollar USD 346 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer o JJ U 4 T Qatari Rial Romania Leu Saint Vincent and the East Caribbean Dollar Grenadines D i S Saudi Arabia Saudi Riyal 6s Qo zi Ez X m Seychelles Seychelles Rupee op n m op co wae U U n I Svalbard and Jan Mayen Norwegian Krone Islands The Paris Designer Reference Manual 347 Euro Functions in the Paris Designer Syrian Arab Republic Syrian Pound SYP Tokelau New Zealand Dollar NZD Trinidad and Tobago Trinidad and Tobago Dollar TTD Turkey Turkish Lira TRL Turks and Caicos Islands US Dollar USD U A E UAE Dirham AED United Kin
406. splayed x Printers Name Type Output Accounts Xerox DocuPrint N32 PELS LPT1 Default Generic PCL5 Simplex LPT1 Document Color Canon BubbleJet BJC 7000 LPT1 Marketing L3 Xerox NPS4850 EL A eoa Er E Sales Deptl Generic PCLS A3 Duplex Settings Remove Add Settings Remove Cancel 55 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu ADDING A PRINTER The View Change Printer dialogue is used to add a print destination and define the added printer s attributes resource management capabilities and print image positioning physical page shift iew Change Printer x Printer File Name NEwPRT Full Name NEW PRINTER Type Generic PCL5 Simplex Rebuild Printer List Output To LPT1 Settings Resources Id 2 Update Reset Never Media Mapping Physical Page Shift Horizontal o Vertical o d Cancel The dialogue is divided into three sections Printer Resources Physical Page Shift 56 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Printer Attributes The Printer section of the dialogue deals with the printer attributes iew Change Printer x Enter printer Printer File Name and File Name MRKTL3 Full Name B Full Name Marketing L3 A printer is given a File Name and a Fu
407. st then choose Open je Greyscal frm a MS FRONT FRM a INVOICE FRM The form name will appear in the Change Back Form Event dialogue Filename MS BACK FRM Files of type FRM Cancel Change Form Event x st 5 Select the 1 Test button to r Description display the View Change Test dialogue and set the test Back Form Change conditions for the event Refer to Using Tests in Form Chapter 7 of this manual Change To MS BACK Tests 6 Once the test conditions i i NONE 2nd Test have been set return to the dialogue then choose OK Exit the remaining dialogues OK Cancel and return to the Environment Editor The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings How ARE SELECT DEVICE FEATURES EVENTS USED As previously explained Select Device Features events are specific events that allow the user to insert code to activate device specific features such as stapling binding collating folding and so on The following takes you through the process of adding a local text block Select Device Features event to an environment Before this can be done device specific features must be added to the Paris system and a thorough understanding of the use of the features is required This is described in Appendix D Device Specific Features in the Paris System of this manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 507 Chapter 20 E
408. style as each entry in step 2 4 If there are font entries that have a XPDFOntName that does not match any ATM supplied font then add an XPDFOntSubstitution entry to the UserSub xfs file to allow Paris to use this font With the above setup all Type 1 fonts that ATM or the printer understands will be available for use in designing forms and jobs and any font that the printer has resident will not used without downloading 6 WARNING XPD files can be edited using a standard text editor however changing XPDs without proper instruction can be detrimental It is recommended that XPD files should NOT be changed except by experienced users or under instructions from the distributor A full description of the working of XPD and PPD files can be found on page 60 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu PostScript Type 1 Font Re encoding Type 1 fonts are normally supplied in either downloadable or resident versions as Adobe standard encoding This differs significantly from the default Windows encoding for font characters mostly above ASCII 128 Type 1 font designers expect Windows applications normally the PostScript driver to re encode fonts when sending them to the printer Re encoding involves copying the font to a new name and changing the Encoding entry an array of 256 character glyph names to the required encoding The font is then called by this new name
409. t Save Form amp gt Alt S C Select Enter Save File Name FRM dialogue If you have loaded and modified an existing form and wish to save it by the same name you would choose the Save Form option from the File menu If you have switched from the Environment Editor to the Form editor and have modified the environment s form you would also use the Save option In both cases a message dialogue will be displayed confirming that the form has been written to disk Z NOTE If you modify a form and do not save it you will be prompted to do so before you exit the Form Editor The Paris Designer Reference Manual 359 SAVING A FORM UNDER A NEW NAME 8 c File menu 7 Save Form As amp gt AIE A Select Enter Save File Name FRM dialogue If you wish to save a new form you have created or save a form you have modified by a new name you would select the Save Form As option from the file menu this option is not available if you have switched from the Environment Editor to the Form Editor and to save a form you have modified after switching editors you would use the Save option as described on the previous page 79 To save a form file by a new name 1 Choose Save Form As from the File menu The Select Enter Save File Name dialogue will be displayed Enter the name for your form in the File field Select Enter Save File name 2 xi Save in I Frm e E3 ia AUTOSAVE MYNEW FRM j MS FORMI FR
410. t dialogue Choose Update Field from the drop down menu and click on the Add button to display the Update Field Event dialogue Update Field Event x r Description ptions Field 5 Click on the Field m button to display Opa Fa zl the Field List First Line I Num Lines fi First Char 1 Num Chars 255 Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 499 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Update Field Event 6 Select the FirstName field from the Field List and choose OK The field name will appear in the Update Field Event dialogue m Options FirstName x Update ri hi r Description First Line 1 Num Lines fi is Name First Char fi Num Chars 255 r Options OK C Field FistName Update Fi First Line 4 Num Lines I First Char 1 Num Chars fio 7 Enter the line and character positions and numbers then choose OK i Cancel The added event will be displayed in the View Change Event List dialogue 8 Exit the dialogue and return to the Environment Editor 4f NOTE If you open the Field List dialogue and display the Add Edit Field dialogue for To on 6 the MembName the Current Value of the m Local Text Block Events field will be filled with the extracted i ifi data 1 Fill Field PostCode rea Code 2 Fill Field FirstName First Name 3 Fill Field MemberNo Member Number 4 Fill Field AccnitNo
411. t Block 1 Membership Details of our environment the field name AccNum has been added to the field list To fill the field using an Update Field Event the position and length of the data in the text block has been established first and number of lines and characters and entered in the Update Field Event dialogue r Description Nm Lines Account No First Char Add Edit Field Options r Attributes Field Name AccntNo Update ri x Type AlphaNumeric First Line 2 Num Lines f Reset At Page Start First Char 72 Num Chars fig Cate SS ml When the filled field is selected perz from the Field List and displayed mwi in the Add Edit Field dialogue the data used to fill the field is Curent 001 410198 1045 displayed as the Current Value Cancel 496 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings To add an Update Field event View Change Event List r Local Text Block Events Type Fill Field PostCode Fill Field MemberNo 1 Select the Events Fill Field AccntNo Account No button from the Text Data Change Font Font Change Block Settings Data Change Font Font Change dialogue to display the Data Change Text Hide Text Block View Change Event List dialogue Add EERE Edit Delete Choose Update Field from the drop down menu then click on the Add button to display the Update Field Event
412. t Delete from the menu Or Select the required event from the list and click on the Delete button 2 Adialogue requesting confirmation of the deletion will be displayed Click on OK to delete the event Copying a Local Text Block event Events that have been added to a text block can be copied onto the Clipboard then copied within the text block to other text blocks in the environment to another environment or another page definition gt To copy a Local text block event 1 Either Select the required event from the list then right mouse click on the event to display the Edit Delete and Clip drop down menu Select Clip from the menu Or Select the required event from the list and click on the Clip button Events copied onto the Clipboard will remain on the Clipboard unless deleted until copied back to the Objects list or the current session of Paris is ended The use of the Clipboard for copying events is described in this manual in Chapter 23 The Internal Clipboard Function and in detail in the section Copying an event to and from the Clipboard in Chapter 7 of the Paris Designer User s Manual 510 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 21 USING THE FONT LIST FUNCTION You can create a Font List for the current environment or form by using the Font dialogue which can be displayed from the Text Settings or Text Block Settings dialogues by selecting the Add button in the Attributes section of the
413. t Settings IV Equal To res test is ans on 1st Page A NotEqual To Previous test is True on 1st Page Spacing Settings r Spacing Options Output Settings CEP Spacing Print Order Reset Spacing On Page Boundary Current Page Def t Align Overprint Line baselines Fields DIDE Options Indexing Emulate ITEXT OTEXT WAIT Operator Messages Preserve CME Events for BEGIN CEP Options DJDE Channel Skips generate blank lines R T Event Offset Adjustment o View Page Attributes Ctl K Select Text Block CtleN Cancel The options displayed in the dialogue have been included to maintain a high level of Xerox compatibility The following options are available The Paris Designer Reference Manual 588 Appendix C Changing Xerox CEP Options GENERAL OPTIONS Fixed Length Input Records This option allows Paris to process input records that are in a fixed record length format rather than the carriage return line feed format that is usually used in PC based files To use this option type the record length applicable into the record length field f NOTE You should always enter the record length before loading the data Translate Control Bytes This option permits you to exclude PCC bytes from any translation being done at input processing time For example you may wish PCC bytes in an EBCDIC input file to be left untranslated as some of the characters may not have a direct EBCDIC ASCII equivalent Emulate Online
414. t button in the Default or View Change Text Settings dialogues and the Default or View Change Text Block Settings dialogues f NOTE If you wanted to copy the entire list you may prefer to save the Font List as an FLT file Refer to Saving the Font List in Chapter 20 of this manual Display the View Change Font List dialogue as described above then choose the Regular Clip button to i Bold display the Italic Clipboard Bold Italic Regular Bold Regular Internal Clipboard 1 x Objects Clipboard Line Printer 3 Regular 0 1399 in Arial 10 Regular 6 5 Ipi Arial 10 Bold 6 0 Ipi Copy gt gt Courier New 10 Regular 7 0 Ipi All None All None Delete ew 538 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function Internal Clipboard f x Objects Clipboard Line Printer 9 Regular 0 1399 in Copy gt gt Arial 10 Regular 6 5 Ipi Arial 10 Bold Italic 5 0 Ipi Arial 3 Regular 6 0 Ipi Arial 3 Bold 6 5 Ipi Arial 8 Regular 38 0 dts x ZOpy All None AJ Mone Delete 2 In the Objects section of the dialogue select the font s you wish to copy to the Clipboard 3 Click on the Copy button The Copy gt gt Button will be activated The selected font s will be Y Tip displayed in the Clipboard a Click on the All button to select all the fon
415. t equal to the line spacing used in the text blocks in the environment For example when you need to design a form or pagedef to fit data with a given number of lines per inch the text blocks may be 6 lines per inch it is easier to align form elements if the vertical grid spacing is set to the same line spacing Horizontal and Horizontal and Vertical drop down menus provide options for Vertical setting the grid measurement as follows Inches Grid divisions in multiples of 1 inch apart Centimeters Grid divisions in multiples of 1 cm apart Dots 1 300 inch The default resolution of a laser printer is 300 dots per inch Points 1 72 inch 0 353mm Units per inch Number of lines characters per inch Units per centimeter Number of lines characters per centimeter The spacing for the grid measurement is entered in the boxes adjacent to the Horizontal and Vertical measure The Paris Designer Reference Manual 373 Chapter 11 Functions in the Form Editor Systems Menu Visible If the Visible box is checked the grid displays as a dotted array The grid can be made visible whether active or not as a visual aid to the positioning of elements If the Active box is checked an element being placed will automatically align to the nearest grid line ensuring consistent alignment and positioning of elements The Half option is only effective if the Active box is checked Selecting the Half checkbox turns on grid point
416. t page If the test is satisfied in the first line of a new page the environment change will occur immediately It is therefore preferable to ensure that when using Environment Change events the test is satisfied in the first line of a page As they are external to environments it is possible to create Environment Change events from any environment 285 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu PACKING THE ENVIRONMENT CHANGE EVENT LIST As they are stored externally to all environments it is important to remember to include the Environment Change event list whenever packing files for transfer to another system Refer to Packing Resources on page 292 Resource Manager xj Log Activity tz 286 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ADDING AN ENVIRONMENT CHANGE EVENT EE Events menu gt Change Environment gt Add In the View Change Event List Environment Change Events dialogue Change Environment is displayed in the field adjacent to the Add button Click on the Add button to display the Change Environment Event dialogue Change Environment Event m Description r Environment Change T o m Tests J 2nd Test Cancel Description Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list Change To Select this button to display the Select Enter File To Load ENV dialogue and load t
417. t text extracted from the printstream data via the Fill Field option within a local text block Data Change event The Paris Designer Reference Manual 306 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Why are fields used for currency conversions filled via the Fill Field option in a Data Change Event The Fill Field option has been added to a Data Change event for a most important reason As a Data Change event is a local text block event when the value of the field is filled it will be at the time of output immediately before the line is output This of course ensures that the text extracted from the printstream data is as intended and errors do not occur Therefore any field used for currency conversions that is to be filled with text extracted from the printstream data MUST be filled via the Fill Field option in a Local Text Block Data Change event WARNING If an Update Field event is used to fill a field that is being used for currency conversion and the line range is greater than one errors will occur This is because an Update Field event is an input event which occurs as the line is coming in and the contents of the field at output time will be the contents of the last line in the range thus losing any previous values in a line range greater than one The Paris Designer Reference Manual 307 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu ACCESS LEVELS IN THE EURO RATES UTILITY There are three access levels in th
418. t to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do use two tests The Paris Designer Reference Manual 253 THE PAGE PARA CHANGE OUTPUT EVENT LisT EVENT FUNCTION 254 A Change Output Event List event is used to change the output event list for the current page under certain conditions Output events only exist in Paris Designer for backward compatibility reasons with very early versions of Lapr s and Xerox centralized converted jobs In earlier versions of Lapr s and on some Xerox printers it was possible to save lists of text block events external to the environment It is no longer possible to create these lists in Paris Designer however if they exist they can be called by using this event In the Xerox centralized environment some applications may use external CME s Copy Modified Entries When these external CME s are brought into Paris via the Conversion Manager an Output Event List is created These output event lists can be selected by the Change Output Event List event but this would be highly unlikely as the original structure of the Xerox datastream would normally contain DJDE calls for the CME s that would override the events Briefly this event exists for backward compatibility reasons and it is recommended that it is not used in new applications The Paris Designer Reference Manual ADDING A Chapter 7 Fun
419. table is supplied with the Paris Designer and is available via the View Change PCC and Channel Assignments dialogue The Designer also includes two other commonly used PCC byte tables These are derived from functions performed on early IBM printers They are the 1401 and 1403 tables It is possible to create or modify any existing PCC byte tables and save them using the Save function These can then be re used in subsequent environments by way of the Load function 148 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu How DO l KNOW IF THE PRINTSTREAM CONTAINS PCC BYTES You need to examine the data file you wish to print You can do this by using the Edit Data option in the File menu in the Environment Editor where you can view the file in hexadecimal format refer to Chapter 1 Data in general is one of two formats Carriage Return Line Feed or PCC based For more details on Carriage Return Line Feed files refer to The Input Filter Function on page 09 It is normally easy to identify a PCC based file Each printline will have a single character at the beginning of each line For example the first line would normally have the character 1 in the first position indicating Skip to the top of the page Each subsequent line would have a PCC byte in the first position for example a Or a space The spacing action for PCC Printer Carriage Control bytes is som
420. tain 3 copies of page 1 followed by 3 copies of page 2 and so on Collate on Report Boundaries This is the same as the Xerox CEP Collated option A copy count of 3 will cause all the pages of the first report to be printed followed by a 2 copy of all the pages followed by a 3 copy Then the second report will be printed Collate on File Boundaries This type of collation prints the entire input file regardless of whether it contains logical reports then repeats x number of copies f NOTE The collate option also affects how copies are applied If the collate option is Report then the Paris Engine will handle copy requests The input data is processed x number of times and the data output will be x times larger If an input file contains only one logical report then there is no difference in the output between report and file collation However there may be a difference as to where the copy request is handled The Paris Designer Reference Manual 169 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu WHAT IS THE EFFECT OF THE COPY SENSITIVE PROCESSING REQUIRED OPTION 170 Selecting the Copy Sensitive Processing Required option for a print job has two effects on the print job a b The rule for using the Copy Sensitive Processing feature is very simple If the input data contains copy sensitive commands then turn this on Otherwise leave it OFF It tells Paris that the Engine r
421. te m Value to Test for Cancel Selecting the Add Byte button displays the Enter Test Byte dialogue for the relevant byte mode Decimal values can be three characters for example 010 Hex can be two characters for example 0A and Literals can be one character for example A Once entered the OK button is selected and the entered byte is displayed in the View Change Test dialogue Delete Selecting a string or byte that has been added then selecting the Delete button will delete the selected item from the list The Paris Designer Reference Manual 241 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu SETTING UP TWO TESTS Set the first test as outlined in the previous section x m Description Second MS Form Form Change To Msr TwO Tests 1st Test AND 2nd Test Cancel 1 Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the 2 Test button 2 Click on the 2 Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue 3 Setup the test as required 6 WARNING If using the AND condition both conditions must be satisfied in the same line 242 The Paris Designer Reference Manual PAGE PARA EVENTS Page Para events are conditional events that are used to change page level properties such as form paper trays and page definition Page Para events are applied to the entire page as opposed to local text block events which will only apply to the particular text bloc
422. ted The output destination is entered in the Output To box f NOTE If the printer or device driver selected is a Windows GDI device the Output To option is not available Refer to the previous section Printer Type on page 58 Output To PRINT Q1 Output can be directed to physical LPT ports for example LPT1 LPT2 These may be directly connected to the printer or possibly re mapped to go to Novell print queues or a TCP IP address The queue name for output directed to a Novell queue is entered into the box or if to a disk file the destination drive directory and file name is entered into the box for example D OUTPUT OUT DTA The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Using NEXTFILE as the output destination NEXTFILE is a special Paris keyword specified when the system is required to direct its output to a series of files on disk NEXTFILE allows a file name or extension to be incremented to avoid overwriting previous files NEXTFILE settings are printer bound not global Dutput T o NEXTFILE Priority 5 4f NOTE File splitting is specified at job level and is described under Splitting Files in a print job in Chapter 2 Job Definitions of the Paris Spooler Technical Manual gt To define the NEXTFILE settings 1 Enter the keyword NEXTFILE in the printer Output To box The Settings button to the immediate right will become available
423. ted field to the required position in the list Release the mouse button Either double click on the field or select a field from the list then click on the activated Edit button to display the selected field s dialogue Delete Select a field from the list then click on the activated Delete button A dialogue will display requesting confirmation of the deletion Select the Clip button to display the Internal Clipboard The Clipboard allows you to copy events to and from other environments The use of the Internal Clipboard is described in Common Functions in the Paris Designer in Part Four of this manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 189 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining a Field s Attributes The following attributes can be specified and edited for a field Add Edit Field X m Attributes Name BO Type AlphaNumeic Index Reset AtPageStat v Calculate FO EB Field Name Each field must have a unique name The name cannot exceed 10 characters and can be any combination of characters including the space character Field Type Each field must be assigned one of four possible types The Field Type determines how the value of a field is stored internally and what checks are performed when the Field Value is set The possible Field Types are AlphaNumeric Numeric Whole Numeric Float and Currency The AlphaNumeric type is the most common a
424. tem These functions allow the user to specify exactly how currency values are to be translated from the user s view to the system s view For example If the input data is a debit value of 1 234 56 the two functions applied would translate as follows to produce the output data Input Data STR2CUR Paris Internal Data CUR2STR Output Data 1 234 58DB 1234 56 1 234 56 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer The STR2CUR function The STR2CUR function is used to convert a string containing a formatted currency into a plain currency value The syntax of the function is STR2CUR string decimal character negative character string a string containing a formatted currency value e g 1 234 56 decimal char the character that acts as the decimal char negative char the character that acts as the currency s negative char e g This returns A string containing the currency value with any formatting removed e g 1234 56 Sample STR2CUR 1 234 56 would return 1234 56 Uses e The decimal char is used to determine the point in the string where the whole units end and the fraction units begin There can be any number of units before or after this character e The negative char is used to determine if the value is negative If the character passed as the negative character occurs one or more times anywhere in the string the value
425. ter Description files work on page 60 of this manual ADDING XLPINPUTMEDIA STATEMENTS The first step to setting up Media Mapping for your Xerox Docuprint is the addition of XLPInputMedia statements to any XPD PPD that will be used to drive the Docuprint XPD PPD files are supplied as part of the Paris install e XLPInputMedia statements replace the Adobe InputSlot statements and have an identical syntax e Ifan XPD PPD file contains both InputSlot and XLPInputMedia statements the InputSlot statements are ignored e XLPInputMedia statements tell the Paris system which printer uses Media Mapping and how many media options the printer supports e One XLPInputMedia statement is required for each option that is to be made available in the Environment Editor For example the XPD PPD file for a Docuprint with 2 input trays would contain 2 XLPInputMedia statements A 4 tray printer XLP PPD would have 4 entries Each entry makes another option available in the Paris Environment Editor For example the statement XLPInputMedia Upper means that Upper will appear in the editor as a valid option for tray selection 563 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function USING MEDIA MAPPING IN AN ENVIRONMENT Media and tray options are used identically to any other printer tray support options For example on an HP5 printer the user selects Upper in
426. tes are available 522 How is acolor applied to an element 525 How is a Color mixed 525 How is the Color Palette saved 525 USING THE COLOR PALETTES 526 Adding a color to an element using the default color palette 526 Adding the color to an element using a Paris system Palette 527 Mixing a Custom color 530 Creating a Custom Palette 533 Saving the color palette 534 Loading a Color Palette PAL file 535 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 17 Contents CHAPTER 23 THE INTERNAL CLIPBOARD FUNCTION 536 USING THE CLIPBOARD 537 Copying fonts onto the Clipboard 538 Copying fonts from the Clipboard 540 Copying Local Text Block Events onto the Clipboard 543 Copying Local Text Block Events from the Clipboard 545 Copying Fields to and from the Clipboard 547 Copying a page definition to and from the Clipboard 553 APPENDIX A USING THE MEDIA MAPPING FUNCTION 562 SETTING UP MEDIA MAPPING 563 Adding XLPInputMedia statements 563 Using Media Mapping in an Environment 564 Matching the mappings to the printer 571 Paris StockSet Support 572 APPENDIX B CREATING AND PREPARING NOVELL PRINT QUEUES FOR INPUT INTO PARIS 578 How do I create a new Novell queue for input 579 How do I prepare a Novell queue for input 581 APPENDIX C USING XEROX CEP OPTIONS 588 General Options 589 Spacing Options 591 DJDE Options 592 18 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Contents APPENDIX D DEVICE SPECIFIC FEATURES IN THE PARIS SYSTEM 594 USING DEV
427. that the value of field F1 is added to the returned value from the function NUM E2 The result of this addition is a temporary value that becomes the first operand for the operator The operator subtracts the constant value 5 from the temporary value yielding the final calculation value Operators can be divided into two categories arithmetic operators and comparison operators The Paris Designer Reference Manual 203 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Arithmetic Operators Arithmetic Operators create a new value by combining the two operands The meaning and effect of an arithmetic operator can be different for Numeric whole or floating and AlphaNumeric fields Some operators have no effect on alphanumeric operands e An arithmetic operator returns a value of the same type as the type of the left operand e If necessary right operands are converted to the same type as the left operand before applying the operator For example In Text 5 6 the type of the left operand is alphanumeric so the operator converts the right operand the numeric float constant 5 6 to the string 5 6 before adding The final result is the string Text5 6 The following Arithmetic Operators are available Addition For numeric operands this operator returns a value which is the sum of the operands For Alphanumeric operands the return value is
428. the other side of the paper If you are on a back page it finishes printing then feeds a new page and prints the new page on the back side Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue to set up the test conditions for the event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 None And Or Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the 2 Test button 2 4 Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the oM Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do I use two tests The Paris Designer Reference Manual 259 THE PAGE PARA END TEXT BLOCK EVENT FUNCTION An End Text Block event is a very powerful and useful event It provides an additional level of control over basically unformatted data and is used to force the current text block to end and places the following printstream data into the next text block in the page definition To illustrate this we will use the example of a direct mail application that contains a name and address plus a salutation Example 1 The direct mail application requires that you create two text blocks the first to contain the name and address and the second to contain the salutation Often in these type of applications the name and address can vary in length it could be 3 or 6 lines This means you cannot use the max
429. the Border menu Rotate The rotation of the data labels in degrees Choose None Rotate 90 or Rotate 270 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 457 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Adding the Headings to a Pie Chart Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend General Header MV Show Text Population of Australian State Capital Cities Font Arial v 10 Bold al Border None Footer Show Tex Font Arial M 12 Regular Border None Click on the Show checkbox to show the header for the chart Enter the required header text in the Text box Choose the required Font Size and Style for the header from each drop down menu The Header border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Click on the Show checkbox to show the footer for the chart Enter the footer Text Font and Border as above 458 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the Legend for a Pie Chart Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend General Display V Show Legend Font Arial ik E Border None Position Anchor Right h v Align Vertically Apply Show Legend Click on the Show Legend checkbox to show the legend Choose the required Font Size and Style for the legend from each drop down menu Border The Legend border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Choose Top Bottom Right Left Top Right Top Left
430. the Circle tool then clicking on the Settings button will display the Default Circle Settings dialogue When adding a Dynamic Circle to an environment the Default Circle Settings dialogue displays a Properties option for setting Fixed Float or Resize properties Default Circle Settings Xj Attributes Border Solid W eight Light 2 Fill None v Sample m Properties Horizontal Fixed Vertical Fixed The Paris Designer Reference Manual 398 Chapter 16 Editing Dynamic and Static Circle Settings Default Circle Settings x Sample Attributes Border Solid Weight Light Fill S N one Yv Cancel The Default Circle Settings dialogue when adding a Static Circle to a form no Properties option mm mm VIEW CHANGE CIRCLE DIALOGUE Selecting the View tool then clicking on an added Circle element will display the View Change Circle dialogue When changing a Dynamic Circle element in an environment the View Change Circle dialogue displays the current Properties setting for the element The Paris Designer Reference Manual 399 Chapter 16 Editing Dynamic and Static Circle Settings SETTING CIRCLE ATTRIBUTES Default Circle Settings 1 Sample r Attributes Border Solid Weight i Light zs Border The outline of a circle can be defined as Solid Broken Dotted None no line to be drawn around the circle T
431. the Environment Menu USING OUTPUT SETTINGS M c Environment menu gt Output Settings gt View Change Output Settings dialogue View Change Output Settings x r Page Printing Font Indexing Simplex v Active Offset o Start at One Max 16 x Replace invalid index with first font Page Shift Front Back Along long edge m Color Indexing Along short edge 7 Start at One m Printline Size Event Handling Offset o Length 133 Suppress Generated Blank Lines Dffset o m Device Specific Features 1 Add Remove Copies Number of Copies 1 Collate On Page Boundaries Copy Sensitive Processing Required Cancel Choose Output Settings from the Environment menu to display the View Change Output Settings dialogue and define Page Printing Printline Size Font Indexing Color Indexing Event Handling Device Specific Features and Copies 174 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Defining Page Printing Settings r Page Printing Simplex v Page Shift Front Back Along long edge Along short edge Page Printing settings are used to set up the conditions for Simplex printing or Duplex printing depending on the capabilities of your printer The drop down menu provides the following list of options Prints one side of the page only Duplex Prints front and b
432. the View Change Chart Settings dialogue displays the current Properties setting for the element 418 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings CHART TYPES Paris Designer provides a number of chart types These are Simple Plot Chart Complex Plot Chart Simple Bar Chart Complex Bar Chart Pie Chart Default Chart Settings x Attributes Data Axis General Style Simple B ar Chart Mw Left Simple Plot Chart Complex Plot Chart Simple Bar Chart Top Complex Bar Chart Pie Chart Horizontal Property Fixed Vertical Property Fixed M Use Default Chart Attributes The settings available for a chart depend on the style of chart selected In the following sections each type of setting for each style of chart will be described Z NOTE Adding each type of chart is explained under Using the Chart Tool in Chapter 11 of the Paris Designer User s Manual Using Fields to Create a Chart is explained in Chapter 8 of the same manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 419 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings SIMPLE PLOT CHART Default Chart Settings Attributes Data Axis General Simple Plot Chart Left 00 wiam oo T opo Height o Horizontal Property Fa gt Vertical Property Fa gt Defining the Attributes of a Simple Plot Chart Simple Plot Chart f NOTE The unit of measurement for the p
433. the function of Input Settings 143 Using the Input Settings Skip at start of Report function 144 The Input Settings Input Processor Plug In function 145 Using Input Settings 146 6 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Contents THE SPACING SETTINGS FUNCTION 147 What is the function of Spacing Settings 147 What are PCC bytes 148 How do know if the printstream contains PCC bytes 149 How do I avoid printing the PCC byte 149 Which spacing method takes priority 150 Using the Spacing Settings function 151 Adding a PCC character 162 THE OUTPUT SETTINGS FUNCTION 163 How does Font Indexing work 165 How does Color Indexing work 168 How do I use the Copies options 169 What is the effect of the Copy Sensitive Processing Required option 170 How do the Collate Copy Sensitive options affect processing 171 What are the differences between the Engine or the Output Device handling Copy Processing 173 Using Output Settings 174 THE PRINT ORDER FUNCTION 182 THE CURRENT PAGE DEFINITION FUNCTION 183 Using the View Change Page Definition function 184 THE FIELDS FUNCTION 187 Field Value 187 Fields and Events 187 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 7 Contents The order of Field actions Defining Fields Adding and editing a Field Field Calculations THE INDEXING FUNCTION THE OPERATOR MESSAGES FUNCTION Using the Reply feature Using the Operator Messages function THE CEP FUNCTION THE VIEW PAGE ATTRIBUTES FUNCTIO
434. the menu to display the Select Euro Access Level dialogue Choose Edit Any Rate from the drop down menu then choose OK The Password text field will become available for entry of the password Supervisor Enter the password then choose OK The View Change Euro Conversion Rates dialogue will be displayed with all the buttons in dialogue available Any previously added variable currency rates will also be displayed With Supervisor access a fixed rate can be added edited or deleted if required Variable rates can be added edited or deleted as necessary gt To edit a selected rate To display the View Change Euro Conversion Rate dialogue Either Double click on the rate to be changed Or Right mouse click on the rate to be changed and choose Edit from the pop up menu Or Select the rate to be changed then click on the Edit button Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Select Euro Access Level x Edit Ary EN Password 5 Change Cancel UN a 7 NN Y BEF m n 3399 FIM Finland 5 94573 FRF France 6 55957 v Add Edit Delete Variable Rates 133 6764 AUD Australian Dollar 1 7341 t GBP Pound Sterling 0 6840 Add Edit Delete ai cin nee Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 315 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu 2 Type in the required rate then View Change Euro Conversion
435. the required PCC byte value from the list The current action for the PCC value will be displayed in the PCC Attributes table 2 Define the action to Print Skip and Space as follows The Paris Designer Reference Manual 153 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu PCC Attributes Before printing Skip to channel 7 C Space lines v Print the current line After printing Skip to channel Space lines m The default setting is for the Print the current line checkbox to be selected Only in rare cases is this not selected e Selecting the Print checkbox determines if any print lines containing this particular PCC byte value are to be printed Print the e De selecting the print checkbox will cause lines containing this rea PCC byte value to be ignored not printed ine Before or After printing Skip to When Skip is selected the value to the right specifies the channel to channel which to skip e Achannel is a shorthand method of specifying actual line numbers which are relative to text blocks That is each text block in a page definition will contain a Line 1 Motion is always downwards within a text block It is not possible to Skip back up the text block A channel can contain one or more line numbers and can be modified in the Channel Assignments table The Skip instruction defines the Channel number only The line number is defined in the
436. time events we shall begin by describing the use of tests ABOUT EVENTS AND TESTS An event is a conditional process and one or two tests can be used to specify the particular conditions to be tested for in the printstream data If the test conditions are met events make the changes indicated These test conditions are set in the View Change Test dialogue View Change Test r Test Info First Line D 2j Num lines l Offset 0 Ler 0 Mask 255 Test Input Equal To vae v Field es Add string Add byte Delete Display Decimal x Particular care needs to be taken when setting tests for example with page para events the test is applied to the whole printstream and causes the appropriate change to be applied to ALL text blocks on the page NOTE Runtime events do not use tests but rely on a command sequence embedded in the With Page Para events any line references are TEXT BLOCK related not page related The Test drop down menu lists a choice of test conditions printstream data Refer to the section Runtime Events on page 271 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu How TESTS WORK Tests allow you to trigger events based on the contents of the printstream data if the test conditions are met Tests can be used to change attributes over a specified number of lines and characters The printstr
437. ting Help Oe SSS BB AQOAl lt gt E Gi 4x iscliv S Current Printer Document Color Abs 46 0 0 0 Rel 46 0 0 0 4 4 N B O li x 354 The Paris Designer Reference Manual CHAPTER 10 File FUNCTIONS IN THE FORM EDITOR FILE MENU The File Menu lists the functions relevant to loading and saving form files form attributes and information merging and overlaying forms printing and printers Table 10 1 shows the File menu options the dialogue displayed when the option is chosen if applicable and the function of the option Each function and the use of any associated dialogue are described in detail on the following pages Paris Form Editor New Form inl x File System View Tools Text Editing Help New Form Alt N Open Form Alt o Save Form Alt4 5 Save Form s Alt A Form Attributes Form Info Merge Form Overlay Form Print Alt P Select Printer Modify Printers Reset Resources gm 9 amp amp m Bj e Exit Alt x 4 AN GO ao th po uc 3S89 d4x e scl Current Printer Document Color Abs 1 5 0 0 Rel 1 5 0 0 7 The Paris Designer Reference Manual 355 Chapter 10 Functions in the Form Editor File Menu NewForm AN Form Alt N Load anew blank form Load a new blank form new blank form Tem AN Form Alt O EREE File To Load Load an existi
438. tings At Position Within Range When To Change Jat Position Within Range m First Line 2 Number of Lines 3 First Char 4 Number of Chars 20 1st Test NONE z 2nd Test The event takes place at a given character position within a range of lines For example the 4 character in each line from the second to the tenth line First Line 2 Number of Lines 9 First Char 4 If the event is used to insert a tab at a given position the change will take place at that position in each line in the range If the event is used to change the font color at a given position the change will take place from the given position to the end of the line then each entire subsequent line to the end of the text block or another event No tests are used with this option This option requires e First Line and Number of Lines and First Character to be specified and can be used to e Insert text tab at a given position or e Insert text tab from this point on e Change font color from this point on 480 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Adding a Data Change Event iew Change Event List r Local Text Block Events Type I 1 Data Change Data Chang To add a Change Form event 1 Select the Events button from the Text Block Settings dialogue to display the View Change Event List dialogue Data Change Edit Delete Clip D
439. tion Editing the mapping for a tray in an environment The mapping for a tray is edited by displaying the required environment in the View Change Environment Mapping dialogue The tray mapping to be edited is selected then the Edit button View Change Environment Mapping xj Settings Environment MYN EW Browse J END Add E dit Delete Cancel The View Change Media Mapping dialogue will be displayed for editing View Change Media Mapping Settings Media Lower Color white Edited media mapping Weight 75 ow ype Label Size Cancel 568 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function Deleting the mapping for a tray in an environment The mapping for a tray is deleted by displaying the required environment in the View Change Environment Mapping dialogue then selecting the tray mapping to be deleted A warning box will request confirmation or cancellation of the deletion x 2 Delete This Entry i Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual 569 Appendix A Using the Media Mapping Function Editing the mappings for an environment The View Change Media Mappings dialogue will display the table of mappings for the environments in your Paris system To edit the mappings for an environment select the environment then the Edit button to display the View Change Media Mappings dialogue
440. tion and Font Name Mapping files To support resident fonts Paris contains several files including the Substitution file and the Font Name Mapping file The Substitution file details what alternative font to use as a screen font and the width table if a requested font is not available The Font Name Mapping file is used to find a Windows style name for a given PostScript font name There are two separate files used for both of these areas e The base file is created and maintained by XLPrint Software The user should not modify this file The base file may be updated or modified by reinstalling the Paris software e The second file is the user version of the file it is freely modifiable by the user and will not be overwritten when the system is reinstalled or updated This system of base and user files allows us to easily update our basic information without causing backward compatibility problems for existing users 74 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Substitution file information The Substitution file FontSub xfs is a standard file in XPD format that is created and maintained by XLPrint Software The first line of this file is an Include UserSub xfs This file UserSub xfs is initially empty but can be modified by the user to add new substitutions or to replace standard substitutions Each XPDFontSubstitution family style subFamily subStyle entr
441. to compare the data to the table of values created in the View Change Test dialogue or to a field value which is selected from the Field List dialogue The comparison is not numeric but is an ASCII comparison Once the test conditions are set in the Test Info section of the View Change Test dialogue the test option is selected Refer to the section Setting the test conditions on page 239 iew Change Test x r Test Info The test conditions are First Line 1 set in the Test Info gt onec L 4 section of the dialogue Offset 0 Ler The test option is Mask 255 selected from the drop down menu Test Input Equal To Value 4 If the test option is a comparison againsta Field The test value s field value the Field created for the button is activated for event are the selection of a Field displayed in the from the Field List 4 M dialogue dialogue The Add String or The selected field is Add Byte buttons displayed in the Add string Add byte DEE are used to add adjacent box p the test values Display Decimal Cancel On the following pages each test option and its use is described 232 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Input Equal To Value In this comparison test if the value found at the test position in the data matches the test value entered in the View Change Test dialogue the test is TRUE and the s
442. ton to display the Select Enter File To Load FRM dialogue for loading of the required form The selected form filename will be displayed in the Change To field in the Change Back Form Event dialogue 1 Test Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue to set up the test conditions for the Change Back Form event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 None And Or Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the pia i i Test button 2d Test A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button to display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do use two tests 250 The Paris Designer Reference Manual THE PAGE PARA CHANGE PAGE DEFINITION EVENT FUNCTION A Change Page Definition event is used to change the page definition for the current page under certain conditions WHEN WOULD USE A CHANGE PAGE DEFINITION EVENT The Change Page Definition event is a very useful and powerful feature in Paris The page definition contains most of the important settings for the page and the Change Page Definition event gives you the ability to dynamically change the settings For example A simple example of where this is useful is a multi page statement Using a Change Page Definition event you could set up a test for the string Page 1 and whenever the test is true it ca
443. tributes m Attributes Type AlphaNumeri Nams MT Reset Jat Page Star pe Cu xl Calculate Atri Roce mr tributes Name Gross Values Calculate Default Type Curency T Index Current punt Reset Jat Page Start Default num Calculate a Current fru r Values Default fru Current fru Cancel The next step is to fill the field In contrast to filling a field with static or extracted text these fields are filled via a local text block Data Change event To fill a field using a Data Change local text block event Select Text Block x First select the Text Blocks text block from Description Max Lines Number of Events which the data is O1 Addresses 66 1 to be extracted 02 General 66 13 D3 Items BB D 04 Comments 66 D 05 T otals 4 330 Cancel The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer 2 View Change Text Block Settings X m Attributes r Position Font Times New Roman 12 Bold 100 0 dts Add Relative Frame Spacing 100 0 Dots Reset Edit font list Left 26 5 Rotate None 885 0 Color ea wan 35595 r Sample EE Height 7 9800 Horizontal Justify R ight v Vertical Justify Top E r Options Description Totals Lines per page 60 Data Overflow Active Events View Change 3 Overflow Page Select
444. truncate option the first 32 000 bytes of the file will be loaded Your original file is not overwritten unless you choose to do so by using the Save option in the Edit Data file dialogue The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu 46 USING THE KEYBOARD IN THE EDIT DATA FILE FUNCTION The table below shows the keys that can be used when editing in the Edit Data File dialogue Entered text can be blocked and copied cut and pasted and deleted Left arrow Right arrow Up arrow Down arrow Page Up Page Dn Home End Ctrl X Ctrl C Ctrl V Ctrl Z Backspace key selected text Deletes previous character The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu CREATING A MODEL PRINTSTREAM DATA FILE To create a model printstream in the Edit Data File dialogue From the Environment Editor window open the File menu Select the Data option to display the sub menu and select Edit Data The Edit Data File dialogue will be displayed Use the keyboard to type in the text for the model printstream Refer to the previous page for a description of the available editing keys Z NOTE Make sure you have not previously loaded a sample data file into the Environment Editor as it will be displayed in the Edit Data File dialogue Edit View Data File p 2 Open the Edit Data File dialogue Text View Hex View 9 Edit View Data Fi
445. ts section of the dlalpgue b Click on the None button to de select selected fonts or Click on a selected font to de select it Internal Clipboard x Objects Clipboard Line Printer 9 Regular 0 1399 in Arial 10 Regular 6 5 Ipi Arial 10 Regular 6 5 Ipi Aral 10 Italic 48 0 dts i Arial 9 Bold 6 5 Ipi Courier New 10 Regular 7 0 Ipi Arial 10 Bold Italic 5 0 Ipi Arial 3 Regular 6 0 Ipi Arial 3 Bold 6 5 Ipi Arial 8 Regular 38 0 dts Courier New 10 Regular 7 0 Ipi All None All None Delete 4 Choose Exit to return to the View Change Font List dialogue then return to the Environment Editor The Paris Designer Reference Manual 539 Chapter 24 The Internal Clipboard function COPYING FONTS FROM THE CLIPBOARD 1 2 Click on the Clip button to open the Internal Clipboard 540 The example below shows the current Font List for the form or environment in the Objects section of the dialogue The fonts to be copied are in the Clipboard section Open the required environment or The fonts on the Clipboard can be copied to another environment or the form associated with the current environment They will remain on the Clipboard until you exit the Paris Designer gt To copy the fonts from the Clipboard you can either Create a new environment and load a data file or Switch editors if the fonts are to be added to the Font List for the current form iew
446. ttings 435 adding headings 431 adding labels 430 adding legend 432 constants in a calculation string 210 control byte Translation Table 138 Control byte 9700 options 139 translate option 139 converting a national currency to the Euro 337 any national currencies 342 the Euro to a national currency 342 copy processing effect of collate copy sensitive options 173 engine or output device handling 175 using the engine to handle the copy request 175 using the printer to handle the copy request 175 copy sensitive processing in output settings 172 copying fields onto and from the Clipboard 550 63 fonts from the Clipboard 543 fonts onto the Clipboard 541 page definition onto the Clipboard 556 560 page definition to another environment using the Clipboard 560 page definition within an environment using the Clipboard 556 text block event 513 text block events from the Clipboard 548 text block events onto the Clipboard 546 corners using square or round corners in boxes 408 creating See also adding a model of the printstream data 46 48 Font List 514 515 form 359 Novell print queues 581 Novell print queues for input 582 Current Page Definition 185 88 Custom Color Palette 524 Custom Palette mixing a color 533 D data See printstream data adding to a Complex Bar chart 443 adding to a Complex Plot chart 428 adding to a Pie chart 457 adding to a Simple Bar chart 437 adding to a Simple Plot chart
447. u USING THE INPUT SETTINGS SKIP AT START OF REPORT FUNCTION It is possible in Paris to skip a series of bytes or print lines at the start of every print job This is most commonly required when the job contains unprintable characters or junk It is preferable to ensure that they are not included in the original print files at all but in some cases this is not possible These headers are normally made of a sequence of printer commands and are not required to print In fact they could cause problems with Paris because they could possibly contradict printer commands from Paris with unpredictable results It is always best to remove these to avoid problems Removing the junk printer commands Unprintable characters or junk headers can be removed by employing the Skip at start of Report function in the View Change Input Settings dialogue e This function is only performed at the start of each logical job e The amount of data to skip can be specified in bytes or lines When specified in bytes it will include all possible byte values including special characters such as line feeds and carriage returns e This stripping process is performed before any other process in Paris including the Input Filter process The strip can also be specified in lines a line being determined by either the Line End function of the Input Filter or Fixed Length Record processing The strip will include the line terminator It i
448. ubble Jet BJC 7000 LPT1 Marketing L3 Xerox NPS4850 LPT1 Sales Deptl Generic PCL5 43 Duplex LPT1 368 The Paris Designer Reference Manual MODIFYING A PRINT DESTINATION i c File menu gt Modify Printers C View Change Printers dialogue To add modify or remove a print destination the Modify Printers option is selected from the File menu to display the View Change Printers dialogue In the View Change Printers dialogue selecting the Add button will display the View Change Printer dialogue which is used to add a print destination and define a printer s attributes resource management capabilities and print image positioning Modifying a print destination is the same in the Environment Editor as it is for the Form Editor and is explained in Chapter 1 of this manual To avoid unnecessary repetition this information is not repeated here Refer to the section Adding Modifying and Removing a Print Destination in Part One Chapter One of this manual for detailed explanations regarding printers and their usage in Paris and the use of the associated dialogues The Paris Designer Reference Manual 369 RESETTING RESOURCES tj gt File menu gt Reset Resources gt Alt R During the setup of your printers you will have instructed Paris when to reset each printer depending on the storage capabilities of the printer being defined and whether or not the printer is being shared with other applications Refe
449. ue will be displayed 2 Edit the condition or action as required then choose OK to return to the View Change Runtime Event Modifier dialogue 284 The Paris Designer Reference Manual ENVIRONMENT CHANGE EVENTS Changing environments can be accomplished in three main ways 1 Environments can be associated with an input queue in the Paris Spooler 2 Runtime events within each data file can instruct Paris to change the environment refer to Runtime Events on page 271 3 Environment Change events Change Environment Event x r Description r Environment Change To Tests 1st Test JNONE 2nd Test E i Cancel Environment Change events are stored externally to the environments in a file called ENVCHG SYS It is one of the few functions in Paris that is not local to an environment For this reason ALL print files will be tested for the condition regardless of the current environment You must therefore ensure that the test is exclusive enough to avoid unwanted changes of environment Unlike other events an Environment Change event acts as a toggle and will change to the new environment until a new Environment Change event or other job change method is encountered The environment will change immediately upon satisfaction of the test by any line When satisfied the current line the one satisfying the test will become the first line of the new environment after ending the curren
450. umber will appear in the list Clear Select a text block from the list then click on the Clear button to clear a text block from the list 262 The Paris Designer Reference Manual None And Or 2 Test Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu Select this button to display the View Change Test dialogue to set up the test conditions for the event to take place As tests apply to all event types Using Tests is described in detail on page 230 Select AND or OR from the drop down menu to activate the oe Test button A second test can be set up for an event Select the 2 Test button will display the View Change Test dialogue as above Using two tests for an event is described on page 238 under How do use two tests The Paris Designer Reference Manual 263 THE PAGE PARA SELECT INPUT TRAY EVENT FUNCTION A Select Input Tray event enables you to select the printer input paper tray ADDING A SELECT INPUT TRAY EVENT on Events menu gt Page Para gt Select Input Tray gt Add In the View Change Event List Page Para Events dialogue select Input Tray from the drop down menu then the Add button to display the Change Tray Event dialogue Change Tray Event x r Description Automatically Select Y Tests r Tray Enter a description of the event for easier identification in the event list Tray The required input tray can be selected from the drop down menu that displays the
451. umn Across Specified Range and the Line and Character range is already displayed in the dialogue 5 Click on the Position box to activate the Position Width and Justify options Click on OK You will be returned to the text block Until you change back to the original font you will not be able to view the effects of the column 490 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings To set the second column in the Summary text block 1 With the Edit tool still selected 100 332 tee ached Haw cates 3 Sek eh fess eee 13 447 positi n in the Miles used eee 31 476 text block Miles due to expire 12 456 Miles expired this year 18 567 Press Ctl M to Statement date mark the text in Last statement date the column Use the arrow keys to move the cursor across and down the text block to highlight 100 the text to be within Ner miles ccc ccc 18 the column Miles used As you move the Miles due to expire cursor the marked Miles expired this year 18 text will be Statement date 2 highlighted in Red Once the required text has been highlighted press Ctl F to display the Data Change Event dialogue The Paris Designer Reference Manual 491 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings W BUGS 2 78 5 Click on the Position box to activate the Position 6 4000 option
452. unction to highlight various elements of the page Bolding is achieved simply by overprinting a line or portion of a line to obtain the effect of a darker impression The method used to achieve bolding involves a single carriage return byte as follows The line or portion of the line to be bolded needs to be printed twice in some cases more than twice The second time must be exactly over the top of the previous line hence the term over printing Therefore while most lines will be terminated by a carriage return and line feed pair lines to be over printed will be terminated by a single carriage return only It is in these instances where we need to act on the carriage return byte How do I act on the carriage return bytes It is very important to honor these over print lines otherwise the line count will be affected Although laser printers can overprint they do not involve the impact of a hammer and are more accurate with the result that an overprinted line will be indiscernible from a normal single line While the over print lines are being honored some other method of bolding will be required Bolding is normally just a change to a new font or the bold version of the current font and must be achieved either by Local Text Block Font Change events Chapter 7 of the Paris Designer User s Manual or by the use of font indexes refer to the section The Input Filter Function on page 109 The Paris Designer Reference Manu
453. unique whether you create one anew or you add resources to an existing pak file Therefore the log window displays only the output for the current pack operation Q Ican see a font resource in the Advanced Resources Selection dialogue View and Select Resources Pack option within an environment but when I select it and try to pack it from either the dialogue or by using the Add Selected Files and Required Resources option it does not pack Why A The most common problem is that the environment file or form or pagedef containing the offending font has been imported from another machine so it shows the font without any problems However when the pack routine tries to pack this font it looks for the corresponding physical file for example an Ipf font called line printer 9 regular may not have the required physical file LI90 lpf or a similar name in the paris env fnt directory f NOTE The ttf fonts are in the Windows font directory and Ipf fonts are in the paris env fnt directory The Paris Designer Reference Manual 301 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu 302 Q When I select the Font file type in the Add Pack Files dialogue it shows me all the fonts but when I select and try to pack it I cannot Why A The fonts you see appearing in the view are actually taken from the fonts ini file which is stored in an internal list in Paris The Resource Manager reads and displays the fonts from this list In
454. urrent settings for the selected Text To use the options within each dialogue the same processes are required with the addition of the Properties function for Dynamic Text elements DEFAULT TEXT SETTINGS DIALOGUE Selecting the Text tool then clicking on the Settings button will display the Default Text Settings dialogue When adding Dynamic Text to an environment the Default Text Settings dialogue displays a Properties option for setting Fixed Float or Resize properties x r Attributes r Position Font arial 10 Italic 48 0 dts Add Frame Spacing 8 0 Dots Y Reset Edit font list Left 0 0 Rotate None uu o Color O Word wrapping enabled Width 0 0 r Sample Height 0 0 123 ABC xyz Horizontal Justify Let ka Vertical Justify og bd m Properties Horizontal Fised X Vertical Fixed X ca 384 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 14 Editing Dynamic and Static Text Settings Default Text Settings J x m Attributes Position 34 Font arial 10 Regular 5 0 Ipi z Add Frame Spacing 5o Per Inch Reset Edit font list Left 0 0 Rotate None Top Color a Word wrapping enabled a Width 0 0 m Sampl sii Height 0 0 123 ABC xyz Horizontal Justify Left v Vertical Justify Top E Cancel The Default Text Settings dial
455. ut keys for editing text in an environment Text Editing Start Mark Ctl M Stop Mark GH G Gut GEHEN Gopy GU G Paste Ctl P Insert Field ctl I Fill Field CH U Change Data CtI F Edit Event Ct E Next Event Ctl N Search Replace Ctl R Read Text File Ctl T Read Next Text Ctl W Font View cel y To activate the Text Editing menu select the Edit tool and click on the text to be edited either added text or in a text block The menu is context sensitive that is depending on what action is being performed in the Designer the appropriate options will be available or ghosted For example if you are marking text using the Start Mark Ctl M option once the text is marked the Stop Mark Ctl Q option will be made available Similarly if you are editing a field the Fill Field Ctl U option will be available Refer also to The Info View Window Appendix A Using the Keyboard in the Environment Editor and Appendix B Using the Keyboard in the Form Editor in the Paris Designer User s Manual The Paris Designer Reference Manual 103 Chapter 4 Functions in the Text Editing Menu TEXT EDITING OPTIONS To use any option select the Edit tool and place the cursor at the required position in the text or text block then use the shortcut keys Shortcut Keys Start Mark Ctl M Enter Mark mode to mark text for insertion of events Stop Mark Ctl Q Exit Mark mode once required text has bee
456. ut was not followed by an opening bracket Examples F1 NUM F2 no parameters for NUM Correction Add a parameter list or check that a Field name has not been misspelled as a function name The Paris Designer Reference Manual 217 Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Parameter Must be Field Name Cause The first parameter to the functions CUR DEF and SET must be a valid field name Examples CUR test test is a string not a Field name SET 56 F1 Parameters in the wrong order Correction Check each occurrence of CUR DEF and SET to ensure that the first parameter is a valid Field name Invalid CONSTANT Id Cause Some Functions take a predefined set of identifiers as a parameter An invalid identifier was found Examples STRIP F1 test second parameter for STRIP must be either STRIP START or STRIP END STRIP F1 STRIP ALL STRIP ALL is not a valid parameter for STRIP Correction Check the syntax of the function and enter a valid identifier for the required parameter Cause A general message indicating a non specific error in the Calculation string This error should rarely occur Correction Check the string for general syntax 218 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 5 Functions in the Environment Menu Inserting System Values into Fields The following system values can be used within the Calculation string of a Field to allow these values to be used for insert
457. verflow Form to format the subsequent pages Setting the Text Block Data Overflow option Data Overflow Selecting the Active checkbox activates the Select buttons for Active Overflow Page and Overflow Form Clicking on the Select button for the Overflow Page option will display the Select Page Def dialogue for selection of the required pagedef Overflow Page Select Clicking on the Select button for the Overflow Form option will display the Select Enter File To Load dialogue for selection of the required form Overflow Form Select The Paris Designer Reference Manual 471 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings ADDING LOCAL TEXT BLOCK EVENTS Events added to a text block local text block events are output events that allow you to specify changes that are to take place within the text block They will not affect other text blocks Unconditional and Conditional events A local text block event can be an unconditional event which operates on specific character or line ranges within the text block or a conditional event which occurs only when set test conditions are met Each type of conditional test that can be applied to an event and the use of the View Change Test dialogue is described in the section Using Tests in Chapter 7 of this manual How are Local Text Block events added Events are added to a text block by displaying the View Change Text Block Settings dialogue for the text block and selecting the Events
458. workstation must be defined as the queue s Server 4f NOTE You must be logged into the network with Supervisor access to create or modify a Novell queue View Change Novell Queues x Available Queues Current Members C Users Servers Ops CREDITNOTE Q REPORT Q ip SPOOLER USER Paris Designer Reference Manual 578 Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris How DO CREATE A NEW NOVELL QUEUE FOR INPUT gt To create a Novell queue for input 1 Ensure that you are logged in with Supervisor access 2 Select Data from the File menu in the Environment Editor then select Capture Data from the sub menu to display the Select Input Source For Data Capture dialogue Select Input Source For Data Capture x Input Type Type SK NN Input Source 3 In the dialogue ensure that a Novell queue name is displayed in the Type box then click on the Settings button The View Change Novell Queues dialogue will be displayed The Paris Designer Reference Manual 579 Appendix B Creating and Preparing Novell Print Queues for Input into Paris 4 Click on the Add button to display the Enter Queue Name dialogue The queue name must be Alphanumeric and can be up to 49 characters View Change Novell Queues x Available Queues C Users Servers C Ops ls Members E SPOOLER USER CRE
459. xample you may select to open a pak file first however the following descriptions will follow the standard procedure for using the Resource Manager The Paris Designer Reference Manual 291 Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu PACKING RESOURCES The Resource Manager can be opened either by selecting Resource Manager from the Utilities menu or by using the shortcut key F2 79 To pack resources In the Resource Manager dialogue click on the New button to display the Packer Options dialogue 2 In the Pack File Name edit box enter the path name and file name of the new pack pak file x Pack File Name ENPARISNUSRNPACKT PAK Runtime Options r Line Length Test sxLP Variable Offset Carriage Ret Line Feed Skp 5 H C Fixed 32 OK Cancel xi OR Click on the button adjacent to the edit box to display the Save As dialog and select the required directory Enter the filename in the File name text box then click on Save My Network P File name packt J Save as type Pack Cancel f NOTE By default the pack file name is generated as pack1 pak pack2 pak and so on This can be overridden by specifying your own file name and path in the file name edit box 292 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 7 Functions in the Events menu SETTING THE PACKER OPTIONS gt Utilities menu gt Resource
460. ximize the effectiveness of your documents Where applicable one of these tools will be the Euro Rates conversion utility In conjunction with the Euro functions Event and Field functions are used to enable currency conversions to and from the Euro Basically a field is added to an environment and the value of the field is filled either by entering a calculation string using Euro functions in the Calculation text box in the Add Edit field dialogue or via a local text block Data Change event The use of the Field function is described in Chapter 8 of the Paris Designer User s Manual and under The Fields Function in Chapter 5 of this manual The Events function and the use of local text block Data Change events are described in Chapter 7 of the Paris Designer User s Manual and Chapter 20 of this manual 325 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Euro Functions in the Paris Designer ADDING A CURRENCY VALUE TO THE EURO RATES TABLE 326 Your first step in using the Euro Rates utility is to add the currency values that you require to the rates table To do this you should have Operator access refer to the previous section Viewing Fixed Rates Adding or Editing Variable Rates on page 313 This View Fixed Rates Edit Variable Rates view displays the View Change Conversion Rates dialogue The fixed exchange rates for the currency of each of the 11 countries participating in the European Monetary Union are listed gt To
461. xpiry date 12 Apr 980i 10 Regular Note the appearance of the text with a fixed pitch font New Miles a e fen te pel GV 59 95 15 19739 SEL WU EL V 13 f 447 Miles used oe 31 476 488 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings To set the first column in the Summary text block New miles eoe ccc ccc Miles used oe Miles due to expire Miles ezpired this year Statement date 100 332 seen rt 0 1 476 12 456 18 867 12 Jan 98 3 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor across and down the text block to highlight the text to be within the column As you move the cursor the marked text will be highlighted in Red 4 Once the required text has been highlighted press Ctl F to display the Data Change Event dialogue New niles Pon eso Miles used s due to expire expired this year Statement date B2 303 100 332 Pees 13 447 PE 31 476 vee PAD ABB 2 18 567 NOTE If you are setting a tab rather than a column place the cursor at the required tab position and press Ctl F without marking any text The Paris Designer Reference Manual 489 Chapter 20 Editing Text Block Settings Though not yet activated the position and width of the column are displayed m mimm m I Because you have marked the text to be included in the col
462. y matches a Windows family name which can include spaces but not commas and style to another Windows family name and style For example XPDFontSubstitution Helvetica Regular Arial Regular Font Name Mapping file information 75 The Font Name Mapping file FontName xfs consists of entries that map a PostScript internal name to a Windows name and style This file is necessary because PostScript fonts have an internal name which MUST be used when calling this font from the printer However the Windows name for a PostScript font is often not the same and this file provides the link It gives us the mapping between the PostScript internal name and the Windows name The syntax is XPDFontName postscriptName Windows family name style For example XPDFontName Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Regular The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 1 Functions in the Environment Editor File Menu Making a Type 1 font available to Paris Paris determines the Type 1 fonts that can be used and how to use them when printing in two slightly different ways depending upon whether Adobe ATM is loaded or not If Adobe Type Manager ATM is loaded A list of available fonts is requested from ATM 1 The system looks at the currently selected printer 2 A list of the fonts resident on the printer and for which we can locate a width table is added to the list from ATM 3 This printer resident list is created by first c
463. yle for the header from each drop down menu The Header border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Click on the Show checkbox to show the footer for the chart Enter the footer Text Font and Border as above 444 The Paris Designer Reference Manual Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the Legend for a Complex Bar Chart Default Chart Settings i x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Display Font Arial 10 Bold Border None Position Anchor Right Y v Align Vertically Apply Show Legend Click on the Show Legend checkbox to show the legend Choose the required Font Size and Style for the legend from each drop down menu Border The Legend border Choose Solid or None from the Border menu Choose Top Bottom Right Left Top Right Top Left Bottom Right or Bottom Left as the anchor position for the legend Align Click on the Align Vertically checkbox to align the legend Vertically vertically The Paris Designer Reference Manual 445 Chapter 19 Editing Chart Settings Defining the Axis Settings for a Complex Bar Chart x Attributes Data Labels Headings Legend Axis General Font Aria e Bold Italic wG i None gt Border None Y ar Grid None Y Y Axis v Auto Calculate Values Min a Max 50 Ticks 5 Label Million E 0 X Axis Click on the Font menu arrow to choose a

PARIS DESIGNER REFERENCE MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents